EMS Technologies Canada HSD-X eNfusion HSD-X Aeronautical Satcom Terminal User Manual MN 1110 10113

EMS Technologies Canada, Ltd. eNfusion HSD-X Aeronautical Satcom Terminal MN 1110 10113

HSD-X User Manual

EMS SATCOM 400 Maple Grove Road Ottawa, Ontario K2V 1B8 CANADA eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalSystem Description, Installation, and Maintenance ManualMN-1110-10113 Revision E18 September 2007This manual supercedes MN-1110-10023 and MN-1110-10057 and provides documentation for the equipment listed below.Model PNeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal1110-A-00011110-A-00601110-A-00701110-A-00801110-A-01501110-A-0160
PROPRIETARY STATEMENTThis document contains information which is proprietary and confidential to SATCOM (EMS Technologies Canada, Ltd.). Neither this document nor the information contained within may be used for any purpose other than the purpose for which it was prepared. Neither this document nor the information contained within may be disclosed or copied without the prior written permission of EMS SATCOM. © 2006 EMS Technologies Canada, Ltd. All Rights Reserved.eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALDocument Number: MN-1110-10113, Revision ECopyright © 2006, 2007 EMS SATCOM (EMS Technologies Canada, Ltd.) All rights reserved. Cabin Network Xcelerator® and CNX® are registered trademarks of EMS Technologies, Ltd. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Other product, brand, service, and company names herein are the trademarks of their respective owners.The AMBE® voice compression technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. This voice compression Technology is licensed solely for use within an Inmarsat satellite communications system.Our products are under continuous research and development. Any information may therefore be changed without prior notice. EMS SATCOM reserves the right to make improvements or changes in the product described in this manual at any time without notice. While reasonable efforts have been made in the preparation of this document to assure its accuracy, EMS SATCOM assumes no liability resulting from any errors or omissions in this document, or from the use of the information contained herein. Printed in Canada.EMS SATCOM400 Maple Grove Road, Ottawa, Ontario K2V 1B8, CANADAEMS SATCOM Reception: 613-591-9064EMS SATCOM Product Support: 888-300-7415 (routed to a Mobile after regular business hours)EMS SATCOM Product Support fax: 613-591-0797EMS SATCOM E-mail Help: hsd.help@emssatcom.comEMS SATCOM Web site: www.emssatcom.comEMS SATCOM Sales and Marketing: 800-600-9759Revision TableRevision ECR DescriptionAN/A First releaseB030758 Updated to include new installation modesC040711040673050060061189Updated Service Bulletin MatrixAdded AMBE copyright statementUpdated middle plug connections on table and drawingsUpdated terminologyD070552 Removed section cover pagesUpdated frequency bands, service bulletins, and added LED label sectionE070111 Updated address and telephone numbers
CUSTOMER RESPONSE FORMTo help us improve the quality of our product documentation, EMS SATCOM would appreciate your comments and suggestions on this publication. Please complete the following customer survey and send to EMS SATCOM at:EMS SATCOM 400 Maple Grove Road Ottawa, ON K2V 1B8E-mail: techdocs@emssatcom.comFax: EMS SATCOM Product Support at 613-591-3086Publication information:Customer information:Comments and suggestions:Publication number: MN-1110-10113Publication title: eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal System Description, Installation, and Maintenance ManualLatest issue date: 18 September 2007Document revision: EName:Company:Tel:Fax:Email:Date:Comments:
Blank Page
Page SBL–125 May 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalSERVICE BULLETIN LISTService Bulletin NumberSubject Manual Rev. NumberManual Rev. Date1110-SB-0001 Channel card software upgrade (C30) to accommodate Inmarsat system changeA 10-Feb-031110-SB-0002 Backplane modification to HPA wiring harness and power supply circuits of the control processor cardA 10-Feb-031110-SB-0003 Upgrade to HSD HPA software to improve power management by the HSD to the SAT-906 SDUA 08-Apr-031110-SB-0004 Upgrade hardware to include an Data I/O Type 2 Card to support the Ethernet (10BASE-T) interface for data input and outputA 06-Aug-031110-SB-0005 Upgrade the hardware for Combined Mode operationB 06-Aug-031110-SB-0006 Channel Card Software MPDS upgradeA 05-Nov-031110-SB-0007 Software upgrade for Multi-Channel operationA 20-Nov-031110-SB-0008 Not applicable N/A N/A1110-SB-0009 Not applicable N/A N/A1110-SB-0010 Hardware upgrade for dual channelA 05-Aug-031110-SB-0011 HSD Software Upgrade B 19-Nov-031110-SB-0012 HSD Software Enhancement A 19-Nov-031110-SB-0013 Addition of Software Identification LabelA 09-Dec-031110-SB-0014 Data I/O Type 2 Software UpgradeA 12-Mar-041110-SB-0015 HSD Control Processor Software EnhancementB 15-Jun-041110-SB-0016 HSD Transceiver Upgrade to HSD-400C 13-Oct-06
Page SBL–225 May 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal1110-SB-0017 HSD Transceiver Control Processor Software EnhancementA 24-Feb-051110-SB-0018 HSD Transceiver Channel Card Hardware ModificationC 10-Aug-051110-SB-0020 HSD Transceiver HPA DC Software UpgradeA 31-May-051110-SB-0021 2-Channel Cooperative Mode HSD Transceiver Control Processor Software EnhancementA 01-Feb-061110-SB-0022 GPS Protection Software UpgradeB 03-Jan-071110-SB-0023 HSD Transceiver Motherboard Hardware ReplacementA 25-Aug-061110-SB-0401 HSD-X Software Upgrade A 19-Nov-031110-SB-0402 Addition of Software Identification LabelA09-Dec-03Service Bulletin NumberSubject Manual Rev. NumberManual Rev. Date
Page RR–118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalRECORD OF REVISIONSWhen revisions are received, insert revised pages, record the date, and initial.Revision NumberIssue DateDate InsertedInserted by (initial)Revision NumberIssue DateDate InsertedInserted by (initial)
Page RR–218 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalBlank Page
Page LEP–118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalLIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES* An asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current revision.F indicates a right foldout page with a blank back.Section Page DateCover *ALL Nov. 3, 2006Front Matter *ALL Nov. 3, 2006Customer Comment Form *ALL Nov. 3, 2006List of Effective Pages *ALL Nov. 3, 2006Record of Revisions *ALL Nov. 3, 2006Service Bulletin List *ALL Nov. 3, 2006Table of Contents *ALL Nov. 3, 2006Introduction *ALL Nov. 3, 2006System Description *ALL Nov. 3, 2006System Operation *ALL Nov. 3, 2006Installation *ALL Nov. 3, 2006Test and Fault Isolation *ALL Nov. 3, 2006Maintenance and Repair *ALL Nov. 3, 2006Appendix A *ALL Nov. 3, 2006Appendix B *ALL Nov. 3, 2006Appendix C *ALL Nov. 3, 2006Appendix D *ALL Nov. 3, 2006Appendix E *ALL Nov. 3, 2006Appendix F *ALL Nov. 3, 2006Service Bulletin List *ALL May 25, 2007List of Effective Pages *ALL May 25, 2007System Description *ALL May 25, 2007System Operation *ALL May 25, 2007
Page LEP–218 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalBlank Page
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalPage TC–118 September 2007Table of ContentsINTRODUCTION1. General .................................................................................................... TC-12. Abbreviations and Acronyms................................................................. TC-23. Advisories ................................................................................................ TC-44. Illustration of Equipment Covered......................................................... TC-5SYSTEM DESCRIPTION1. Purpose of Equipment .............................................................................. 1-12. Equipment Covered.................................................................................... 1-3A. Hardware Description ......................................................................................... 1-3B. Software Description .......................................................................................... 1-5(1) Software Specifications ................................................................................. 1-5(2) Operational Software Part Numbers.............................................................. 1-6(3) Operational Mode Software Requirements.................................................... 1-6(4) Software Version Description ........................................................................ 1-83. Equipment Description ............................................................................ 1-14A. Applicable Documents...................................................................................... 1-14B. Reference Documents...................................................................................... 1-14C. Equipment Specifications ................................................................................. 1-14D. Mechanical Description .................................................................................... 1-19(1) HSD Transceiver ........................................................................................ 1-19(2) HSD-X Transceiver...................................................................................... 1-19E. Electrical Description........................................................................................ 1-20(1) General ....................................................................................................... 1-20(2) Pin and Connector Descriptions .................................................................. 1-21F. System Interface Descriptions .......................................................................... 1-21(1) HSD System Interfaces ............................................................................... 1-21(2) HSD-X Multi-Channel System Interfaces .................................................... 1-24G. User Interfaces ................................................................................................. 1-27
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalPage TC–218 September 2007(1) Stand-Alone Mode User Interfaces..............................................................1-28(2) Collins Cooperative Mode User Interfaces ..................................................1-28(3) Honeywell Combined Mode User Interfaces ............................................... 1-28(4) Selective Mode User Interfaces................................................................... 1-28(5) Multi-Channel Configurations ...................................................................... 1-28(6) ISDN Circuit-Switched Data Interface ......................................................... 1-31(7) RS-232 Interface ........................................................................................ 1-32(8) Ethernet Data Interface ............................................................................... 1-33(9) ISDN S/T Interface ...................................................................................... 1-33(10) Maintenance Port Interface ....................................................................... 1-33H. Initiated-Self-Test.............................................................................................. 1-34I. Owner Requirements Table ............................................................................... 1-344. Inmarsat System Overview...................................................................... 1-35A. General............................................................................................................. 1-35B. Satellite Network Overview............................................................................... 1-355. HSD Modes and Configuration Descriptions......................................... 1-37A. General............................................................................................................. 1-37B. Overview........................................................................................................... 1-37(1) Channel Card Configurations ...................................................................... 1-37(2) Installation Modes and Configurations......................................................... 1-38C. Functional System Theory................................................................................1-44SYSTEM OPERATION1. Introduction................................................................................................ 2-12. Activating HSD Transceivers..................................................................... 2-2A. Obtaining Terminal Information...........................................................................2-2(1) Swift64 Service Categories............................................................................ 2-3B. Selecting a Service Provider .............................................................................. 2-4C. Registering and Activating the HSD and HSD-X Transceivers .......................... 2-43. Configuring HSD Systems......................................................................... 2-5A. Setting up Networks ........................................................................................... 2-5(1) Network Types ............................................................................................... 2-5(2) Networking Components ............................................................................... 2-6(3) HSD Interface Options................................................................................... 2-6B. Mapping User Devices for ISDN Services.......................................................... 2-7
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalPage TC–318 September 2007(1) Overview........................................................................................................ 2-7C. Configuring System Parameters using the Maintenance Port Utility................ 2-14(1) Configuring System Parameters for Stand-Alone Mode ............................. 2-14(2) Configuring System Parameters for Cooperative Mode ............................. 2-16(3) Configuring System Parameters for Honeywell Combined Mode .............. 2-17(4) Configuring System Parameters for Selective Mode .................................. 2-21(5) Configuring System Parameters for Multi-Channel Configurations ............. 2-23D. Configuring LES Access Codes (All Modes).................................................... 2-24(1) General Overview ....................................................................................... 2-24E. Removing the LED Label ................................................................................. 2-30F. Activating Configurations .................................................................................. 2-30(1) Verifying Configurations............................................................................... 2-31G. Configuring System Parameters using the HSD Owner Requirement Tool...... 2-31(1) Creating an ORT using the HSD ORT Tool ................................................. 2-32(2) Saving the ORT file ..................................................................................... 2-38(3) Loading the ORT ......................................................................................... 2-38(4) Loading ORT Files....................................................................................... 2-394. Using the HSD System............................................................................. 2-43A. Placing Voice and Fax Calls............................................................................. 2-43(1) Dial Code Prefixes....................................................................................... 2-44(2) Mobile-to-Mobile Communication ................................................................ 2-45B. Using Data Connections................................................................................... 2-46(1) Mobile ISDN versus MPDS ......................................................................... 2-46(2) Connecting to Inmarsat Mobile ISDN Service ............................................. 2-46(3) Connecting to Inmarsat MPDS ................................................................... 2-48(4) Bonding Channel Cards in Two-Channel Card Systems............................. 2-50INSTALLATION1. Introduction................................................................................................ 3-12. Advisories ................................................................................................... 3-23. Pre-Installation Inspection......................................................................... 3-34. Unpacking and Inspecting Equipment ..................................................... 3-45. Cabling and Connector Requirements ..................................................... 3-5A. Power Requirements.......................................................................................... 3-5B. Ground Requirements ........................................................................................ 3-5
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalPage TC–418 September 2007C. Cable Shielding and Termination........................................................................ 3-56. ARINC 600 Trays and Connectors............................................................. 3-7A. Installation Kits ................................................................................................... 3-7B. Cabling Notes ..................................................................................................... 3-8(1) HSD Transceiver Cabling .............................................................................. 3-8(2) HSD-X Transceiver Cabling........................................................................... 3-8(3) HSD Transceiver Coaxial Cable Loss Considerations .................................. 3-87. Mechanical Installation .............................................................................. 3-9A. General............................................................................................................... 3-9B. Physical Placement ............................................................................................3-9C. Environmental Requirements ........................................................................... 3-10(1) Heating and Cooling .................................................................................... 3-10D. Chassis Grounding........................................................................................... 3-118. Electrical Installation................................................................................ 3-12A. Section I: Stand-Alone Mode Installation.......................................................... 3-12(1) Stand-Alone Mode Installations Wiring Notes.............................................. 3-12B. Section II: Combined (HCM)/Selective Mode Installation................................. 3-28(1) Combined Mode (HCM)/Selective Mode Installations Wiring Notes............ 3-28C. Section III: Cooperative Mode Installation........................................................ 3-44(1) Cooperative Mode Installations Wiring Notes.............................................. 3-44D. Section IV: Multi-Channel Configuration Installation ........................................ 3-59(1) Multi-Channel Configuration Installation Wiring Notes ................................ 3-599. Outline/Installation and Interconnection/Contact Assignment Diagrams..3-83A. Outline/Installation Diagrams............................................................................3-83B. Interconnection/Contact Assignment Drawings................................................ 3-83TEST AND FAULT ISOLATION1. Introduction................................................................................................ 4-12. Operational and Diagnostic Testing ......................................................... 4-2A. General............................................................................................................... 4-2B. Test and Fault Isolation Equipment Requirements ............................................. 4-2C. HSD Maintenance Utility Program...................................................................... 4-3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalPage TC–518 September 2007(1) General Overview.......................................................................................... 4-3(2) Connection Requirements ............................................................................. 4-4(3) Accessing the Maintenance Utility Program .................................................. 4-7(4) Using the HSD Maintenance Utility Program................................................. 4-8(5) Menu Descriptions......................................................................................... 4-9(6) Menu Item Descriptions............................................................................... 4-12(7) Report Item Descriptions ............................................................................. 4-30(8) Activating Maintenance Reports.................................................................. 4-33D. Fault Definitions ............................................................................................... 4-36(1) Cause Indication (Fault Codes) ................................................................... 4-36(2) Inmarsat Cause Codes................................................................................ 4-36E. Operational and Diagnostic Test Procedures ................................................... 4-48(1) General........................................................................................................ 4-48(2) Test Setup Procedure .................................................................................. 4-49(3) Post Test...................................................................................................... 4-50(4) Installation and Operational Verification Tests............................................. 4-50(5) Configuration Parameters Verification ......................................................... 4-52(6) System Power-up Checks ........................................................................... 4-55(7) System On-Air Checks ................................................................................ 4-56(8) Antenna Tracking Checks............................................................................ 4-60(9) Optional System Checks ............................................................................. 4-61F. Operational Mode and Configuration System Checks ...................................... 4-62(1) Verifying Cooperative Mode System Operation........................................... 4-62(2) Verifying Honeywell Combined Mode System Operation ............................ 4-62(3) Verifying Multi-Channel Configuration System Operation ........................... 4-67G. Software Load Procedures............................................................................... 4-70(1) Loading Channel Card Software ................................................................. 4-71(2) Loading Control Processor Software........................................................... 4-73(3) Forcing Channel Card Power Up Procedure ............................................... 4-76(4) Loading HPA Software................................................................................. 4-76(5) Verifying Software Loads............................................................................. 4-78(6) Disconnecting Load Equipment................................................................... 4-79(7) Completing Record of Accomplishment ...................................................... 4-803. Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation....................................................... 4-81A. Troubleshooting Principles ............................................................................... 4-81(1) Non-specific Complaints.............................................................................. 4-81(2) Specific Complaints ..................................................................................... 4-81B. Equipment Required......................................................................................... 4-81
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalPage TC–618 September 2007C. Troubleshooting Aids........................................................................................4-81(1) Fault Isolation Screen Displays ................................................................... 4-81(2) Troubleshooting Table ................................................................................. 4-93D. Fault Isolation and Diagnostic Procedures..................................................... 4-101(1) Activating and Saving a Diagnostic ‘Reports’ File ..................................... 4-1024. Adjustment/Alignment Procedures....................................................... 4-104A. General........................................................................................................... 4-1045. Modification History ............................................................................... 4-105MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR1. General ....................................................................................................... 5-12. Maintenance............................................................................................... 5-13. Repair ......................................................................................................... 5-1A. Repair Tools and Supplies.................................................................................. 5-1B. Repair Procedures.............................................................................................. 5-1C. Removal Procedures.......................................................................................... 5-1D. Repair Facility Approvals.................................................................................... 5-2E. Return for Repair Information ............................................................................. 5-2(1) Warranty Returns........................................................................................... 5-2(2) Non-Warranty Returns................................................................................... 5-2(3) Repackaging Requirements .......................................................................... 5-2(4) Return Materials Authorization (RMA) Procedure ......................................... 5-34. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness, FAR 25.1529 ........................ 5-4A. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness Procedures......................................... 5-4APPENDIX A: INMARSAT SATELLITE BEAM COVERAGE.................................... A-1APPENDIX B: TROUBLESHOOTING CHECKLIST .................................................. B-1APPENDIX C: RJ-45 CABLE TERMINATION DETAILS........................................... C-1APPENDIX D: INSTALLATION CHECKLIST ............................................................ D-1APPENDIX E: RECORD OF ACCOMPLISHMENT.................................................... E-1APPENDIX F: RF SPLITTER ......................................................................................F-1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalPage TC–718 September 2007List of FiguresFigure TC–1. HSD-128 Terminal .............................................................................................. TC-5Figure TC–2. HSD-X SATCOM High-Speed-Data Transceiver Extension ............................... TC-6Figure 1–1. Forward ID Assignment (3-channel system) .......................................................... 1-25Figure 1–2. Forward ID Assignment (4-channel system) .......................................................... 1-25Figure 1–3. Maintenance Port Access....................................................................................... 1-26Figure 1–4. System Interface Block Diagram Single Channel System ...................................... 1-29Figure 1–5. Reduced Functionality Single-Channel System ..................................................... 1-30Figure 1–6. System Interface Block Diagram Dual-Channel System ........................................ 1-30Figure 1–7. Reduced Functionality Dual-Channel System ........................................................ 1-31Figure 1–8. ISDN Connection Options ...................................................................................... 1-32Figure 1–9. Simplified Aeronautical Satellite Communications System .................................... 1-36Figure 1–10. Multi-Channel System Block Diagram .................................................................. 1-40Figure 1–11. Stand-Alone Mode System Block Diagram .......................................................... 1-41Figure 1–12. Cooperative Mode System Block Diagram........................................................... 1-42Figure 1–13. Combined/Selective Mode System Block Diagram ............................................. 1-43Figure 1–14. HSD User Configurations ..................................................................................... 1-45Figure 2–1. Network Configuration Types ................................................................................... 2-5Figure 2–2. System Setup and Mapping for Incoming Calls (Fixed-to-Mobile)............................ 2-9Figure 2–3. Terminal Emulation Program, ASCII Setup ............................................................ 2-25Figure 2–4. HSD Dialing-Sequence Components ..................................................................... 2-43Figure 2–5. Mobile-to-Mobile Dialing Sequence........................................................................ 2-46Figure 3–1. HSD-X Physical Placement Requirements............................................................. 3-10Figure 3–2. Fan Tray Plug Configuration................................................................................... 3-11Figure 3–3. Forward ID, Hex to Binary Conversion ................................................................... 3-15Figure 3–4. HSD Remote Reset Circuit – Stand-Alone ............................................................. 3-16Figure 3–5. HSD Remote LED Panel Circuit – Stand-Alone ..................................................... 3-17Figure 3–6. RJ-45 Connector Terminator Details – Stand-Alone .............................................. 3-18Figure 3–7. User Data I/O Mode Configurations – Stand-Alone................................................ 3-22Figure 3–8. Forward ID, Hex to Binary Conversion – Combined/Selective ............................... 3-31Figure 3–9. HSD Remote Reset Circuit – Combined/Selective ................................................. 3-32Figure 3–10. HSD Remote LED Panel Circuit – Combined/Selective ....................................... 3-33Figure 3–11. RJ-45 Connector Terminator Details – Combined/Selective ................................ 3-34Figure 3–12. User Data I/O Mode Configurations – Combined/Selective ................................. 3-38
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalPage TC–818 September 2007Figure 3–13. Forward ID, Hex to Binary Conversion – Cooperative Mode................................ 3-47Figure 3–14. HSD Remote LED Panel Circuit – Cooperative Mode.......................................... 3-48Figure 3–15. RJ-45 Connector Terminator Details – Cooperative Mode................................... 3-50Figure 3–16. User Data I/O Mode Configurations – Cooperative Mode ....................................3-53Figure 3–17. HSD-X Coax Cable Loss ...................................................................................... 3-60Figure 3–18. Forward ID, Hex to Binary Conversion – Multi-Channel ....................................... 3-64Figure 3–19. HSD Remote Reset Circuit – Multi-Channel.........................................................3-66Figure 3–20. HSD Remote LED Panel Circuit – Multi-Channel ................................................. 3-66Figure 3–21. HSD-X Remote Status LED Driver Circuits – Multi-Channel ................................ 3-66Figure 3–22. RJ-45 Connector Terminator Details – Multi-Channel .......................................... 3-68Figure 3–23. User Data I/O Mode Configurations – Multi-Channel ...........................................3-72Figure 3–24. HSD-X Top Plug Connections (Illustrated) ........................................................... 3-79Figure 3–25 (Sheet 1). HSD Outline and Installation Drawing - 1110-E-0001, Rev D............... 3-85Figure 3–26 (Sheet 2). HSD Outline and Installation Drawing - 1110-E-0001, Rev D............... 3-87Figure 3–27 (Sheet 1). HSD-X Outline and Installation Drawing - 1110-E-0401, Rev 1............ 3-89Figure 3–28 (Sheet 2). HSD-X Outline and Installation Drawing - 1110-E-0401, Rev 1............ 3-91Figure 3–29 (Sheet 1). Stand-Alone Mode HSD System Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0019, Rev F.................................................................................................. 3-93Figure 3–30 (Sheet 2). Stand-Alone Mode HSD System Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0019, Rev F.................................................................................................. 3-95Figure 3–31 (Sheet 1). HSD Selective/Combined Mode Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0081, Rev D .................................................................................................3-97Figure 3–32 (Sheet 2). HSD Selective/Combined Mode Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0081, Rev D .................................................................................................3-99Figure 3–33 (Sheet 1). HSD Cooperative Mode Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0156, Rev 3 ................................................................................................3-101Figure 3–34 (Sheet 2). HSD Cooperative Mode Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0156, Rev 3 ................................................................................................3-103Figure 3–35 (Sheet 1). HSD-128 Multi-Channel Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0419, Rev C ...............................................................................................3-105Figure 3–36. (Sheet 2). HSD-128 Multi-Channel Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0419, Rev C ...............................................................................................3-107Figure 3–37 (Sheet 3). HSD-128 Multi-Channel Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0419, Rev C ...............................................................................................3-109Figure 3–38 (Sheet 4). HSD-128 Multi-Channel Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0419, Rev C ...............................................................................................3-111Figure 4–1. Multi-Channel Maintenance Port Access..................................................................4-4Figure 4–2. Remote Access, Maintenance Cable (HSD)............................................................. 4-6
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalPage TC–918 September 2007Figure 4–3. Front Panel Access, Maintenance Cable (HSD) ...................................................... 4-6Figure 4–4. HSD-X Front-Panel, Maintenance Port Cable .......................................................... 4-7Figure 4–5. Level 1 MENU Selections......................................................................................... 4-9Figure 4–6. Level 2: Menu 1 ...................................................................................................... 4-10Figure 4–7. Level 2: Menu 2 ...................................................................................................... 4-10Figure 4–8. Level 2: Menu 3 ...................................................................................................... 4-10Figure 4–9. Level 2: Menu10 .....................................................................................................4-11Figure 4–10. Level 2: Menu 13 .................................................................................................. 4-11Figure 4–11. Level 2: Menu 14 .................................................................................................. 4-11Figure 4–12. Level 2, Menu 15 .................................................................................................. 4-12Figure 4–13. Level 2, Menu 18 .................................................................................................. 4-12Figure 4–14. Menu 1 Screen Display ........................................................................................ 4-13Figure 4–15. Menu 2 Screen Display ........................................................................................ 4-14Figure 4–16. Menu 3 Screen Display ........................................................................................ 4-16Figure 4–17. Menu 3 – L: EEPROM Listing (Version 4.5) ......................................................... 4-18Figure 4–18. Menu 3 – Item M: Miscellaneous Parameters (Version 4.5)................................. 4-19Figure 4–19. Menu 3 – Item M: Miscellaneous Parameters (Version 7.0)................................. 4-19Figure 4–20. Menu 4 Screen Display ........................................................................................ 4-25Figure 4–21. Menu 10 Screen Display ...................................................................................... 4-26Figure 4–22. Menu 13 Screen Display ...................................................................................... 4-27Figure 4–23. Menu 14 Screen Display ...................................................................................... 4-28Figure 4–24. Menu 15 Screen Display ...................................................................................... 4-29Figure 4–25. Menu 18 Screen Display ...................................................................................... 4-29Figure 4–26. HSD Maintenance Utility Program: Report Items (Version 4.5)............................ 4-31Figure 4–27. HSD Maintenance Utility Program: Report Items (Version 7.0)............................ 4-32Figure 4–28. Example of Report Item 23................................................................................... 4-33Figure 4–29. Maintenance Port, Report Items ........................................................................... 4-35Figure 4–30. Sample EEPROM Listing (Control Processor Software, Version 4.5) .................. 4-53Figure 4–31. HSD ORT Sample Display (software version 5.7 or later).................................... 4-55Figure 4–32. HSD Power-up Display......................................................................................... 4-56Figure 4–33. Log-on Sample Initialization Display..................................................................... 4-58Figure 4–34. HSD Call Sample Display ..................................................................................... 4-60Figure 4–35. Stable Connection with one M4 (Swift64) call ...................................................... 4-64Figure 4–36. Initial Connection with two M4 (Swift64) calls....................................................... 4-64Figure 4–37. Stable Connection with two M4 (Swift64) calls ..................................................... 4-64
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalPage TC–1018 September 2007Figure 4–38. Call Initialization (Aero H/H+ call) .........................................................................4-65Figure 4–39. Stable Connection with one Aero H/H+ call.......................................................... 4-65Figure 4–40. Connection with two Aero H/H+ calls ................................................................... 4-65Figure 4–41. Connection with two Aero H/H+ calls and one M4 (Swift64) call..........................4-65Figure 4–42. Connection with two M4 (Swift64) calls and one Aero H call................................4-65Figure 4–43. Initial Connection with two Aero H/H+ calls and two M4 (Swift64) calls ............... 4-66Figure 4–44. Stable Connection with two Aero H/H+ calls and two M4 (Swift64) calls ............. 4-66Figure 4–45. Initial Call, Channel #1..........................................................................................4-69Figure 4–46. Stable Call, Channel #1 ........................................................................................ 4-70Figure 4–47. Confirmed Operation of Multi-Channel (4 calls up)............................................... 4-70Figure 4–48. Successful Ocean Region Registration: Report 21 activated ............................... 4-82Figure 4–49. No call: Report 23 activated..................................................................................4-82Figure 4–50. In Call: Reports 21 and 23 activated..................................................................... 4-82Figure 4–51. No IRS Data: Report 23 activated ........................................................................ 4-83Figure 4–52. No Signal: Report 23 activated .............................................................................4-83Figure 4–53. Failed Ocean Region Registration: Report 21 activated.......................................4-83Figure 4–54. Forward ID Not Strapped: No reports activated.................................................... 4-84Figure 4–55. No Strap on SDI Lines (open): No reports activated ............................................ 4-86Figure 4–56. Wrong Strap on SDI Lines (TP5A to GND)........................................................... 4-87Figure 4–57. Stand-Alone Mode Multi-Control Loopback (TP1A-3E & TP1B-3F) Not Wired: HSD Fault LED “ON” .......................................................................................................................... 4-88Figure 4–58. Incorrect Dialing Format: Reports 21 and 52 Enabled.......................................... 4-88Figure 4–59. Top/Port Antenna Status: Reports 18,19, and 20 activated ................................. 4-89Figure 4–60. AMBE Call (Mobile-to-Fixed) MES Terminated: Report 21 activated ................... 4-89Figure 4–61. AMBE Call (Mobile-to-Fixed) Terrestrial Terminated: Report 21 activated........... 4-89Figure 4–62. 64 K Speech call (Mobile to Fixed) Terrestrial Termination: Reports 21 and 23 activated ......................................................................................................4-90Figure 4–63. 64 K Speech Call (Mobile-to-Fixed) Terrestrial Termination: Reports 21 and 23 activated ......................................................................................................4-91Figure 4–64. Speech Call (Fixed-to-Mobile) Terrestrial Terminated: Report 21 activated......... 4-92Figure 4–65. FAX Call (Mobile-to-Fixed) Terrestrial Terminated: Report 21 activated.............. 4-92Figure 4–66. 64 K Speech and Data Call (Mobile-to-Fixed) MES Terminated: Report 21 activated....................................................................................................................4-93Figure 5–1. HSD-X Order of Removal .........................................................................................5-2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalPage TC–1118 September 2007List of Tables Table 1–1. Supported Services Matrix for HSD-128, HSD-64, and HSD-X................................... 1 Table 1–2. HSD Transceiver Variants ........................................................................................... 3 Table 1–3. Equipment Covered ..................................................................................................... 4 Table 1–4. HSD Operational Software .......................................................................................... 6 Table 1–5. HSD-X Operational Software ....................................................................................... 6 Table 1–6. Stand-Alone Mode Minimum Software Requirements ................................................. 6 Table 1–7. Combined Mode Recommended Software Requirements .......................................... 7 Table 1–8. Cooperative Mode Recommended Software Requirements ....................................... 7 Table 1–9. Selective Mode Minimum Software Requirements ...................................................... 8 Table 1–10. Multi-Channel Configuration Recommended Software Requirements ...................... 8 Table 1–11. Description of Control Processor Software Changes ................................................ 9 Table 1–12. Service Bulletin Matrix ............................................................................................. 12 Table 1–13. HSD Equipment Characteristics and Specifications ................................................ 14 Table 1–14. HSD RTCA/DO-160D Environmental Characteristics.............................................. 16 Table 1–15. HSD-X Transceiver Specifications........................................................................... 17 Table 1–16. HSD-X RTCA/DO-160D Environmental Specifications............................................ 18 Table 1–17. HSD Installation Mode Drawing Reference Matrix .................................................. 19 Table 1–18. ARINC 429 IRS Navigational Requirements ........................................................... 22 Table 1–19. HSD LED Output Designations................................................................................ 23 Table 1–20. HSD-X Front Panel LEDs Output Designations....................................................... 27 Table 2–1. Swift64 Category and Service Matrix........................................................................... 3 Table 2–2. IMN and MSN Assignments for ISDN Bus #1.............................................................. 9 Table 2–3. IMN and MSN Assignments for ISDN Bus #2.............................................................. 9 Table 2–4. HSD Transceiver MSN Configuration Table .............................................................. 12 Table 2–5. System Assignments for Incoming Calls (Fixed-to-Mobile) ....................................... 13 Table 2–6. Inmarsat Swift64 LES Status (As of January, 2004).................................................. 26 Table 2–7. DATA I/O Naming Convention for AC-Name ............................................................. 37 Table 2–8. Description of Select Contents Dialog Box Options................................................... 39 Table 2–9. Dial Code Prefixes for Forcing Service Type Selection ............................................. 44 Table 2–10. Dial Code Prefixes for System Overrides ................................................................ 45 Table 2–11. Satellite Ocean Region Codes................................................................................. 45 Table 3–1. Cable Shielding and Termination Specifications ......................................................... 5 Table 3–2. HSD and HSD-X Installation Kits................................................................................. 7
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalPage TC–1218 September 2007 Table 3–3. RF Parameters Definition........................................................................................... 13 Table 3–4. WOW Pin Wiring Table .............................................................................................. 14 Table 3–5. RJ45 Wiring Details – Stand-Alone............................................................................ 18 Table 3–6. Configuration Pin Summary – Stand-Alone ............................................................... 19 Table 3–7. Stand-Alone System Mode Pin Strapping – Stand-Alone.......................................... 20 Table 3–8. Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Stand-Alone ............................................................. 21 Table 3–9. Stand-Alone Mode HSD to BSU Interconnects.......................................................... 22 Table 3–10. Stand-Alone Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection Details ................................. 23 Table 3–11. Stand-Alone Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection Details ............................. 26 Table 3–12. Stand-Alone ARINC 600 Bottom Plug Connection Details ...................................... 28 Table 3–13. RF Parameters Definition – Combined/Selective..................................................... 29 Table 3–14. WOW Pin Wiring Table – Combined/Selective ........................................................ 30 Table 3–15. RJ45 Wiring Details – Combined/Selective ............................................................ 34 Table 3–16. Configuration Pin Summary – Combined/Selective ................................................. 35 Table 3–17. Combined Mode System Mode Pin Strapping ......................................................... 35 Table 3–18. Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Combined/Selective ............................................... 37 Table 3–19. Receive Path Parts Requirements – Combined/Selective....................................... 39 Table 3–20. Combined/Selective Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection Details ..................... 39 Table 3–21. Combined/Selective Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection Details................. 42 Table 3–22. Combined/Selective Mode ARINC 600 Bottom Plug Connection Details ................ 43 Table 3–23. RF Parameters Definition – Cooperative Mode ....................................................... 45 Table 3–24. RJ-45 Wiring Details – Cooperative Mode............................................................... 49 Table 3–25. Configuration Pin Summary – Cooperative Mode.................................................... 50 Table 3–26. System Mode Pin Strapping – Cooperative Mode ................................................... 51 Table 3–27. Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Cooperative Mode.................................................. 52 Table 3–28. Receive Path Parts Requirements – Cooperative Mode ......................................... 54 Table 3–29. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection Details.................................. 54 Table 3–30. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection Details ............................. 57 Table 3–31. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Bottom Plug Connection Details............................. 59 Table 3–32. Coax Cable Losses – Multi-Channel........................................................................ 60 Table 3–33. RF Parameters Definition – Multi-Channel .............................................................. 62 Table 3–34. WOW Pin Wiring Table – Multi-Channel.................................................................. 63 Table 3–35. RJ-45 Wiring Details – Multi-Channel ...................................................................... 68 Table 3–36. Configuration Pin Summary – Multi-Channel........................................................... 69 Table 3–37. System Mode Pin Strapping – Multi-Channel .......................................................... 69
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalPage TC–1318 September 2007 Table 3–38. Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Multi-Channel......................................................... 71 Table 3–39. HSD-128 Multi-Channel Configuration ARINC 600 Top Plug Connections............. 73 Table 3–40. HSD-128 Multi-Channel Configuration, ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connections........ 75 Table 3–41. HSD-128 Multi-Channel Configuration ARINC 600 Bottom Plug Connections........ 77 Table 3–42. HSD-X Top Plug Connections ................................................................................. 78 Table 3–43. HSD-X Middle Plug Connections– Multi-Channel.................................................... 80 Table 3–44. HSD-X Bottom Plug – Multi-Channel....................................................................... 81 Table 3–45. HSD-X I/O Data Strapping– Multi-Channel.............................................................. 81 Table 3–46. Inter-LRU RF Connection Considerations for Attenuators– Multi-Channel.............. 82 Table 4–1. List of Required Test Equipment ................................................................................. 2 Table 4–2. List of Optional Test Equipment................................................................................... 3 Table 4–3. Remote Maintenance Port Access Cabling (HSD) ...................................................... 4 Table 4–4. Front-Panel Maintenance Port Access Cabling (HSD) ................................................ 5 Table 4–5. HSD-X Maintenance Port Pin Descriptions ................................................................. 5 Table 4–6. Terminal Connection Settings...................................................................................... 7 Table 4–7. Menu 1 Item Descriptions .......................................................................................... 13 Table 4–8. Menu 2 Item Descriptions .......................................................................................... 14 Table 4–9. Menu 3 Item Descriptions .......................................................................................... 16 Table 4–10. Menu 3, Item 'M' EEPROM Parameter Descriptions (Version 4.5).......................... 20 Table 4–11. Menu 3, Item 'M' EEPROM Parameter Descriptions (Version 7.0).......................... 22 Table 4–12. Menu 4 Item Descriptions ........................................................................................ 25 Table 4–13. Menu 10 Item Descriptions ...................................................................................... 26 Table 4–14. Menu 13 Item Descriptions ...................................................................................... 28 Table 4–15. Menu 14 Item Descriptions ...................................................................................... 28 Table 4–16. Menu 15 Item Descriptions ...................................................................................... 29 Table 4–17. Menu 15 Item Descriptions ...................................................................................... 30 Table 4–18. Report 23 Item Descriptions .................................................................................... 34 Table 4–19. Report information ................................................................................................... 35 Table 4–20. Fault Code Definitions .............................................................................................37 Table 4–21. Test Setup Procedure.............................................................................................. 49 Table 4–22. HSD Mechanical Verification ................................................................................... 50 Table 4–23. HSD Electrical Verification ....................................................................................... 51 Table 4–24. HSD Electrical Verification ....................................................................................... 51 Table 4–25. Honeywell Combined Mode Basic Fault Checks ..................................................... 66 Table 4–26. Multi-Channel Basic Fault Checks........................................................................... 70
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalPage TC–1418 September 2007 Table 4–27. Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation......................................................................... 94 Table 4–28. Modification History................................................................................................ 105
Page TC–118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalINTRODUCTION1. GeneralThis manual provides all the specifications, principles of operation, and information necessary to install an HSD High-Speed-Data SATCOM Transceiver made by EMS Technologies in all supported operational modes and configurations. The information needed to install HSD-X High-Speed-Data SATCOM Transceiver Extensions in Multi-Channel configurations with Stand-Alone HSD-128 units is also provided in this document. The information provided is presented in the following sections: "System Description" on page 1-1, "System Operation" on page 2-1, "Installation" on page 3-1, "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1, and "Maintenance and Repair" on page 5-1. The Appendices provide additional reference information. An Illustrated Parts List is not included with this manual.Only qualified avionics personnel, knowledgeable in the technical and safety issues related to the installation of aircraft communications equipment, should perform the installation procedures provided in this manual. This manual includes general installation guidelines only; it is not intended to provide specific procedures for every type of installation. If necessary, the information in this manual may be revised. Before attempting the installation procedures presented in this manual, verify that you have a complete and up-to-date release of this document.Depending on the version of software and configuration mode of installation of the HSD transceiver, the “actual” or “live” system messages such as dialog boxes and screen displays, may differ slightly from the example illustrations presented and described in this manual.
Page TC–218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal2. Abbreviations and AcronymsACSE Access Control and Signalling EquipmentACU Antenna Control Unit (also known as BSU or Driver)AERO AeronauticalAMBE® Advanced Multiband Excited Coding AWG American Wire GaugeBRI Basic Rate ISDNb/s Bits per secondBSU Beam Steering Unit (also known as ACU or Driver)CCW Counter ClockwiseCMT Commissioning Maintenance Terminal (Honeywell)CW ClockwiseDLNA Diplexer/Low-Noise AmplifierEMI Electromagnetic InterferenceGND GroundHGA High Gain AntennaHPA High Power AmplifierHSD High-speed Data TerminalHSD-X High-Speed-Data SATCOM Transceiver ExtensionHz HertzICAO International Civil Aviation OrganizationICD Interconnect DrawingINS Inertial Navigational SystemI/O Input/OutputIRS Inertial Reference SystemISDN Integrated Services Digital Networkkbps Kilobits per SecondLES Land Earth StationLRU Line Replaceable UnitLSV Low Speed VoiceMbps Megabit per secondMCDU Multifunction Control Display UnitMCU Modular Concept UnitMES Mobile Earth StationMPDS Mobile Packet Data Services
Page TC–318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminalms MillisecondMSN Multiple Subscriber NumberNAT Network Address TranslationOCXO Oven Controlled Crystal OscillatorOEM Original Equipment ManufacturerO&I Outline and Installation DrawingPC Personal Computer (or Laptop)PN Part NumberPPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over EthernetREA Responsible Engineering AuthorityRF Radio FrequencyRFI Radio Frequency InterferenceRFU Radio Frequency Unitrms root mean squareRtn ReturnRx Receivesatcom Satellite CommunicationsSCPC Single Channel per CarrierSDI Source/Destination IdentificationSDU Satellite Data UnitSPID Service Profile Identifier (ISDN)STBD StarboardSTE Secure Terminal EquipmentSTU Secure Telephone UnitT/A Terminal AdapterTx TransmitWOW Weight on Wheels
Page TC–418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal3. AdvisoriesWARNING: SERVICE PERSONNEL MUST OBEY STANDARD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, SUCH AS WEARING SAFETY GLASSES, TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY WHILE INSTALLING OR PERFORMING SERVICE ON THIS UNIT.WARNING: ASSOCIATED SATCOM EQUIPMENT RADIATES HIGH FREQUENCY RADIATION AND POSES A RADIATION HAZARD OF 1.6 GHZ. SERVICE PERSONNEL MUST EXERCISE CARE TO KEEP CLEAR OF THE ANTENNA’S BEAM WHILE PERFORMING OPERATIONAL TESTS OR INSTALLATION VERIFICATION PROCEDURES. DO NOT APPROACH WITHIN 8 FEET (2.5 METRES) OF THE ANTENNA DURING ANTENNA OPERATION (TRANSMISSION). DURING ANTENNA OPERATION (TRANSMISSION), ENSURE MINIMUM EXPOSURE OF ANY REFLECTED, SCATTERED, OR DIRECT BEAMS TO ALL PERSONNEL.WARNING: TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING ANY UNIT FROM WIRING. DISCONNECTING THE UNIT WITHOUT TURNING POWER OFF MAY CAUSE VOLTAGE TRANSIENTS THAT CAN DAMAGE THE UNIT.CAUTION: THIS EQUIPMENT INCLUDES ITEMS THAT ARE ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE (ESDS) DEVICES. ESDS DEVICES ARE SUBJECT TO DAMAGE BY EXCESSIVE LEVELS OF VOLTAGE AND/OR CURRENT. THE LOW-ENERGY SOURCE THAT MOST COMMONLY DESTROYS ESDS DEVICES IS THE HUMAN BODY WHICH, IN CONJUNCTION WITH NONCONDUCTIVE GARMENTS AND FLOOR COVERINGS, GENERATES AND RETAINS STATIC ELECTRICITY. TO ADEQUATELY PROTECT ESDS DEVICES, THE DEVICE AND EVERYTHING THAT CONTACTS IT MUST BE BROUGHT TO GROUND POTENTIAL BY PROVIDING A CONDUCTIVE SURFACE AND DISCHARGE PATHS. USE STANDARD INDUSTRY PRECAUTIONS TO KEEP RISK OF DAMAGE TO A MINIMUM WHEN TOUCHING, REMOVING, OR SERVICING THE EQUIPMENT.
Page TC–518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal4. Illustration of Equipment CoveredFigure TC–1. HSD-128 Terminal
Page TC–618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure TC–2. HSD-X SATCOM High-Speed-Data Transceiver Extension
Page 1–118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalSYSTEM DESCRIPTION1. Purpose of EquipmentThe HSD is a scalable, high-speed-data, satellite communications terminal, which interfaces with an ARINC 741-compatible antenna subsystem to provide a high-speed data communication link with the Inmarsat satellite communication network. HSD transceivers are available in single and dual channel models which can be installed in the following modes of operation: Stand-Alone Mode, Combined/Selective Mode, and Cooperative Mode.In Stand-Alone Mode HSD installations, the addition of HSD-X extension transceivers expands the channel capacity by providing one additional voice or 64 kbps data channel—per HSD-X to provide a Multi-Channel, high-speed data communication link with the Inmarsat satellite communication network.Table 1–1 shows the services that are supported by each HSD terminal. Table 1–1. Supported Services Matrix for HSD-128, HSD-64, and HSD-XSupported Services and FunctionalityHSD-128 (Stand-Alone, Multi-Channel)HSD-64/HSD-128 (Combined/Selective, Cooperative)HSD-X (Multi-Channel HSD)Inmarsat Swift64 ISDN (64 kbps UDI, 64 kbps Speech, 56 kbps Data, and 3.1 kHz audio)YES YES YES MPDS Over RS-232YES (with service bulletin 1110-SB-0006) YES (with service bulletin 1110-SB-0006)YESOver EthernetYES (PNs 1110-A-0150, 1110-A-0160, and HSD transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0006, 1110-SB-0004)YES (PNs 1110-A-0150, 1110-A-0160, and HSD transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0006, 1110-SB-0004) YESAMBE® Mini-M Voice (4.8 kbps)YES NO YESSTU III (Encryption) YES (Full ISDN) YES (Full ISDN) YES (Full ISDN)AMBE® STU YES (with channel card software version 6.0 (C41) or later)NO (Selective – YES) YES (with channel card software version 6.0 (C41) or later)
Page 1–218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalEthernet Interface (1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 support the Ethernet interface)YES (with service bulletin 1110-SB-0006 and 1110-SB-0004)YES (with service bulletin 1110-SB-0006 and 1110-SB-0004)YESBonding Functionality YES NO - Not supported in single-channel units and Cooperative ModeNO - Not supported in single-channel units Table 1–1. Supported Services Matrix for HSD-128, HSD-64, and HSD-XSupported Services and FunctionalityHSD-128 (Stand-Alone, Multi-Channel)HSD-64/HSD-128 (Combined/Selective, Cooperative)HSD-X (Multi-Channel HSD)
Page 1–318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal2. Equipment CoveredA. Hardware DescriptionTable 1–2 provides a comparison of the Hardware variants of HSD and HSD-X transceivers. Table 1–3 lists and describes all models of HSD transceivers covered in this manual. Table 1–2. HSD Transceiver VariantsModel AssemblyPNChannelCard(s)OperationalModes/ConfigurationsInterconnection DiagramVoltage(nominal)Power (nom/max)HSD-128 1110-A-0001 2 Stand-Alone 1110-B-0019 28 V dc 275/370 WMulti-Channel Configuration (with Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0012 accomplished)1110-B-0419HSD-128 1110-A-0060 2 Stand-Alone 1110-B-0019 115 V ac/ 400 Hz275/385 WMulti-Channel Configuration (with Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0012 accomplished)1110-B-0419HSD-128 1110-A-0001 2 Selective/Honeywell Combined (with Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0005 accomplished)1110-B-0081 28 V dc 325/370 WCollins Co-operative 1110-B-0156HSD-128 1110-A-0060 2 Selective/Honeywell Combined (with Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0005 accomplished)1110-B-0081 115 V ac/ 400 Hz325/385 WCollins Co-operative 1110-B-0156HSD-128 1110-A-0150 2 Stand-Alone 1110-B-0019 115 V ac/ 400 Hz325/385 WCollins Co-operative 1110-B-0156Selective/Honeywell Combined1110-B-0081Multi-Channel Configuration 1110-B-0419
Page 1–418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalHSD-128 1110-A-0160 2 Stand Alone 1110-B-0081 28 V dc 275/370 WCollins Co-operative 1110-B-0156Selective/Honeywell Combined1110-B-0081Multi-Channel Configuration 1110-B-0419HSD-64 1110-A-0080 1 Selective/Honeywell Combined (with Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0005 accomplished) 1110-B-0081 28 V dc 275/370 WCollins Co-operative 1110-B-0156HSD-64 1110-A-0070 1 Selective/Honeywell Combined (with Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0005 accomplished)1110-B-0081 115 V ac/ 400 Hz275/385 WCollins Co-operative 1110-B-0156HSD-X 1110-A-0401 1 Multi-Channel Extension Configuration with HSD-128 Transceiver1110-B-0419 115 V ac/ 400 Hz30/40 W Table 1–2. HSD Transceiver VariantsModel AssemblyPNChannelCard(s)OperationalModes/ConfigurationsInterconnection DiagramVoltage(nominal)Power (nom/max) Table 1–3. Equipment CoveredModel DescriptionHSD-128 PN 1110-A-0001HSD High-speed Data SATCOM Transceiver: High-speed data terminal containing two channel cards, a control processor, a high power amplifier, and a +28 V dc power supply. Operates with an Aero H/H+ (ARINC 741 compatible) antenna subsystem to provide circuit (Swift64 Mobile ISDN), packet-switched HSD (Swift64 MPDS), and Mini-M AMBE services over the Inmarsat satellite communications network.HSD-128 PN 1110-A-0060HSD High-speed Data SATCOM Transceiver: High-speed data terminal containing two channel cards, a control processor, a high power amplifier, and a 115 V ac, 400 hertz (Hz) power supply. Operates with an Aero H/H+ (ARINC 741 compatible) antenna subsystem to provide circuit (Swift64 Mobile ISDN), packet-switched HSD (Swift64 MPDS), and Mini-M AMBE services over the Inmarsat satellite communications network.
Page 1–518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalB. Software DescriptionThis section describes the software specifications and operational software components of the HSD and HSD-X transceivers. It also describes the software requirements and compatibility issues for each mode of operation. (1) Software SpecificationsThe operating software of the HSD and HSD-X transceivers meets with RTCA/DO-178B Level E requirements.HSD-128 PN 1110-A-0150HSD High-speed Data SATCOM Transceiver: High-speed data terminal containing two channel cards, a control processor, a Data I/O Type 2 card, a high power amplifier, and a 115 V ac, 400 hertz (Hz) power supply. Operates with an Aero H/H+ (ARINC 741 compatible) antenna subsystem to provide circuit (Swift64 Mobile ISDN), packet-switched HSD (Swift64 MPDS), and Mini-M AMBE services over the Inmarsat satellite communications network. Supports Ethernet connections.HSD-128 PN 1110-A-0160HSD High-speed Data SATCOM Transceiver: High-speed data terminal containing two channel cards, a control processor, a Data I/O Type 2 card, a high power amplifier, and a a +28 V dc power supply. Operates with an Aero H/H+ (ARINC 741 compatible) antenna subsystem to provide circuit (Swift64 Mobile ISDN), packet-switched HSD (Swift64 MPDS), and Mini-M AMBE services over the Inmarsat satellite communications network. Supports Ethernet connections.HSD-64 PN 1110-A-0070HSD High-speed Data SATCOM Transceiver: High-speed data terminal containing one channel card, a control processor, a high power amplifier, and a 115 V ac, 400 hertz (Hz) power supply. Operates with an Aero H/H+ (ARINC 741 compatible) antenna subsystem to provide circuit (Swift64 Mobile ISDN), packet-switched HSD (Swift64 MPDS), and Mini-M AMBE services over the Inmarsat satellite communications network.HSD-64 PN 1110-A-0080HSD High-speed Data SATCOM Transceiver: High-speed data terminal containing one channel card, a control processor, a high power amplifier, and a +28 V dc power supply. Operates with an Aero H/H+ (ARINC 741 compatible) antenna subsystem to provide circuit (Swift64 Mobile ISDN), packet-switched HSD (Swift64 MPDS), and Mini-M AMBE services over the Inmarsat satellite communications network.HSD-X PN 1110-A-0401The HSD-X High-speed Data SATCOM Transceiver Extension contains a single channel card, a High Stability Reference, an Output Amplifier, a Data Processor module, and a 115 V ac 400 hertz (Hz) power supply. It operates in conjunction with an HSD-128 transceiver to provide Inmarsat Swift64 services and Mini-M AMBE voice services. This transceiver supports Multi-Channel HSD configurations by adding additional channels to HSD-128 systems. Table 1–3. Equipment CoveredModel Description
Page 1–618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(2) Operational Software Part NumbersTable 1–4 provides a list of software part numbers for the HSD transceiver. Table 1–5 provides a list of software part numbers for the HSD-X transceiver. (3) Operational Mode Software RequirementsThis section describes the software requirements and compatibility issues for each mode of operation, including Multi-Channel configurations. (a) Stand-Alone Mode For Stand-Alone Mode installations, the minimum and recommended requirements for software are shown in Table 1–6. Table 1–4. HSD Operational SoftwareEMS SATCOM Part Number DescriptionLI-1110-10136 HSD-64/128 Software Configuration 1110-A-0082 Aero Channel Card Software1110-A-0048 Assembly Firmware Control Processor1110-A-0109 Firmware HPA 28 V dc1110-A-0110 Firmware HPA 115 V ac1110-A-0129 Firmware HPA 28 V dc Revised Board1110-A 0141 Firmware HPA 115 V ac Revised Board1110-A-0100 HSD Data I/O Firmware Assembly (Only applies to units with Data I/O Card Type 2 installed) Table 1–5. HSD-X Operational SoftwareEMS SATCOM Part Number DescriptionLI-1110-10181 HSD-X Software Configuration 1110-A-0082 Aero Channel Card Software1110-A-0420 Assembly Firmware Control Processor1110-A-0115 HSD-X Data I/O Firmware1110-A-0085 M4 Combined Pic and Bootloader Table 1–6. Stand-Alone Mode Minimum Software RequirementsUnit Part Number Software PNSoftware TypeMinimum Software Req’t Recommended SoftwareHSD-128 1110-A-00011110-A-00601110-A-01501110-A-01601110-A-0048 Control Processor4.1 7.5 (or later)1110-A-0082 Channel CardC24 C41 (or later)
Page 1–718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(b) Combined ModeFor Combined Mode installations, the minimum requirement for HSD Control-Processor software is version 5.4 (or later) to use ARINC 429 data from the Honeywell SDU. Version 5.4, Control-Card software is available via HSD Service Bulletin, 1110-SB-0012. The minimum requirements and recommendations for software are shown in Table 1–7.(c) Cooperative ModeFor Cooperative Mode installations, the minimum requirements and recommendations for software are shown in Table 1–8.(d) Selective ModeSelective Mode is a non-standard installation and it is not a recommended mode of operation. Selective Mode has been superseded by Combined Mode operation for MCS series SATCOM and with Cooperative Mode operation for SAT-906 series SATCOM. It is recommended that all systems operating in Selective Mode are upgraded to support Combined or Cooperative Mode as applicable.For Selective Mode installations, the minimum requirements and recommendations for software are shown in Table 1–9. Table 1–7. Combined Mode Recommended Software RequirementsUnit Part Number Software PNSoftware TypeMinimum Software Req’tRecommended SoftwareHSD-128 1110-A-00011110-A-00601110-A-01501110-A-01601110-A-0048 Control Processor5.7 7.5 (or later)1110-A-0082 Channel CardC35 C41 (or later) Table 1–8. Cooperative Mode Recommended Software RequirementsUnit Part Number Software PNSoftware TypeMinimum Software Req’t Recommended Software HSD-128 1110-A-00011110-A-00601110-A-01501110-A-01601110-A-0048 Control Processor5.7 7.5 (or later)1110-A-0082 Channel CardC35 C41 (or later)
Page 1–818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(e) Multi-Channel ConfigurationsIn a Multi-Channel configuration, the minimum requirement for HSD-128 Control Processor software is version 7.0. Version 7.0, Control Processor software is available via HSD Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0012. HSD-X Transceiver Extensions require Control Processor software version 6.0.In Multi-Channel configurations, both the HSD-128 and the HSD-X units must have the same Channel Card and Data I/O software versions installed. When upgrading software in either the HSD-128 or HSD-X, verify that the software version is compatible for operation in Multi-Channel systems as indicated in the applicable service bulletin.The minimum requirements and recommendations for software are shown in Table 1–10.(4) Software Version DescriptionThis section provides a brief description of the deltas between versions of operational software. Table 1–11 provides a matrix of software versions, applicable service bulletins, compliance requirements, and a brief description of the software deltas. Table 1–9. Selective Mode Minimum Software RequirementsUnit Part Number Software PNSoftware TypeMinimum Software Req’t Recommended SoftwareHSD-128 1110-A-00011110-A-00601110-A-01501110-A-01601110-A-0048 Control Processor5.7 7.5 (or later)1110-A-0082 Channel CardC35 C41 (or later) Table 1–10. Multi-Channel Configuration Recommended Software RequirementsUnit Part Number Software PNSoftware TypeMinimum Software Req’t Recommended SoftwareHSD-128 1110-A-00011110-A-00601110-A-01501110-A-01601110-A-0048 Control Processor7.0 7.5 (or later)1110-A-0082 Channel Card6.0 (C41) 6.0 (C41) (or later)HSD-X 1110-A-0401 1110-A-0420 Control Processor6.0 6.0 (or later)1110-A-0082 Channel Card 6.0 (C41) 6.0 (C41) (or later)1110-A-0240 Data I/O Software115 Superceded by 1110-A-01151110-A-0115 Data I/O HSD-X 117 117
Page 1–918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalTable 1–12 provides a service bulletin matrix to list the applicability of all service bulletins released against the HSD and HSD-X units as of the release date of this manual. Table 1–11. Description of Control Processor Software ChangesControl Processor Software Version Applicable Service BulletinCompliance Requirements Description of Change4.4 1110-SB-0001 Control card release with mandatory channel card change from C24 to C30 Ensures channel card is powered down for 5 seconds after a fatal error. Channel card software change from C24 to C304.5 1110-SB-0003 Mandatory for all units operating in Cooperative Mode installs with Collins SAT-906 systems. Resolves the problem occurring during the power up sequence, the SAT-906 system reports error 0100, 1000, and 0800, which results in the deactivation of the HSD channel cards. 4.6 N/A N/A Adds menu command to specify manual satellite longitude. Ensures that manually specified ocean regions are maintained. This version does not support Cooperative Mode (with SAT-906).5.4 1110-SB-0005 Mandatory for units installed in Combined Mode with Honeywell Aero H Satcom systems. Optional for all other units.Upgrades the hardware for Honeywell Combined Mode (HCM) to include a RF detector and a variable attenuator on the Aero H path of the pre-HPA combiner and allows the reading and control of this attenuator through a serial connection to the combiner.This version does not support Cooperative Mode (with SAT-906).
Page 1–1018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal5.7 1110-SB-0011 Recommended for all units operating in Cooperative Mode with Collins Sat-906 systems, optional for all other units.Upgrades the Channel Card software to version C35 to fix Cooperative Mode bug in Channel Card software version C30. Upgrades software to recognize Cooperative Mode System Config hardware strapping. 6.5 1110-SB-0007 Generic release suitable for all modes of HSD operation Compatible with HSD-X version 6.0 firmware.Upgrades the HSD-128 Control Processor software to version 6.5. This version adds the Multi-Channel capability to the HSD-128 software to support HSD-128 units integration with external HSD-X channels (PN 1110-A-0401). Table 1–11. Description of Control Processor Software ChangesControl Processor Software Version Applicable Service BulletinCompliance Requirements Description of Change
Page 1–1118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal7.0 1110-SB-0012 Recommended for units operating in multi-channel configurations with HSD transceivers. Optional for all other units and system modes.Upgrades the channel card software to version C41 (6.0) which supports enhanced HSD functionality in all modes of operation, (including Multi-Channel configurations and AMBE STU capability). In Cooperative Mode systems, MPDS is not supported with this version of software.Upgrades the control processor software to version 7.0, which enhances all modes of operation. Selective Mode units operating Category A Inmarsat terminals may experience GPS faults when operating this version of software.Contact EMS SATCOM Product Support for details.7.5 1110-SB-0015 Highly recommended for units operation in Cooperative Mode with Rockwell Collins SAT-906 systems. Optional for Stand-Alone units and all other operational modes.HSD Control Processor software version 7.5 includes fixes specific to Cooperative Mode operation problems and enhances unit operation. Table 1–11. Description of Control Processor Software ChangesControl Processor Software Version Applicable Service BulletinCompliance Requirements Description of Change
Page 1–1218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 1–12. Service Bulletin MatrixService BulletinPN 1110-A-0001PN 1110-A-0060PN 1110-A-0070PN 1110-A-0080PN 1110-A-0150PN 1110-A-0160PN 1110-A-0401Description1110-SB-0001 X X X X Software upgrade to accommodate Inmarsat system changes1110-SB-0002 X X X X HPA Mute and ARINC 429 Driver Modifications1110-SB-0003 X Upgrade to HPA software and Control Processor software to fix Cooperative Mode SAT-906 system reporting errors (Version 4.5)1110-SB-0004 X X X X Data I/O Type 2 upgrade option1110-SB-0005 X X X X Hardware modification and software upgrade for Combined Mode operation1110-SB-0006 X X X X Software upgrade to support MPDS service (Version C35)1110-SB-0007 X X Software upgrade for Multi-Channel (Version 6.5)1110-SB-0008 N/A1110-SB-0009 N/A1110-SB-0010 X X Optional hardware upgrade to dual channel transceiver and support for STU III and Mini-M Voice (Version C41)1110-SB-0011 X X X X Software upgrade for Cooperative Mode 1110-SB-0012 X X X X Software upgrade to add AMBE STU support and enhances performance of all modes of operation (Version 7.0)1110-SB-0013 X X X X X X Addition of a software identification label to all units
Page 1–1318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal1110-SB-0014 X X X X X X Upgrades Data I/O Type 2 software to fix susceptibility to certain malformed traffic, which caused PPPoE sessions to “hang-up” leaving the call connected1110-SB-0015 X X X X X X Upgrades control processor software to enhance Cooperative Mode operation (Version 7.5)1110-SB-0401 X Software upgrade to add AMBE STU capability, enhance system operation, including with MPDS1110-SB-0402 X Addition of a software identification label to all units1110-SB-0403 X Upgrades Data I/O Type software to fix susceptibility to certain malformed traffic, which caused PPPoE sessions to “hang-up” leaving the call connected Table 1–12. Service Bulletin MatrixService BulletinPN 1110-A-0001PN 1110-A-0060PN 1110-A-0070PN 1110-A-0080PN 1110-A-0150PN 1110-A-0160PN 1110-A-0401Description
Page 1–1418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal3. Equipment DescriptionThis section describes the physical and environmental specifications of the equipment. A. Applicable Documents• High speed data terminal Setup Guide, EMS SATCOM PN MN-1110-10048• ARINC 741. ARINC Report 413A – Guidance for Aircraft Electrical Power Utilization and Transient Protection, Attachment 3-2, Wire Shielding and Grounding Requirements and Appendix 7B. Reference Documents• HSD-64/128 Software Control Document, EMS SATCOM PN LI-1110-10136• HSD-X Software Control Document, EMS SATCOM PN LI-1110-10181C. Equipment SpecificationsThis section provides the equipment specifications for the HSD and HSD-X transceivers.Table 1–13 lists the physical and equipment specifications for the HSD transceiver. Table 1–14 lists the RTCA/DO-160D environmental characteristics and specifications for the HSD transceiver.Table 1–15 lists the physical and equipment specifications for the HSD-X transceiver. Table 1–16 lists the RTCA/DO-160D environmental characteristics and specifications for the HSD-X transceiver. Table 1–13. HSD Equipment Characteristics and SpecificationsCHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATIONCertification/related documentsARINC characteristics 600-12, Air Transport Avionics Equipment Interfaces, December 12, 1998Appendix 10 of the ARINC 704-7RTCA documents RTCA/DO-160D, Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne Equipment, July 29, 1997HSD Software RTCA/DO-178B Level EPhysical SizeHeight 19.93 cm (7.85 in)Width 25.91 cm (10.20 in)Length 36.45 cm (14.58 in)Weight 13 Kg (28.7 lbs)Mounting information 8 MCU Tray (per ARINC 600, 8 MCU LRU)Maintenance requirements No scheduled maintenance is requiredElectrical specifications
Page 1–1518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalHSD-128 dc input power 1110-A-0001, 1110-A-0160 Voltage Minimum: 22 V dc Typical: 27.5 V dc Maximum: 30.3 V dcPower dissipation (Stand-Alone) Minimum: 275 W Maximum: 370 WPower dissipation (Selective, Combined, and Cooperative)Minimum: 325 W Maximum: 370 WHSD-128 ac input power 1110-A-0060, 1110-A-0150Voltage Minimum: 100 V rms Typical: 115 V rms Maximum: 122 V rmsPower dissipation (Stand-Alone)Minimum: 275 W Maximum: 385 WPower dissipation (Selective, Combined, and Cooperative)Minimum: 325 W Maximum: 385 WFrequency Minimum: 360 Hz (Typical: 400 Hz) Maximum: 440 HzHSD-64 dc input power 1110-A-0080Voltage Minimum 22 V dc (Typical 27.5 V dc) Maximum 30.3 V dcPower dissipation Minimum: 275 W Maximum: 370 WHSD-64 ac input power 1110-A-0070Voltage Minimum 100 V rms (Typical 115 V rms) Maximum 122 V rmsPower dissipationFrequencyFrequency bandMinimum: 275 WMaximum: 385 WMinimum: 360 Hz (Typical: 400 Hz)Maximum: 440 HzTx: 1626.5 to 1660.5 MHzRx: 1525.0 to 1559.0 MHzPower requirements HSDPN 1110-A-0001, 1110-A-0080, 1110-A-0160+ 28 V dc nominal @ 13.5A Table 1–13. HSD Equipment Characteristics and SpecificationsCHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION
Page 1–1618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalPN 1110-A-0060, 1110-A-0070, 1110-A-0150115 V ac, 400 Hz (nominal) @5AWire gage dc power: 12 American Wire Gauge (AWG)ac power: 20 AWG (hot lead), 12 AWG (cold lead)Signals: Unless otherwise specified, use 22 AWG for all signal wires Ground requirements ARINC 741Heating and cooling requirementsCooling air ARINC 600Flow rate 175 lbs/hrPressure drop 0.05”, ± 0.025” H2OOutput frequency range (Transmit) Minimum: 1626.5 MHz Maximum: 1660.5 MHzInput frequency range (Receive) Minimum: 1530 MHz Maximum: 1559 MHzReceive input impedance 50 ohmsTransmit output impedance 50 ohmsVSWR 2:1 maximumMaximum Output Power 18 dBW Table 1–14. HSD RTCA/DO-160D Environmental CharacteristicsCHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATIONEnvironmentalTemp and altitudeIn-flight loss of cooling115 V ac units: Category A1, F2 V28 V dc units: Category A1 F2 W Temperature variation Category B (± 5°C/minimum)Humidity Category A (95%, 48 hours)Shock Category B (6g/20g, 11ms)Vibration Category SB (1.48grms)Explosion proofness Category EWaterproofness Category X (not applicable)Fluids susceptibility Category X (not applicable)Sand and dust Category X (not applicable)Fungus resistance Category FSalt spray Category X (not applicable)Magnetic effect 115 V ac units: Category Z (< 1.0m) 28 V dc units: Category A (<1.0m)Power input Categoriy A Table 1–13. HSD Equipment Characteristics and SpecificationsCHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION
Page 1–1718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalVoltage spike 115 V ac units: Category A 28 V dc units: Category AAudio frequency susceptibility 115 V ac units: Category A 28 V dc units: not testedInduced signal susceptibility 115 V ac units: Category Z 28 V dc units: not testedRF susceptibility 115 V ac units: Category RR 28 V dc units: not testedEmission of RF Energy 115 V ac units: Category B 28 V dc units: Category BLightning Direct Effects Category X (not applicable)Icing Category X (not applicable) Table 1–15. HSD-X Transceiver SpecificationsCHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATIONCertification/related documentsARINC characteristics 600-12, Air Transport Avionics Equipment Interfaces, December 12, 1998Appendix 10 of the ARINC 704-7RTCA documents RTCA/DO-160D, Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne Equipment, July 29, 1997HSD-X Software RTCA/DO-178B Level EPhysicalSize 2 MCU ARINC 600-10 Form FactorWeight 8.8 lbs maximumCooling air Unit capable of continuous duty cycle operation, with or without forced air-cooling provided, as per ARINC 600 specifications. Refer to 1110-E-0401. (See "Installation" on page 3-1.)Mounting Information As per ARINC 600 specifications. Refer to 1110-E-0401. (See "Installation" on page 3-1.)Maintenance Requirements No maintenance requirementsElectricalPower Dissipation 34 WattsInput Power 115 V ac, 400 Hz, 75 vaInput frequency range 1530.0 to 1559.0 MHzOutput frequency range 1626.5 to 1660.5 MHzReceiver input impedance 50 ohms Table 1–14. HSD RTCA/DO-160D Environmental CharacteristicsCHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION
Page 1–1818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalTransceiver output impedance 50 ohmsVSWR 2:1 maximumInput level operational Input level no damage-107 dBm to -47 dBm+10 dBmExternal (Digital) InterfacesCrosstalk Bus ARINC 429 high-speed (100 kbps) data busMaintenance Port RS-232 Data loader Front and Rear ConnectorRS-232 serial bus supporting 57.6 kbps data load capacityISDN User Interface 64 kbps ISDN Euro input and output Table 1–16. HSD-X RTCA/DO-160D Environmental SpecificationsCHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATIONTemperature and Altitude Categories: A4 (without cooling air)/ C4 (with cooling air)Low operating temperature -40 °C (A4), -40 °C (C4) High operating temperature +55 °C (A4), +70 °C (C4)Altitude Maximum operating altitude: 15,000 ft (A4)/55,000 ft (C4)Loss of cooling Category YTemperature Variation Category BHumidity Category AShock Category BVibration Category SBExplosion Proofness Category EWaterproofness Category XFluids Susceptibility Category XSand and Dust Category XFungus Resistance Category FSalt Spray Category XMagnetic Effect Category ZPower Input Category AVoltage Spike Category AAudio Frequency Category AInduced Signal Category CRF Susceptibility Category RR Table 1–15. HSD-X Transceiver SpecificationsCHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION
Page 1–1918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalD. Mechanical DescriptionThis section describes the mechanical characteristics of the HSD and HSD-X transceivers.(1) HSD Transceiver The HSD transceiver is an 8-MCU sized unit with mounting requirements according to the ARINC 600 specification. The front panel has one, socket D-Type size B (25 contacts) maintenance port connector (under protective cover) for data loading and monitoring of the unit. Two front-panel LEDs indicate unit status. The rear connector complies with ARINC 600, shell size 2 and has three inserts: upper, middle, and bottom. The upper and middle inserts each have one #1 coax contact and seventy, 22-gauge signal contacts. The bottom insert connector has contact with only positions 1, 2, 3, 7, 8, and 12. The rear panel has three polarization points. For detailed wiring information, refer to the interconnection diagrams and contact assignments for each installation mode presented in "Installation" on page 3-1 as noted below:(2) HSD-X TransceiverThe HSD-X is a 2-MCU sized unit with mounting requirements according to the ARINC 600 specification. The front panel has one, female, micro-D type connector for data loading and monitoring of the unit. Three front panel LEDs illuminate to indicate unit functionality as described in detail in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1.Emission of RF Energy Category MLightning Induced Transient SusceptibilityCategory A3E3Lightning Direct Effects Category XIcing Category XElectrostatic Discharge Category A Table 1–16. HSD-X RTCA/DO-160D Environmental SpecificationsCHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION Table 1–17. HSD Installation Mode Drawing Reference MatrixInstallation Mode Installation Section Figure Figure DescriptionStand-Alone Figure 3–29 System Interconnect Figure 3–30 Contact AssignmentsCombined/Selective Figure 3–31 System InterconnectFigure 3–32 Contact AssignmentsCooperative Figure 3–33 System InterconnectFigure 3–34 Contact AssignmentsStand-Alone HSD in Multi-Channel ConfigurationFigure 3–35 and Figure 3–36 System InterconnectFigure 3–37 and Figure 3–38 Contact Assignments
Page 1–2018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalThe rear connector complies with ARINC 600, shell size 1. The connector top and middle cavities have 60 number 22 interconnects, while the bottom cavity has two number 16 interconnects, one number 12 interconnect, and two RF interconnects. E. Electrical DescriptionThis section describes the external electrical interfaces of the HSD and HSD-X transceivers. General system block diagrams of the avionics and antenna subsystem are presented in Figure 1–10, Figure 1–11, Figure 1–12, and Figure 1–13."Installation" on page 3-1 describes all ARNC 600 connector contact assignments and physical details, including part numbers, insert descriptions, and polarization keying.The loading/gradient specifications for all HSD installation modes, including Stand-Alone Mode, Multi-Channel configurations with HSD-X transceivers, are provided in table format in "Installation" on page 3-1. These tables list all of the ARINC Top, Middle, and Bottom Plug pin designations as well as provide installation connection details.(1) General The HSD contains a communications switch (SW) that supports Inmarsat Swift64 Mobile ISDN and MPDS service within an 8-MCU assembly built in accordance to ARINC 600 specifications.The HSD-X contains a communications switch (SW) that supports Inmarsat Swift64 Mobile ISDN and MPDS service within a 2-MCU assembly built in accordance to ARINC 600 specifications.(a) Stand-Alone ModeThe HSD L-Band Rx/Tx input and outputs interface directly with the DLNA. The HSD uses the ARINC 429 multi-control bus to interface with the ACU/BSU to control the RF antenna and obtain antenna-subsystem status information. The HSD receives the required navigational data, provided by the aircraft Inertial Navigational System (INS), from the ARINC 429 IRS bus. The aircraft supplies either 28 V dc or 115 V 400 Hz power to the HSD. (b) Non-Stand-Alone Modes (Cooperative, Combined, Selective)The HSD L-band Rx/Tx interface combiners are shared with those of the SATCOM H/H+ system via splitters after the DLNA and before the high power amplifier (HPA). The Aero H/H+ system, that the HSD is installed with, controls the antenna subsystem and the RF transmit signal attenuation in the High-Gain Antenna HPA of the HSD through the SDU multi-control ARINC 429 bus. The aircraft supplies either 28 V dc or 115 V 400 Hz power to the HSD.(c) Multi-Channel Configurations with HSD-X TransceiversThe HSD Multi-Channel configuration combines a dual-channel, Stand-Alone Mode, HSD-128 Transceiver with one or more single-channel HSD-X Transceivers to add additional channels to the system. Each channel provides an ISDN 64 kbps connection that can be used for voice or data services. The two channels in the HSD-128 can be internally bonded to provide a 128 kbps ISDN data connection. Externally, all four channels shown in Multi-Channel System Block Diagram on page 40 can be combined to provide a single 256 kbps capability with the help of a router, Ethernet hub, or Terminal Adapter.
Page 1–2118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalThe HSD-128 is the master of the system; it controls the overall operation of the Multi-Channel HSD configuration. It keeps track of time and allocated power and may command the HSD-X units to terminate calls under certain conditions, such as an ocean region change. The HSD-X units are wired to the HSD-128 HPA and therefore compete equally for HPA power allocation. The transmit signal of each channel is fed through combiners/attenuators combinations to the HPA located in the HSD and ultimately to the antenna. Conversely, the receive signal from the antenna goes through a series of splitters on its way to each channel.On power-up, HSD-X channels go through an initialization process that identifies and communicates the number of HSD-X channels and their position in the system chain back to the HSD-128 master.The block diagram in Figure 1–10 illustrates the system function of the HSD-128, two HSD-Xs, and the antenna system.(2) Pin and Connector DescriptionsDetailed pin and connector descriptions for both HSD and HSD-X transceivers are provided for all installation modes and configurations in "Installation" on page 3-1. F. System Interface DescriptionsThis section briefly describes the external HSD and HSD-X system interfaces. The system interfaces are those required to control, monitor, maintain, and supplement the unit’s functionality. "Installation" on page 3-1 provides a detailed description of interface connections. (1) HSD System InterfacesThis section describes the system interfaces of HSD transceivers. Detailed information on the splitter and combiner specifications and losses, as well as cabling notes and system interconnections for all operational modes for HSD transceivers are provided in "Installation" on page 3-1.(a) HSD Source Destination Identification (SDI)1. Stand-Alone Mode and Multi-Channel ConfigurationSource/Destination Identification (SDI) is provided to the HPA as per ARINC 741 specifications.2. Non-Stand-Alone ModeSource/Destination Identification (SDI) is provided to the HPA as per ARINC 741 specifications.(b) HSD Forward and Return Address IDsThe HSD uses two 24-bit IDs called “Forward Link Pairs” (FRLPs): a Forward ID (Fwd ID) and a Return (Rtn) ID per pair. The HSD reads the Fwd ID and performs a look-up for the Rtn ID. For security reasons, each assembly contains an encrypted look-up table with the whole addressing space assigned to the product by Inmarsat. To minimize the risk of unauthorized use of its contents, the table is not accessible to the user.
Page 1–2218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalThe 24-bit Fwd ID strap pins, available on the ARINC 600 connector, form part of the Inmarsat serial number (ISN). The ISN consists of the type approval number and the Fwd ID address. Each FRLP is associated with Inmarsat Mobile Numbers (IMN), which are the numbers that a user dials from the ground to reach the terminal on an aircraft. There is a unique IMN for each of the service types (e.g. data, voice, Fax).(c) HSD WOW Pin WiringWeight-On-Wheel (WOW) discretes indicate when an aircraft is on the ground and are used for flight data-logging purposes. Note 40 of ARINC 741 defines the WOW pins.(d) HSD IRS ARINC 429 InterfaceTable 1–18 shows the IRS ARINC 429 bus labels and associated data types. For more details on characteristics, refer to Appendix 10 of the ARINC 704-7, Inertial Reference System document.1. Stand-Alone Mode and Multi-Channel ConfigurationIn Stand-Alone Mode installations, the HSD requires high-speed ARINC 429, IRS Navigational information (as shown in 17) to compute the azimuth, elevation, and Doppler correction information required for antenna pointing.2. Non-Stand-Alone ModesIn Combined and Selective Mode installations, the HSD uses aircraft IRS information to determine which satellite to use, as selected by the Aero H/H+ SDU.In Cooperative Mode installations, the HSD uses aircraft IRS information received from the ARINC 741 SATCOM SDU via the SDU crosstalk ARINC 429 bus. Table 1–18. ARINC 429 IRS Navigational RequirementsLabel (octal) Name Interval Rate (ms)Min. Max.310 Latitude 100 200311 Longitude 100 200312 Ground Speed 25 50313 True Track 25 50314 True Heading 25 50324 Pitch Angle 10 20325 Roll Angle 10 20
Page 1–2318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(e) HSD Antenna Interface1. Stand-Alone Mode and Multi-Channel ConfigurationIn Stand-Alone installations, the HSD interfaces to any mechanically steered, conformal-array, or phased array, ARINC 741-compatible, antenna subsystems. The antenna-pointing commands and status messages are communicated between the HSD and antenna subsystem over ARINC 429, Multi-Control, Top/Port and/or Starboard BITE and HPA mute busses, as defined in ARINC 741 Part 1.2. Non-Stand-Alone ModesIn Non-Stand-Alone installations (Combined, Cooperative, and Selective Modes), the ARINC 741 SATCOM SDU controls the satellite selection and antenna pointing. The HSD monitors traffic on the Multi-Control, BSU, and HPA mute busses to determine which satellite is used for the HSD’s channel card(s) communication links. In Cooperative Mode, the HPA command and status messages are communicated over the crosstalk lines.(f) Antenna Subsystem RF InterfaceIn all installation modes, several external system RF parameters (such as cable losses and antenna gain) are delimited to ensure that the HSD performance requirements are met. Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for a definition of these parameters and their expected values.(g) RF Splitter: Non-Stand-Alone Mode Installations In Non-Stand-Alone installations, an RF splitter must be installed to split the RF Receive signal from the antenna subsystem’s DLNA between the Aero H Radio Frequency Unit (RFU) and the HSD. (Refer the applicable section of "Installation" on page 3-1 for specifications.)(h) HSD Remote Status Panel (Optional)The outputs to the optional “Remote Status Panel” provide a visual indication of the operational status of the HSD; they “mirror” the LRU’s front panel LEDs labeled as Power (LED1) and Fault (LED2) as defined in Table 1–19. Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed installation and circuit requirements.(i) HSD Fault ConditionsA failure in the HSD may be due to a number of fault conditions. Upon detection of a fault condition, the HSD activates its red, Fault LED. The potential fault conditions are:• Channel Card fault Table 1–19. HSD LED Output DesignationsLED Signal Label LED Color Indication DescriptionLED1 Power Green Power On: HSD supply voltage is active. Flashes at 1 Hz when the HPA is transmittingLED2 Fault Red Fault: Fault condition as described in "HSD Fault Conditions" on page 1-23
Page 1–2418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal• HPA fault• External Reference Fault• Internal ROM Fault• Internal RAM Fault• Over Temperature Fault(j) HSD Remote ResetThe remote reset output provides an external reset function for the complete HSD system. Pressing the momentary “normally open” (N.O.) switch resets the system’s processor-card circuitry.The remote reset has the same functionality as pressing the “test” button on the front panel of the LRU.CAUTION: Cooperative and Combined/Selective Mode installations and HSD-X transceivers DO NOT support the use of the reset function. If the HSD transceiver is reset in Cooperative or Combined Mode installations, the communications between the HSD HPA and the SDU of the Aero H/H+ system can be disrupted—potentially causing the SATCOM system faults that may require the complete reset of both systems.(2) HSD-X Multi-Channel System InterfacesThis section describes the external interfaces unique to Stand-Alone Mode, HSD-128 Transceivers installed in a Multi-Channel configuration with HSD-X transceivers. The following additional wiring is required for the installation of Multi-Channel HSD systems.• Splitter for the Rx path (See "Installation" on page 3-1)• Combiner for the Tx path (See "Installation" on page 3-1)• TPC1 must be installed on any HSD-128 ARINC 600 Trays that do not have TPC1 installed • Forward ID Address as per HSD wiring Detailed information on the splitter and combiner specifications and losses, as well as cabling notes and system interconnections for Multi-Channel Configurations of HSD and HSD-X transceivers are provided in "Installation" on page 3-1. (a) Multi-Channel HSD-X Antenna InterfaceRefer to "HSD Antenna Interface" on page 1-23.(b) Weight-on-Wheels (WOW) (Optional)Refer to "HSD WOW Pin Wiring" on page 1-22. (c) HSD-X Forward IDLike the HSD transceivers, the HSD-X units use Forward IDs (Fwd ID) to identify the terminal to the Inmarsat communication network.
Page 1–2518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalThe 24-bit Forward ID strap pins, available on the ARINC 600 connector, form part of the Inmarsat serial number (ISN). The ISN consists of the type approval number and the Fwd ID address. Each Forward ID is associated with Inmarsat Mobile Numbers (IMN), which are the numbers that a user would dial from the ground to reach the terminal on an aircraft. There is a unique IMN for each of the service types (e.g. Swift64 ISDN 64 kbps data).When strapping the Forward ID on the HSD-128, the first number in the Forward ID pair is used. The HSD-128 internally identifies the second Forward ID by looking up a table in its memory. It is important to strap the first number; otherwise, the HSD-128 will not be able to correctly look up the second number.For strapping the Forward ID on the HSD-X in a four-channel configuration, although each HSD-X can use either number in the second pair, typically the first number of the second pair is assigned to the first HSD-X and the second number of the second pair to the second HSD-X. Figure 1–1 illustrates the assignment of Forward IDs in a 3-channel system. Figure 1–2 illustrates the assignment of Forward IDs in a 4-channel system. Note: The placeholder for the Forward ID in the following illustrations uses “xxxxxx” to represent the six-digit hex number of a valid Forward ID. Uppercase “X’s” indicate a strapped Forward ID address.Figure 1–1. Forward ID Assignment (3-channel system)Figure 1–2. Forward ID Assignment (4-channel system)XXXXXXxxxxxxXXXXXXxxxxxxHSD-128HSD-X 1First Forward ID pair(one for each channel card)Second Forward ID pair(Second Forward ID of pair isnot used)XXXXXXxxxxxxXXXXXXXXXXXXHSD-128HSD-X 1HSD-X 2First Forward ID pair(one for each channel card)Second Forward ID pair(one for each HSD-X)
Page 1–2618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(d) RS-232 Maintenance Port Like the HSD-128, HSD-X units have an RS-232 Maintenance Port interface that provides access to a maintenance utility program for system monitoring and testing purposes. Access to the maintenance port and the HSD Maintenance Utility Program is possible using an RS-232, VT-100 terminal (PC or Laptop operating a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal). For testing and monitoring of all components of the Multi-Channel HSD configuration, access to all units in the system is achieved using a single terminal (PC or Laptop) connected to the Maintenance Port of the HSD-128 Transceiver. Communication with any installed HSD-Xs installed in the system is possible by either passing through the HSD’s Maintenance Facility when operating in “console-mode” or through a direct connection to individual HSD-X units. Figure 1–3 illustrates the Maintenance Port Facility in a Multi-Channel configuration.Note: For information on the operation of the HSD Maintenance Utility Program in “Console-Mode” refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1. Although system monitoring is possible using the “console-mode” feature, software updates, if required, must be loaded directly to the HSD-128 and each HSD-X via their respective maintenance port. Direct connection to the front-panel of the HSD-X maintenance port requires an HSD-X maintenance port cable. The front connector, maintenance port supports trace and data load functions and is a female, micro-D-type, M83513/04-B11N, or equivalent. As well, a permanent connector wired to the rear, middle-plug, maintenance port connector can be installed for remote access. A detailed description of the HSD-X maintenance port pins is provided in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1. The RS-232 connection settings for the HSD-X maintenance port are the same as for the HSD-128 as listed below: • Baud rate – 19.2 kbps• Data bits – 8• Stop bits – 1• Parity – none• Flow control – noneFigure 1–3. Maintenance Port AccessMaintenanceFacilityHSD-128MaintenanceFacilityHSD-XPass-throughout inout inARINC 429Slave ChainRS232 RS232
Page 1–2718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(e) HSD-X Remote Status Panel (Optional)The outputs to the optional “Remote Status Panel” provide a visual indication of the operational status of the HSD-X. They “mirror” the unit’s front panel LEDs labeled as Power (LED1), Fault (LED2), and Channel Available (LED3). Tabl e 1–20 defines the interpretation for each LED. Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed installation and circuit requirements.(f) HSD-X Fault ConditionsA failure in the HSD-X may be because of a number of fault conditions. Upon detection of a fault condition, the HSD-X activates its red, Fault LED. The potential fault conditions are:• HSD/HSD-X communications link fault• Channel Card fault• Data I/O fault• Internal ROM fault• Internal RAM fault• Over Temperature faultG. User InterfacesThe HSD can support multiple voice and data communication configurations depending on the number of channel cards the unit contains and the mode of installation.The most likely user configurations include a networking device (such as a router or a file server) that allows multiple users to share the channel capability offered by the HSD (single, dual, or multiple channels depending on model, mode, and configuration of the HSD or HSD-X transceivers installed). The selected networking device must have the capability to decide which combination of services is required at any particular moment and activate it accordingly. Therefore, simultaneous RS-232 and BRI S/T connections are required. A different way to achieve this functionality is to use the 10BASE-T port to carry a PPP over Ethernet virtual connection between the networking device (typically a file server) and the HSD. Support for PPP over Ethernet is also required on the user’s side. Note: HSD transceivers PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 have Data I/O Type 2 Cards installed and support the Ethernet interface. All other HSD transceivers must have service bulletin, 1110-SB-0004 accomplished to support the Ethernet interface. All HSD-X transceivers support an Ethernet interface. Table 1–20. HSD-X Front Panel LEDs Output DesignationsLED Name LED Color Indication DescriptionTop (LED1) Power GREEN Power (ac); Flashes at 1 Hz rate while “in call”Middle (LED2) HSD-X Fail RED Fault (Illuminates upon HSD-X failure)Bottom (LED3) Channel AvailableGREEN Channel Available
Page 1–2818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 1–4 and Figure 1–5 illustrate the user interfaces for single-channel HSD transceiversFigure 1–6 and Figure 1–7 illustrate the user interfaces for dual-channel HSD transceivers. For clarity, these figures only display Data Services. Voice devices are supported by direct connection to the HSD using EURO ISDN telephones or by indirect connection to a router or terminal adapter using two-wire telephone handsets. (1) Stand-Alone Mode User InterfacesDual-channel HSD transceivers support a maximum of two simultaneous instances of Swift64 Mobile ISDN and/or Mobile Packet Data Services (MPDS) services. (2) Collins Cooperative Mode User InterfacesIn Cooperative Mode installations, the HSD system provides one channel of Swift64 data service and Aero H/H+ call capability. Swift64 and Aero H/H+ calls are simultaneously possible providing the following system conditions are met:• If a Swift64 call is in process and an Aero H/H+ call is attempted, either incoming or outgoing, the Aero H/H+ call is allowed to proceed providing that there is sufficient HPA power available to process all calls.• If any Aero H/H+ calls are in process, a Swift64 call is allowed providing that there is sufficient HPA power available to process both the Swift64 and Aero H/H+ calls.(3) Honeywell Combined Mode User InterfacesIn single-channel transceivers in Combined Mode installations, the HSD system provides one channel of Swift64 data service and Aero H/H+ call capability. In dual-channel transceivers in Combined Mode installations, the HSD system provides two channels of Swift64 data service and Aero H/H+ call capability. Swift64 and Aero H/H+ calls are simultaneously possible providing the following system conditions are met:• If a Swift64 call is in process and an Aero H/H+ call is attempted, either incoming or outgoing, the Aero H/H+ call is allowed to proceed providing that there is sufficient HPA power available to process all calls.• If any Aero H/H+ calls are in process, a Swift64 call is allowed providing that there is sufficient HPA power available to process both the Swift64 and Aero H/H+ calls.• If both call types are in process, and system resources become limited due to dropping antenna gain, then Aero H/H+ calls will maintain priority.(4) Selective Mode User InterfacesIn Selective Mode operation, dual-channel HSD transceivers support a maximum of two simultaneous instances of Swift64 Mobile ISDN and/or MPDS services.(5) Multi-Channel ConfigurationsThe HSD Multi-Channel configuration combines a dual-channel, Stand-Alone Mode HSD-128 Transceiver with one or more single-channel HSD-X Transceivers to add additional channels to the system. MPDS connections demand more power and may reduce channel availability. AMBE connections demand less power and may increase channel availability.
Page 1–2918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalEach channel provides an ISDN 64 kbps connection that can be used for voice or data services. The two channels in the HSD can be internally bonded to provide a 128 kbps ISDN data connection. Externally, all four channels shown in Figure 1–10 can be combined to provide a single 256 kbps capability with the help of a router, Ethernet hub, or Terminal Adapter.Although the Multi-Channel HSD configuration is designed to accommodate one HSD-128 and multiple HSD-Xs, the number of channels that can be active at one time is dependent on the number of channels available at the Land Earth Station (LES), the available HPA power, and the available antenna gain—which can vary over the course of a flight. At the time of printing, Multi-Channel HSD systems support four, simultaneous, high-speed data connections—with software automated, staggered initiation of calls (approximately 20 seconds apart).Figure 1–4. System Interface Block Diagram Single Channel SystemChannel CardData I/O ProcessorARINC ConnectorHSD TransceiverISDN S/T ISDN S/TRS-232 RS-23210BTRS-232File ServerLaptop computerLaptop computerISDN S/T10BT10Base-TRouterNOTE: Only HSD transceivers PN 1110-A-0150and 1110-A-0160 or HSD transceivers withService Bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplishedand HSD-X transceiver extensions support theEthernet (10BaseT) interface.
Page 1–3018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 1–5. Reduced Functionality Single-Channel SystemFigure 1–6. System Interface Block Diagram Dual-Channel SystemChannel CardData I/O ProcessorARINC ConnectorHSD TransceiverISDN S/T ISDN S/TRS-232 RS-23210BTLaptop computerSerial orUSBTerminal AdapterISDN S/THSD TransceiverRS-232File ServerLaptop computerLaptop computerISDN S/T10BT10Base-T/USBHub(10BT, USB)10BTData I/O ProcessorARINC ConnectorISDN S/TISDN S/TRS-232 RS-23210BTChannel CardChannel CardISDN S/TRS-232NOTE: Only HSD transceivers PN 1110-A-0150and 1110-A-0160 or HSD transceivers withService Bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplishedand HSD-X transceiver extensions support theEthernet (10BaseT) interface.
Page 1–3118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 1–7. Reduced Functionality Dual-Channel System(6) ISDN Circuit-Switched Data Interface HSD and HSD-X transceivers connect to a variety of interface options. The physical interface for ISDN service is EURO S/T, which supports several types of connections to user equipment. HSD and HSD-X transceivers provide either one or two ISDN S/T bus interfaces (depending on the number of channel cards and mode of installation of the unit).Each bus is capable of hosting up to eight, EURO ISDN physical devices—which means a one-channel system supports up to eight physical connections to EURO ISDN devices; a two-channel system supports up to sixteen physical connections to EURO ISDN devices. Each channel card supports communications with one, 64 kbps, ISDN B channel on an ISDN U interface bus. If the channel(s) is “busy” or “in-call", the request for service is denied (the system is busy).For ISDN data devices that support bonding with a two-channel card HSD transceiver, the device uses both ISDN B channels to increase data throughput as long as no other devices are “in call.”For incoming calls, each channel card (ISDN BUS) is assigned a Forward ID. The Forward ID is assigned Inmarsat Mobile Numbers (IMNs) for each service type. Each service type has an associated Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN). The MSNs are configured in the ISDN devices to direct incoming calls of different service types to the appropriate device. For a two-channel HSD transceiver, two IMNs are assigned for each service type. "System Operation" on page 2-1 provides examples and a detailed description of the routing assignments for the HSD transceiver.Several ISDN interface options are shown in Figure 1–8. The physical interface is EURO S/T, which can support up to eight simultaneous connections to user equipment. In the illustrated example, the ISDN port is only used for circuit-switched services (Swift64 Mobile ISDN).Data I/O ProcessorARINC ConnectorHSD TransceiverISDN S/T ISDN S/TRS-232RS-23210BTLaptop computerSerial orUSBChannel CardChannel CardISDN S/TRS-232Terminal AdapterISDN S/T
Page 1–3218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalNote: Activating MPDS on a particular channel card temporarily, disables the ISDN port on that channel card while MPDS service is in-use.For connection to Inmarsat Mobile ISDN services, install an RJ-45 interface connector in the cabin area. "Installation" on page 3-1 describes the RJ45 connector and cable termination. Figure 1–8. ISDN Connection Options(7) RS-232 Interface The simplest configuration, using the RS-232 interface, allows users to connect directly to the HSD without any kind of networking device (i.e. router or file server). The port identified as DTE-MPDS, on the Interconnect Drawings (refer to "Installation" on page 3-1), is a serial data port capable of operating up to 115 kbps line speed with a maximum throughput of 64 kbps. This RS-232 port only supports Mobile Packet Data Service (MPDS).Install a 9-pin, socket D-Sub interface connector in the cabin area for connection to this service. Configure the connection as: • Bits per second – 115200• Data bits – 8LAPTOP(PC)FAX(ISDN)PHONE(ISDN)ISDNBRI S/TRJ-11RJ-11RS232EURO T/A(ISDN)ModemPCMCIACARD(ISDN)HSDTransceiverCOM EXT. MODEM(ANALOG)FAX(TIP/RING)PHONE(TIP/RING)COM64K UDI DATA(MSN 10, 11, 12)64KSPEECH(MSN 40)3.1K AUDIO (MSN 20)Note: Although several ISDNDTE devices may beconnected to an ISDN S/TBus, the HSD only supportsone ISDN call at one timeper channel card.One ISDN S/T Bus perHSD TransceiverChannel Card
Page 1–3318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal• Parity – none• Stop bits – 1• Flow control – HardwareRefer to the applicable Interconnect Diagrams provided in "Installation" on page 3-1 for complete pinout designations.(8) Ethernet Data Interface HSD transceivers PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 support the Ethernet interface. All other HSD transceivers require the accomplishment of service bulletin, 1110-SB-0004 to upgrade to a Data I/O Card Type 2 that supports the Ethernet interface. The Ethernet port provides a 10 Mb/s access, with a 10BASE-T physical interface. The HSD Data I/O Controller takes the PPP data stream and directs it to the required port on the channel card, depending on the type of service selected by the user. PPP over Ethernet protocol (PPPoE) is required on the user equipment to allow the establishment of virtual connections to either service. Use the Ethernet port for either Swift64 Mobile ISDN or MPDS service.(9) ISDN S/T InterfaceTransceivers with a Data I/O Type 1 card installed support eight simultaneous connections to user equipment in single-channel card system and sixteen simultaneous connections in two-channel systems.HSD models 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 and HSD Transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished have a Data I/O Type 2 card installed. Data I/O Type 2 cards support seven simultaneous connections to user equipment in single-channel card system and fifteen simultaneous connections in two-channel systems.Note: An HSD transceiver with a Data I/O Card Type 2 uses one S/T Bus “device connection” for system use.Install an RJ-45 interface connector in the cabin area to facilitate connection to the Ethernet interface. Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for a description of the RJ-45 connector and cable termination.(10)Maintenance Port InterfaceThe HSD is equipped with a maintenance port, located on the front panel of the HSD transceiver with remote access also available through the rear ARINC 600 connector. The maintenance port provides the physical connection to a password-protected, HSD maintenance utility program that provides a system interface for users or service personnel who need to upgrade, monitor, or troubleshoot the system. The user connects to the Maintenance Port either through the Maintenance 25-pin socket D-Sub (DB25S) connector on the front panel of the HSD, or through a remote 9-pin socket D-Sub (DB9S) connector via the ARINC 600 connector, as described in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1.
Page 1–3418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalA standard VT100 compatible terminal or computer (PC/laptop) running an emulator program such as HyperTerminal©, ProComm (PCPLUS)©, or another serial communication package provides the user interface to the HSD maintenance utility program. Configure the connection as follows: • Bits per second – 19200• Data bits – 8• Parity – none• Stop bits – 1• Flow control – noneThe HSD supports two different end user access levels within the Maintenance Port architecture: End User or Field Representative.(a) End User Access: Level 1Password: menuThis limited-access level is for anyone without technical training on the product. It provides read-only access to help users diagnose problems with the assistance of product support personnel.(b) Field Representative Access: Level 2Password: maintThis level is for trained original equipment manufacturer (O.E.M.) installers and product support personnel. This access level supports “read’” and limited “write” capabilities. Users are able to disable/mask/clear faults, change satellite or LES preferences, view and modify certain EEPROM parameters, and perform other maintenance or upgrade functions."Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 provides a detailed description of the two levels of user access and of the menus, report selections, functionality, and system diagnostic procedures of the HSD Maintenance Utility Program.H. Initiated-Self-TestThe Initiated-Self-Test occurs during the power up sequence or when the “TEST” button (located on the front panel of the unit) is depressed and held down for three seconds or more. It provides the same functionality as the remote reset switch.I. Owner Requirements TableAn Owner Requirements Table Tool (ORT Tool) is a Windows-based program that is used to create and change system configuration disks for HSD transceivers. The configuration data files created using the ORT Tool are loaded into the HSD transceiver via the RS-232 Maintenance Port interface. Detailed information on how to use the ORT Tool is provided in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1.
Page 1–3518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal4. Inmarsat System OverviewA. GeneralThis section provides an overview of the Inmarsat satellite communications system and networks.B. Satellite Network OverviewThe satellite communication system (SATCOM) comprises global satellite networks, Land Earth Stations (LES), and Mobile Earth Stations (MES).Satellite communication systems provide users with long-range voice and data communication by accessing global satellite and ground communications networks.Inmarsat is an international organization that operates and maintains the satellites and satellite networks. Inmarsat operates multiple geostationary satellites. Each satellite is located over an oceanic region; the current ocean region names are:• Atlantic Ocean Region-East (AOR-E)• Atlantic Ocean Region-West (AOR-W)• Indian Ocean Region (IOR)• Pacific Ocean Region (POR)These satellites provide worldwide telecommunication services for aviation, shipping, and land-mobile terminal users. The satellites connect to ground telecommunication systems through the LES.The HSD transceiver, in conjunction with an ARINC 741 Aero H/H+ antenna subsystem, acts as an MES. The combined system provides users with a data and voice communications link to the satellite network and global telecommunications system. Figure 1–9 illustrates a simplified satellite communications system.
Page 1–3618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 1–9. Simplified Aeronautical Satellite Communications System
Page 1–3718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal5. HSD Modes and Configuration DescriptionsA. GeneralThis section describes the system mode and configuration variations for the HSD High-Speed-Data SATCOM Transceiver installations.B. OverviewHSD transceivers install in a variety of customized configuration modes. HSD transceivers may be installed as Stand-Alone systems or as Non-Stand-Alone units installed within existing SATCOM systems. Four different system configuration modes are possible:• Stand-Alone Mode—single or dual channel transceiver• Cooperative Mode—single channel transceiver (with Collins SAT-906 systems)• Combined Mode—single or dual channel transceiver (with Honeywell MCS systems)• Selective Mode—single or dual channel transceiver (with Collins SAT-906 or Honeywell MCS systems)• Multi-Channel configurations—dual-channel HSD transceiver integrated with additional HSD-X extension transceiver(s) to support multi-channel operation (more than two 64 kbps channels).(1) Channel Card ConfigurationsThis section describes the types of channel card configurations supported by HSD transceivers.(a) Dual-Channel Card HSD Transceivers In dual-channel card HSD transceivers, both 64 kbps channels work either independently or as a bonded 128 kbps data-link to the Inmarsat Communications Network. The user has the option to select the service type needed—either circuit-switched data (Swift64 Mobile ISDN) or MPDS. The HSD also supports two simultaneous voice or 14.4 kbps fax calls when not being used in data mode.(b) Single-Channel Card HSD Transceivers Single-channel-card HSD transceivers provide one 64 kbps channel that supports a bi-directional, 64 kbps data-link to the Inmarsat Communications Network. The user has the option to select the service type needed—either Swift64 Mobile ISDN or MPDS. The HSD also supports one voice or 14.4 kbps fax call when not being used in data mode.(c) Multi-Channel Configurations Stand-Alone HSD-128 transceivers in Multi-Channel installations support two 64 kbps channels that work either independently or as a bonded 128 kbps data-link to the Inmarsat Communications Network as well as an additional 64 kbps channel per HSD-X installed in the system.
Page 1–3818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalThe user has the option to select the service type needed—either circuit-switched data (Swift64 Mobile ISDN) or MPDS. The HSD also supports three or more simultaneous voice or 14.4 kbps fax calls when not being used in data mode—depending on the number of additional HSD-X transceivers installed.(2) Installation Modes and Configurations(a) Stand-Alone Mode SystemsIn Stand-Alone Mode, the HSD transceiver controls both the HPA and antenna. The system supports one channel of Swift64 Mobile ISDN and one channel of Swift64 MPDS or two channels of Swift64 Mobile ISDN or two channels of MPDS. For details, refer to the system block diagram.(b) Non-Stand-Alone Mode SystemsIn Non-Stand-Alone configuration modes, the HSD hardware acts as the High Gain Antenna HPA for Aero H/H+ calls and provides one or two channels of Swift64 communications. In these configurations, the Aero H/H+ system provides the system interface to the aircraft antenna subsystem. The radio frequency (RF) from the HSD transceiver and the Aero H/H+ system is combined in the HSD. The receive RF from the antenna sub-system is split before being presented to the Aero H/H+ and HSD transceivers. 1. Cooperative Mode SystemsHSD transceivers installed in Cooperative Mode configurations operate with a SAT-906 SATCOM system. The HSD hardware is installed in the SAT-906 HPA equipment position. A communications link between the SAT-906 system and the HSD transceiver coordinates the use of the HPA. An external splitter “splits” the antenna RF receive (Rx) signal path to both the HSD and the SAT-906 SATCOM systems. The antenna is controlled by the SAT-906 system’s SDU.This system configuration provides one channel of Swift64 Mobile ISDN, MPDS high-speed data, or Aero H/H+ communications. Simultaneous Swift64 and Aero H/H+ calls are possible. Swift64 HSD calls proceed even if an Aero H/H+ incoming or outgoing call is in progress providing there is sufficient HPA power available to process all of the calls. To use ARINC 429 data from the Collins SAT-906 SDU, the minimum requirement for HSD control-card software is version 4.5 (or later). Version 4.5 control-card software is available via HSD service bulletins: 1110-SB-0001 and 1110-SB-0003. The recommended software version for optimum system performance is version 7.5 or later. Version 7.5 is available via service bulletin, 1110-SB-0015.The SAT-906 SDU must have core software –068, including service bulletins 31 and 501, which change the unit to a –150 designation and include wiring SDU pin TP12E grounded to indicate that the SDU is operating with an HSD.To achieve the current “best system” operation performance, incorporate EMS SATCOM service bulletin 1110-SB-0015. At the time of writing, Cooperative Mode installations only support single-channel card configurations. If installing a dual-channel HSD-128 transceiver in a Cooperative Mode environment, the HSD EEPROM parameters must be
Page 1–3918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminalconfigured as a single-channel system. Use the HSD maintenance utility program to configure the EEPROM settings for a single channel card. (Menu 3, press M, select miscellaneous parameter number 10.)Refer to the system block diagram in Figure 1–12 for Cooperative Mode system details.2. Honeywell Combined Mode (HCM) SystemsHSD transceivers installed in Combined Mode configurations operate with the Honeywell Aero H/H+ MCS 3000/6000 and MCS 4000/7000 Multi-Channel Satellite Communication Systems. The HSD hardware is installed in the SATCOM HPA equipment position, replacing the Honeywell HPA. An external splitter “splits” the antenna RF receive (Rx) path signal to the HSD and the Aero H/H+ systems. The antenna is controlled by the Aero H/H+ system’s SDU.This system configuration provides up to two channels of access to high-speed Swift64 Mobile ISDN or MPDS services as well as the existing Aero H/H+ communications simultaneously. Swift64 HSD calls proceed even if an Aero H/H+ incoming or outgoing call is in progress—providing there is sufficient HPA power available to process all of the calls. In Combined Mode (HCM) installations, the HSD system provides two channels of Swift64 data service and Aero H/H+ call capability. Swift64 and Aero H/H+ calls are possible simultaneously under the following conditions:• If a Swift64 call is in process and an Aero H/H+ call is initiated, either incoming or outgoing, the Aero H/H+ call is allowed to proceed;• If any Aero H/H+ calls are in process, a Swift64 call is allowed to proceed providing that there is sufficient HPA power available to process both the Swift64 and Aero H/H+ calls; and,• If both call types are in process, and system resources become limited due to dropping antenna gain, Aero H/H+ calls will maintain priority.Refer to the system block diagram in Figure 1–13 for details. 3. Selective Mode SystemsHSD transceivers installed in Selective Mode configurations operate with an Aero H/H+ system. The HSD transceiver is installed in the Aero H/H+ HPA equipment position. This system configuration provides either one or two channels of Swift64 Mobile ISDN and MPDS high-speed-data communications OR Aero H/H+ communications. Simultaneous Swift64 and Aero H/H+ calls are not possible. Swift64 HSD calls are terminated if an Aero H/H+ incoming or outgoing call is detected by the HSD transceiver allowing the Aero H/H+ call to proceed. While Aero H/H+ calls are in process, Swift64 HSD calls cannot be initiated. Refer to the system block diagram in Figure 1–13 for details.
Page 1–4018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(c) Multi-Channel ConfigurationsThe HSD Multi-Channel configuration combines a dual-channel, Stand-Alone Mode HSD-128 Transceiver with one or more single-channel HSD-X transceivers to add additional channels to the system. Each channel provides an ISDN 64 kbps connection that can be used for voice or data services. The two channels in the HSD can be internally bonded to provide a 128 kbps ISDN data connection. Externally, all four channels shown in Figure 1–10 can be combined to provide a single 256 kbps capability with the help of a router, Ethernet hub, or Terminal Adapter.The HSD-128 is the master of the system, and as its name suggests, it controls the overall operation of the Multi-Channel HSD configuration. It keeps track of time and allocated power and may command the HSD-X “slaves” to terminate calls under certain conditions, such as an ocean region change. The HSD-X transceivers are wired to the HSD-128 HPA and therefore compete equally for HPA power allocation. The transmit signal of each channel is fed through a combiners/attenuator combination to the HPA located in the HSD and ultimately to the antenna. Conversely, the receive signal from the antenna goes through a series of splitters on its way to each channel.On power-up, HSD-X transceivers go through an initialization process that identifies and communicates the number of extension channels and their position in the system chain back to the HSD-128 controller.The block diagram in Figure 1–10 illustrates the system function of the HSD-128, two HSD-Xs, and the antenna system.Figure 1–10. Multi-Channel System Block DiagramHSD-128 (Master)HSD-X(Slave)HSD-X(Slave)?\HGAD/LNAACU\ISDNTransmit PathReceive PathCrosstalk BusISDNMPDS (RS232)Ethernet (10Base T)(Optional)ISDNISDNMPDS (RS232)MPDS (RS232)Ethernet (10Base T)Ethernet (10Base T)
Page 1–4118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 1–11. Stand-Alone Mode System Block DiagramHPA(60W)ChannelCard 2ChannelCard 1 Data I/OCardControl CardD/LNAACUTerminalAdapterCombiner ARINC 741AntennaSplitterISDN TelephoneISDN TelephoneTX RX RXTXOscillator10 MhzFront Panel DB25SLEDsResetMaintenance PortMulti-Control INRS232 MPDS (2)ISDN (2)ISDN (1)Tx/RxBond(RS422)RS232MPDS65 dB GainPower/Control &BITEMulti-ControlPowerSupply28 V dc or115 V ac,400 HzTerminalAdapterSignalsRFMPDSACU BITE/HPA MuteSTAND-ALONE SYSTEM (1 or 2 CHANNEL)LEGEND10 Base-T (Future)Power/Control &BITE RXFront Panel LEDsRemotesTXOCXO ReadyRS232Multi-Control OUTRS232RS232 MPDS (1)ARINC 429RS232ISDN (1)ISDN (2)HSD TRANSCEIVER
Page 1–4218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 1–12. Cooperative Mode System Block Diagram
Page 1–4318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 1–13. Combined/Selective Mode System Block Diagram HPA(60W)ChannelCard 2 ChannelCard 1Data I/OCardControl CardD/LNAACUSDU ARINC 741AntennaSplitterSplitterTX RX RXTX RFU RXRFU TXOscillator10 MhzFront Panel DB25SLEDsResetMaintenance PortMPDS (1)Circuit Switched (ISDN 2)Circuit Switched (ISDN 1)RX TXTx/RxBond(RS422)RS232MPDS65 dB GainNOTES:1. Antenna is controlled by Honeywell SDUMulti-ControlPowerSupply28 V dc or115 V ac,400 Hz AERO-H RFUACU BITE/HPA MUTE MPDSOCXO ReadySignalsRFLEGENDPower/Control& BITEPower/Control& BITEFront Panel LEDs10 Base T(Future)RF ModuleRS232RemotesMPDS (2)ARINC HPA BITEISDN (1)ISDN (2)ARINC Multi-Control (Listen Only) RS232RS232RS232ARINC 429HSD TRANSCEIVERCOMBINED MODE
Page 1–4418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalC. Functional System TheoryThe HSD is a high-speed SATCOM Transceiver that contains: either one or two channel cards, a high stability reference oscillator, a high power amplifier, a data processor module, and a power supply. The HSD receives power from the aircraft as either 28 V dc or 115 V ac, 400 Hz.When integrated with the SAT-906 Aero H/H+ as a Cooperative Mode system (refer to Figure 1–12), the HSD L-band Rx/Tx interfaces are shared with those of the SAT-906 via combiners/splitters between the DLNA and the HPA. The SDU of the SAT-906 maintains control over the HSD component via the crosstalk bus and associated discretes. HSD transceivers installed in Combined Mode configurations operate with the Honeywell Aero H/H+ MCS 3000/6000 and MCS 4000/7000 Multi-Channel Satellite Communication Systems. The HSD hardware is installed in the SATCOM HPA equipment position, replacing the existing HPA. An external splitter “splits” the antenna receive (Rx) path to send the RF signal to the HSD and the Aero H/H+ systems. The antenna is controlled by the Aero H/H+ system’s SDU.The HSD supports one or more channels (depending on the model, mode, and configuration installed) of Inmarsat Swift64 MPDS and Mobile ISDN 64 kbps data links. The HSD and HSD-X both have three different ports that support the following interfaces: EURO ISDN S/T, serial (RS-232), and Ethernet (10BASE-T). Although able to support multiple configurations depending on user needs, the following constraints apply:• EURO ISDN S/T port supports Swift64 Mobile ISDN (circuit-switched services - SCPC) only• RS-232 port supports MPDS only• 10BASE-T port supports Swift64 Mobile ISDN or MPDS (Available on HSD transceivers PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 or HSD transceivers that have accomplished Service Bulletin, 1110-SB-0004 to upgrade to a Data I/O Type 2 Card)Note: Only one service type can be used at one time—per HSD or HSD-X transceiver channel card. The most likely configurations (as illustrated in Figure 1–14) include connecting a networking device such as a router or a file server to allow multiple users to share the channel(s) provided by the HSD. The simplest configurations, using the RS-232 interface, allow users to connect directly to the HSD without any kind of networking device (e.g. router or server). The RS-232 port allows a single user for MPDS only, while the ISDN S/T port will allow up to eight users on a first come first serve basis.
Page 1–4518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 1–14. HSD User ConfigurationsHub(10BT, USB) 10BT 10BT / USBServerFax (Group 4)Telephone2 WireLaptop computerTARS-232Laptop computerEMS CNX Network Module(EMS PN 1110-A-0501-01, Future Availability)10BTLaptop computerHub(10BT, USB)10BT / USBRouterISDN BRI S/TISDN BRI S/TRS-232, ISDN BRI S/T,or Ethernet 10Base T(with Data I/O Type 2)RS-232 orISDN BRI S/TRS-232 orISDN BRI S/TTelephoneLaptop computerLaptop computer2 Wire10-100 Base TFax (Group 3)2 Wire
Page 1–4618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalBlank Page
Page 2–118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalSYSTEM OPERATION1. IntroductionThis section provides basic information on registering, commissioning, and operating the HSD High-Speed Data SATCOM transceiver and HSD-X High-Speed SATCOM Extension transceiver. For more information on Swift64 service providers and the activation of HSD and HSD-X transceivers, visit the EMS Technologies HSD Web page at www.emssatcom.com/hsd/team.asp.
Page 2–218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal2. Activating HSD TransceiversTo activate an HSD or HSD-X transceiver: 1. Obtain terminal information (Forward Identification Numbers and Terminal Type and Category information) from EMS Technologies. 2. Register the terminal with an Inmarsat approved service provider and activate an account. A. Obtaining Terminal InformationBefore installing the HSD or HSD-X transceiver, contact EMS Technologies to obtain terminal information needed to register and activate the unit with Inmarsat. EMS SATCOM Customer Care assigns an appropriate Terminal Type number and valid Forward IDs for the HSD transceiver based on the intended installation configuration (Stand-Alone or Non-Stand-Alone Mode). Note: Cooperative, Combined, and Selective Mode installations are Non-Stand-Alone Mode installations that operate with an Aero H/H+ system. Cooperative and Combined installations are assigned a Category B terminal type. Please note that Inmarsat does not support Mini-M Voice (4.8 kbps) service for Category B terminals. For more information on available services for Category B systems, contact your Inmarsat Service Provider. Note: If you are replacing or upgrading a Stand-Alone or Selective Mode system with a Combined Mode system, you need to de-activate the “old” system’s Forward IDs and service accounts and “activate” new Forward IDs and service accounts to Category B frequency allocations. This process may take 24 to 48 hours to complete. Contact your service provider for more information.When requesting terminal registration information from EMS SATCOM, please have the following information available:• End customer name, including contact information• Purchase order number• Tail registration number, aircraft type, and serial number of the aircraft the unit is being installed on• Serial Number of HSD or HSD-X transceiver(s)• Intended installation configuration mode (Stand-Alone, Cooperative, Combined (HCM), Selective, or Stand-Alone in a Multi-Channel Configuration)Contact EMS SATCOM Aeronautical Sales and Customer Service at: Toll-free from Canada and U.S.A. 1.800.600.9759Outside Canada and U.S.A. 1.613.591.9064Fax: 1 613.591.8703Web sites: www.emssatcom.com
Page 2–318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(1) Swift64 Service CategoriesInmarsat has restricted the frequencies assigned to the HSD system eliminating the possibility of intermodulation signals occurring, thus avoiding any resulting interference problems with the GPS band signals. Inmarsat split the band of frequencies assigned to Swift64 High-Speed Data into two separate categories: Category A and Category B. Category B frequencies are restricted to those frequencies that do not overlap with AERO-H frequency allocations. HSD transceivers in Cooperative and Combined Mode installations must be registered as Category B systems. HSD transceivers in Stand-Alone and Selective installations do not require restricted frequency allocations. Register Stand-Alone HSD transceivers, Multi-Channel, and Selective Mode systems as Category A systems. The frequencies assigned to 4.8 kbps Low-Speed Voice (LSV) are not within the managed Category B frequency range. Therefore, LSV is not a service supported by Inmarsat in Cooperative and Combined Mode HSD transceivers. Secure communications in Category B, HSD systems do not have access to Mini-M service. However, HSD transceivers have both c8400 or c21000 M4 circuit-switched mode channels, which support secure communication operations.To ensure the correct Category frequency assignments for HSD systems, different terminal type numbers are assigned to HSD transceivers based on their intended installation configuration. Table 2–1 lists the terminal type, frequency category, and supported service types for all types of HSD transceivers installations. Note: Category B, Inmarsat terminals do not support Mini-M Voice (4.8 kbps LSV). Selective Mode is a non-standard installation and it is not a recommended mode of operation. Selective Mode has been superseded by Combined Mode operation for MCS series SATCOM and with Cooperative Mode operation for Table 2–1. Swift64 Category and Service MatrixHSD Installation ModeInmarsat Frequency CategoryTerminal Type64 kbps speech3.1 KHz audio56 kbps data64 kbps UDIMini-M Voice MPDSStand-Alone and Multi-Channel (HSD and HSD-X) Category A 76ES03 X X X X X XCollins Cooperative Category B 76ES04 X X X X N/A XHoneywell Combined Category B 76ES05 X X X X N/A XSelective Mode (Not Rec’d)Category A 76ES03 X X X X X X
Page 2–418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalSAT-906 series SATCOM. It is recommended that all systems operating in Selective Mode be upgraded to support Combined or Cooperative Mode as applicable.B. Selecting a Service ProviderRegister the HSD transceiver with an Inmarsat service provider. Contact Inmarsat for an up-to-date list of Inmarsat Swift64 service providers as follows: Inmarsat 99 City Road, London EC1Y 1AX Tel: +44 20 7728 1000 Fax: +44 20 728 1044Customer Care Tel: +44 20 7728 1777 Fax: +44 20 7728 1142 Email: customer_care@inmarsat.comWeb addresses: www.inmarsat.com and www.inmarsat.com/swift64/supp_ser.htm Note: Although the HSD and HSD-X are Mobile Earth Stations (MES), they are referred to as Aircraft Earth Stations (AES) on the service-provider registration form.C. Registering and Activating the HSD and HSD-X TransceiversContact your Inmarsat service provider and ask for a “Registration for service activation of Aircraft Earth Station ” form. To complete the registration form the following information is needed: • Customer information (address and contact information)• Service provider details (obtain from your Inmarsat service provider)• System and terminal information (system terminal type, manufacturer, model number, serial number of unit and Inmarsat Serial Number) • Aircraft information (tail number, fuselage/airframe number, manufacturer and model, and country of registration• List of services required (e.g. Swift64 Mobile ISDN)
Page 2–518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal3. Configuring HSD SystemsThis section provides basic information on how to configure HSD systems for operation with user devices.A. Setting up NetworksThis section provides basic information on how to configure user connections and networks for operation with the HSD and HSD-X transceivers and satellite communications network.(1) Network TypesThe samples in Figure 2–1 have been simplified to illustrate different types of networks (including a basic, single-user connection). In the illustration, SATCOM refers to HSD transceivers (including any HSD-X transceivers installed in Multi-Channel configurations), as well as any associated SATCOM systems in Non-Stand Alone installations (Cooperative, Honeywell Combined, and Selective Modes).Figure 2–1. Network Configuration TypesNote: A single client is a server that does not need to share the connection. A server connecting to a SATCOM through a hub still has the same logical session link. A router is equivalent to a server and a hub bundled into a single device.
Page 2–618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(2) Networking ComponentsThe network configurations illustrated in Figure 2–1 have common components that integrate and operate with HSD transceivers.• An interface connection to the HSD equipment: The HSD equipment supports the following interface connections: an RS-232 serial port (MPDS only), a 10BASE-T Ethernet interface on HSD models, 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 and available as an option on other models with HSD service bulletin, 1110-SB-0004 accomplished, (MPDS or Swift64 Mobile ISDN), and an ISDN interface (Swift64 Mobile ISDN only). The Ethernet interface is accessed through a direct connection (dedicated network card or crossover cable) or through a hub.• A session over the HSD equipment: This is the logical link between the server and the ground segment.• A connection to other local computers: Connection to other local computers is usually achieved using a hub or router; however, the system supports any method computers use to communicate between each other (for example: wireless, dial-up).• A method of sharing the session with other computers: Session sharing is accomplished using Network Address Translation (NAT)—the method behind Internet Connection Sharing, although various proxies may also be used.(3) HSD Interface OptionsThe HSD has three interface options ("Installation" on page 3-1 provides connection details):(a) ISDNThe ISDN interface supports connections to Swift64 Mobile ISDN services only. Computers connect to the ISDN interface through a EURO ISDN S/T BRI terminal adapter or router. (Euro ISDN S/T modem and drivers are required.)(b) Serial Port (RS-232)The RS-232 port interface supports MPDS services only, and to a single channel per physical cable connection.Connect to the serial port RS-232 interface using a serial cable. (Hardware handshaking lines are required: CTS/RTS and DTR/DSR.) On the server computer, install a generic external modem with the port set to 115200 bps.(c) Ethernet The Ethernet interface is supported in HSD transceivers, PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160—and HSD transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished (with Data I/O Type 2 Card installed). HSD-X transceiver extensions also support Ethernet.The Ethernet interface supports both MPDS and M4 circuit-switched data (Swift64 Mobile ISDN) services for either single or dual channel systems. It supports longer cable lengths to accommodate extension through hubs and other networking devices.
Page 2–718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalConnect to the HSD transceiver’s Ethernet interface either directly from a dedicated Ethernet card using an Ethernet crossover cable or from a hub using a regular Ethernet cable.B. Mapping User Devices for ISDN ServicesThis section describes how the HSD system manages ISDN traffic for user devices connected to the network.(1) OverviewHSD transceivers support connection to a multitude of user devices allowing the user to customize their system. Because each user’s equipment setup is unique, the HSD system uses routing codes to ensure that incoming calls (whether data or voice) reach the appropriate device. These same routing codes also direct outgoing calls to the appropriate Swift64 service type supported by the Inmarsat Satellite Communications Network (3.1 kHz Audio, 64 kbps Speech, 64 kbps Data, 56 kbps Data, or in Stand-Alone systems—4.8 kbps LSV).The physical interface for ISDN service is EURO S/T, which supports several types of connections to user equipment. HSD transceivers provide either one or two ISDN S/T (BRI) Bus interfaces (depending on the number of channel cards and mode of installation of the unit).Each bus is capable of hosting up to eight, EURO ISDN physical devices—which means a one-channel system supports up to eight physical connections to EURO ISDN devices; whereas, a two-channel system supports up to sixteen physical connections to EURO ISDN devices. Note: An HSD transceiver with a DATA I/O Card Type 2 (models 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 or units with service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished) also supports eight devices per channel card, but uses one “device connection” on the first channel card for system use, therefore providing up to fifteen possible device connections in two-channel systems. Each channel card provides one, 64 kbps ISDN B channel that is available to either ISDN Bus. If the channel(s) is “busy” or “in-call”, the request for service is denied (the system is busy).For ISDN data devices that support bonding (with a two-channel card, HSD transceiver), the device will attempt to use both ISDN B channels to increase data throughput (as long as no other devices are “in call”).For incoming calls, each channel card (ISDN BUS) is assigned a Forward ID. The Forward IDs are assigned Inmarsat Mobile Numbers (IMNs) for each service type. Two service types are assigned multiple IMNs; 64 kbps data is assigned three IMNs and 4.8 kbps LSV is assigned 16 IMNs.Note: Sixteen MSNs for 4.8 kbps LSV were implemented in Version 4.1 Control Card Software. Systems shipped from the factory after November 15, 2002 have Version 4.1 software or later.Each service type IMN has associated Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN). MSNs are used to configure the user devices so that incoming calls of different service types are routed to the appropriate device.
Page 2–818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFor a one-channel HSD transceiver: one IMN is assigned to 64 kbps Speech, 56 kbps Data, and 3.1 kHz Audio; three IMNs are assigned to 64 kbps Data; and sixteen IMNs are assigned to 4.8 kbps LSV.For a two-channel HSD transceiver: two IMNs are assigned to 64 kbps Speech, 56 kbps Data, and 3.1 kHz Audio; six IMNs are assigned to 64 kbps Data; and in Stand-Alone systems thirty-two IMNs are assigned to 4.8 kbps LSV. For a three-channel HSD Multi-Channel configuration (one HSD-128 and one HSD-X extension channel), three IMNs are assigned to 64 kbps Speech, 56 kbps Data, and 3.1 kHz Audio; nine IMNs are assigned to 64 kbps Data; and in Stand-Alone systems forty-eight IMNs are assigned to 4.8 kbps LSV.For a four-channel HSD Multi-Channel configuration (one HSD-128 and two HSD-X extension channels), four IMNs are assigned to 64 kbps Speech, 56 kbps Data, and 3.1 kHz Audio; 12 IMNs are assigned to 64 kbps Data; and in Stand-Alone systems sixty-four IMNs are assigned to 4.8 kbps LSV.Figure 2–2 illustrates the routing assignments for a two-channel HSD transceiver with the following attached to the bus: two voice lines, one FAX line, and one data line device. Figure 2–2 and Table 2–2 and Table 2–3 illustrate the system setup routing or configuration possibilities for ISDN devices using a two-channel HSD transceiver in Stand-Alone Mode as an example.The following dialing instructions provide an example based on the system setup of Figure 2–2 and the mapping programming details provided in Table 2–2, Table 2–3, and Table 2–4: • To call ISDN Phone #1: Dial IMN of 60xxxxxx1 or 76xxxxxx7• To call ISDN Phone #2: Dial IMN of 60xxxxxx6 or 76xxxxx29• To call ISDN FAX: Dial IMN 60xxxxxx2• To call ISDN FAX: Dial IMN 60xxxxx24
Page 2–918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 2–2. System Setup and Mapping for Incoming Calls (Fixed-to-Mobile)Note: Refer to Table 2–2, Table 2–3, and Table 2–4 for the default MSNs assigned within the HSD system. Table 2–2. IMN and MSN Assignments for ISDN Bus #1Channel Card # 1 Forward ID XAXXXXService Type IMN MSN64 kbps Speech 60xxxxxx1 (See Note below)MSN 403.1 kHz Audio 60xxxxxx2 MSN 2056 kbps Data 60xxxxxx3 MSN 3064 kbps Data 60xxxxxx460xxxxxx560xxxxxx6MSN 10MSN 11MSN 124.8 kbps LSV 76xxxxxx7 through to 760xxxx22 MSN 80 through to 95 Table 2–3. IMN and MSN Assignments for ISDN Bus #2Channel Card # 2 (if installed) Forward ID XBXXXXService Type IMN MSN64 kbps Speech 60xxxxx23 MSN 403.1 kHz Audio 60xxxxx24 MSN 2056 kbps Data 60xxxxx25 MSN 30
Page 2–1018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalNote: IMNs shown are examples only. Actual IMNs may not be assigned in numerical sequence. HSD-X extension channels are assigned IMNs using the same logic. (a) Inmarsat Mobile NumbersInmarsat Mobile Numbers (IMNs) are unique routing numbers that act similarly to telephone numbers. IMNs are assigned by Inmarsat to each service type (64 kbps Speech, 3.1 kHz Audio, 56 kbps Data, 64 kbps Data, and 4.8 kbps LSV).When registering your system, request IMNs for each service-type device attached to the HSD transceiver on the Service Activation form. Although the service provider may support an unlimited number of IMNs assigned to a particular system, the number of physical connections available on a system defines the number of IMNs supported. Note: To get assigned extra or multiple IMN per service type, you must request them from your service provider when filling out your service registration and application form.The maximum a one-channel HSD transceiver supports is eight physical connections to EURO ISDN devices. A two-channel HSD transceiver supports up to sixteen physical connections to EURO ISDN devices. The maximum an HSD-X transceiver supports is seven physical connections to EURO ISDN devices.Note: An HSD transceiver with a DATA I/O Card Type 2 installed (models 1110-A-1050 and 1110-A-0160 or other models with service bulletin, 1110-SB-0004 accomplished) only supports seven EURO-ISDN devices on a one-channel card system. DATA I/O Card Type 2 systems can only connect to one channel card in a two-channel-card, split-bus configuration providing connectivity to fifteen devices in total.The numbering of IMNs varies from one type of Inmarsat service to another. For troubleshooting purposes understanding the IMN format can assist in verifying that the correct service type is assigned to connecting devices. Inmarsat IMNs (for this type of terminal) use the following nine-digit format:IMN Format: T1- T2- X1- X2 -X3 -X4 -X5- X6- X7Numerical Example: • 760011819 (for 4.8 kbps AMBE LSV)• 600221989 (for 64 kbps Data)64 kbps Data 60xxxxx2660xxxxx2760xxxxx28MSN 10MSN 11MSN 124.8 kbps LSV 76xxxxx29 through to 760xxxx44 MSN 80 through to 95 Table 2–3. IMN and MSN Assignments for ISDN Bus #2Channel Card # 2 (if installed) Forward ID XBXXXX
Page 2–1118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalT1 and T2 are two-digit identifiers for Inmarsat service types. X1 to X7 can be any digit between "0" and "9". The IMNs for Mini-M (4.8 kbps LSV) service type are identified by the T1 and T2 numbers 7 and 6. The IMNs for the 56 kbps and 64 kbps service types (including ISDN Speech and 3.1 kHz audio) are identified by the T1 and T2 numbers 6 and 0. (b) Multiple Subscriber NumbersMultiple Subscriber Numbers (MSNs) act as identification and routing codes for user devices attached to the HSD system. MSNs identify the device on the system so that incoming calls route to the appropriate device. Each device must be assigned an appropriate MSN to identify to the Inmarsat system what type of service that device needs on outgoing calls. The MSNs also provide routing information for incoming calls. For a simplified understanding of MSNs, equate them to telephone extension numbers (where the IMN is the PBX telephone number and the MSN is the extension number).1. Configuring MSNsEach HSD and HSD-X channel card is assigned one Forward ID and an IMN for each service type the system is registered for with the service provider. Table 2–4 provides the list of the MSN numbers recognized by the HSD system. Both 64 kbps Data and Mini-M Voice (4.8 kbps LSV AMBE) services support multiple MSNs. The MSNs are assigned to each IMN as follows:• One MSN for the service types 64 kbps Speech, 3.1 kHz Audio, and 56 kbps Data• Three MSNs for 64 kbps Data• Sixteen MSNs for Mini-M Voice (4.8 kbps LSV AMBE) (On control card software 4.1 or later—systems shipped from the factory after November 15, 2002 have Version 4.1 software or later installed.)The three MSNs assigned to 64 kbps ISDN support connection to three separate devices mapped to the same IMN. Therefore, in dual-channel systems, three ISDN devices can be connected to each channel provided six separate mapping extensions; in three-channel systems, three ISDN devices can be connected to each channel provided nine separate mapping extensions; and, in four-channel systems, three ISDN devices can be connected to each channel providing twelve separate mapping extensions.The sixteen MSNs assigned to 4.8 kbps LSV support the mapping of sixteen separate phones to the same IMN. (Example: sixteen phones connected to a PBX box.) In dual and Multi-Channel systems, PBX devices can be connected to each channel providing up to 64 separate phone extensions. Note: Incoming voice calls will ring any phone devices not programmed with an MSN (left blank) including 4.8 kbps LSV, 64 kbps Speech, and 3.1 kHz audio calls. Configure all devices (e.g. telephones, fax machines, laptops) connected to the HSD system with an appropriate MSN. (Refer to the device manufacturer’s user documentation for specific instructions in how to enter or configure the MSN.)
Page 2–1218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 2–4. HSD Transceiver MSN Configuration TableForward ID Service Type IMN MSNChannel Card #1 (XAXXXX) 64 kbps Speech 60xxxxxxx 40Channel Card #2 (XBXXXX) - Dual Channel Units64 kbps Speech 60xxxxxxx 40Channel Card #3 (XCXXXX) - Multi-Channel HSD-X 164 kbps Speech 60xxxxxxx 40Channel Card #4 (XDXXXX) - Multi-Channel HSD-X 264 kbps Speech 60xxxxxxx 40Channel Card #1 (XAXXXX) 3.1 kHz Audio 60xxxxxxx 20Channel Card #2 (XBXXXX) - Dual Channel Units 3.1 kHz Audio 60xxxxxxx 20Channel Card #3 (XCXXXX) - Multi-Channel HSD-X 13.1 kHz Audio 60xxxxxxx 20Channel Card #4 (XDXXXX) - Multi-Channel HSD-X 23.1 kHz Audio 60xxxxxxx 20Channel Card # 1 (XAXXXX) 56 kbps Data 60xxxxxxx 30Channel Card # 2 (XBXXXX) - Dual Channel Units56 kbps Data 60xxxxxxx 30Channel Card #3 (XCXXXX) - Multi-Channel HSD-X 156 kbps Data 60xxxxxxx 30Channel Card #4 (XDXXXX) - Multi-Channel HSD-X 256 kbps Data 60xxxxxxx 30Channel Card # 1 (XAXXXX) 64 kbps Data 60xxxxxxx 10, 11, 12Channel Card # 2 (XBXXXX) - Dual Channel Units64 kbps Data 60xxxxxxx 10, 11, 12Channel Card #3 (XCXXXX) - Multi-Channel HSD-X 164 kbps Data 60xxxxxxx 10, 11, 12Channel Card #4 (XDXXXX) - Multi-Channel HSD-X 256 kbps Data 60xxxxxxx 30Channel Card #1 (XAXXXX) 4.8 kbps LSV (Not supported in Non-Stand-Alone systems)76xxxxxxx 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95Channel Card #2 (XBXXXX) - Dual Channel Units4.8 kbps LSV (Not supported in Non-Stand-Alone systems)76xxxxxxx 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95
Page 2–1318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalChannel Card #3 (XCXXXX) - Multi-Channel HSD-X 14.8 kbps LSV (Not supported in Non-Stand-Alone systems)76xxxxxxx 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95Channel Card #4 (XDXXXX) - Multi-Channel HSD-X 24.8 kbps LSV (Not supported in Non-Stand-Alone systems)76xxxxxxx 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95 Table 2–5. System Assignments for Incoming Calls (Fixed-to-Mobile)Entry PERIPH MSN TID Call Type REDIR0 ISDN NO_ID\ 1 800103 Mobile AMBE1 Bonded NO_ID\ 1 800103 Mobile AMBE2 ISDN NO_ID\ 91 800124 Mobile aero 64k speech3 ISDN 10\ 51 800622 Mobile aero 64k UDI4 ISDN 11\ 52 800622 Mobile aero 64k UDI5 ISDN 12\ 53 800622 Mobile aero 64k UDI6 ISDN NO_ID\ 51 800622 Mobile aero 64k UDI7 Bonded NO_ID\ 51 800622 Mobile aero 64k UDI8 ISDN 20\ 61 800625 Mobile aero 64k audio 3.19 ISDN NO_ID\ 61 800625 Mobile aero 64k audio 3.110 Bonded NO_ID\ 61 800625 Mobile aero 64k audio 3.111 ISDN 30\ 71 800623 Mobile aero 56k UDI12 ISDN NO_ID\ 71 800623 Mobile aero 56k UDI13 Bonded NO_ID\ 71 800623 Mobile aero 56k UDI14 ISDN 40\ 91 800124 Mobile aero 64k speech15 Bonded NO_ID\ 91 800124 Mobile aero 64k speech16 ISDN 80 1 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV)17 ISDN 81 2 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV)18 ISDN 82 3 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV)19 ISDN 83 4 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV) Table 2–4. HSD Transceiver MSN Configuration TableForward ID Service Type IMN MSN
Page 2–1418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalC. Configuring System Parameters using the Maintenance Port Utility This section describes how to configure the system parameters for all modes and configurations of HSD operation, including: Stand-Alone Mode, Cooperative Mode, Honeywell Combined Mode, Selective Mode, and Multi-Channel Configurations.(1) Configuring System Parameters for Stand-Alone Mode This section describes how to use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility to configure the HSD system parameters for operation in Stand-Alone Mode.Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for detailed instructions on how to connect to and use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program. When all the required system parameters have been configured, “reset” or cycle the power on the HSD to activate the new configuration.To configure the required system parameters first establish a connection to the HSD Maintenance Port Utility program:• Connect a computer to the maintenance port of the HSD transceiver as described in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1, and then power up the system.• Using a terminal emulation program, open the HSD maintenance utility program.20 ISDN 84 5 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV)21 ISDN 85 6 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV)22 ISDN 86 7 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV)23 ISDN 87 8 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV)24 ISDN 88 9 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV)25 ISDN 89 A 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV)26 ISDN 90 B 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV)27 ISDN 91 C 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV)28 ISDN 92 D 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV)29 ISDN 93 E 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV)30 ISDN 94 F 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV)31 ISDN 95 10 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV) Table 2–5. System Assignments for Incoming Calls (Fixed-to-Mobile)Entry PERIPH MSN TID Call Type REDIR
Page 2–1518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal• Type the password maint. (The password does not appear on the screen.)The HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program Menu 1 appears. You are now ready to begin configuring the system parameters for Stand-Alone operation as described in the following sections.(a) Configuring the Terminal Category for Stand-Alone ModeThe factory default for the Terminal Category is configured to “2=HW Strapping.” If the HSD transceiver does not have the recommended hardware strapping for system configuration installed, the terminal category must be configured using the HSD Maintenance Port EEPROM parameters.To configure the Terminal Category: 1. In Menu 3, to select misc. EEPROM parameters press M.The Miscellaneous Parameters list appears. The available parameters may differ depending on the version of control processor software installed. 2. To select the Terminal Category, type 16 and then press Enter.The Terminal Category Menu appears. 3. Type 1 for Stand-Alone and then press Enter.A system message appears stating that the EEPROM has been updated. This completes the configuration of the terminal category. You now need to configure the LES Access Codes. MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.xL list EEPROM S list event logM misc. EEPROM parameter F list call log O list ORT P ocean region parameterI set all LES id’s<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reportsMISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 1 HPA-TO-ANTENNA TOTAL LOSS 11 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED 2 FORWARD ID 14 MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO 3 GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS 15 MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL 4 REGISTRATION REQ'D BEFORE CALLS 16 TERMINAL CATEGORY10 NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS 17 VIPER ANTENNA GAINTERMINAL CATEGORYWHICH PARAMETER # ? 16TERMINAL CATEGORY HW STRAPPED VALUE0=SAT906 1=STANDALONE 2=HW STRAPPING 3=MCS3000 4=MCS6000 5=MCS70006=MCS COMB 7=STANDALONE W/O ANTENNA 8=HCM COMBINED9=COOPERATIVE ROCKWELL-COLLINS SAT906 10=OLD COMBINED MODE DEVELOP11=HSD-X NETWORK 12=HSD-X NETWORK W/O ANTENNA 13=VIPERNEW TERMINAL CATEGORY = ? 1
Page 2–1618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(2) Configuring System Parameters for Cooperative Mode This section describes how to use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility to configure the HSD system parameters for operation in Cooperative Mode.Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for detailed instructions on how to connect to and use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program. When all the required system parameters have been configured, “reset” or cycle the power on the HSD to activate the new configuration.To configure the required system parameters first establish a connection to the HSD Maintenance Port Utility program:• Connect a computer to the maintenance port of the HSD transceiver as described in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1, and then power up the system.• Using a terminal emulation program, open the HSD maintenance utility program.• Type the password MAINT. (The password does not appear on the screen.)The HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program menus appear. You are now ready to begin configuring the system parameters for Cooperative Mode operation as described in the following sections.(a) Configuring the Terminal Category for Cooperative ModeIf the HSD transceiver does not have the recommended hardware strapping for system configuration installed, the terminal category must be configured using the HSD Maintenance Port EEPROM parameters.To configure the Terminal Category: 1. In Menu 3, to select misc. EEPROM parameters press M.The Miscellaneous Parameters list appears. The available parameters may differ depending on the version of control processor software installed. 2. To select the Terminal Category, type 16 and then press Enter.The Terminal Category Menu appears.MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.xL list EEPROM S list event logM misc. EEPROM parameter F list call log O list ORT P ocean region parameterI set all LES id’s<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reportsMISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 1 HPA-TO-ANTENNA TOTAL LOSS 11 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED 2 FORWARD ID 14 MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO 3 GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS 15 MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL 4 REGISTRATION REQ'D BEFORE CALLS 16 TERMINAL CATEGORY10 NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS 17 VIPER ANTENNA GAINWHICH PARAMETER # <CTRL> N for next page ? 16
Page 2–1718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 3. Type 9 for Cooperative Rockwell-Collins SAT-906 and then press Enter.A system message appears stating that the EEPROM has been updated. (b) Configuring the Number of Channel CardsHSD transceivers operating in Cooperative Mode must be configured as single-channel units—even if the unit is a dual-channel transceiver. To configure the transceiver as a Single Channel system: 1. In Menu 3, press M. 2. Type 10 to select the “Number of Channel Cards” parameter and then press Enter. 3. Type 1 for the number of channel cards and then press Enter.A system message appears stating that the EEPROM has been updated. This completes the configuration of the system’s number of channel cards. You now need to configure the LES Access Codes as described in "Configuring LES Access Codes (All Modes)" on page 2-24.(3) Configuring System Parameters for Honeywell Combined Mode To operate the HSD transceiver in Honeywell Combined Mode, you need to configure the following system parameters using the Honeywell SATCOM Direct Commissioning and Maintenance Terminal (CMT) and the HSD Maintenance Port Utility. To configure the Honeywell System Parameters: 1. First, use the Honeywell CMT to: • Obtain the HPA to antenna loss from the Honeywell SDU • Configure High Rate Data Support settings (recommended—but not mandatory) 2. Then use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility to: • Configure the Terminal Category (only required when the recommended hardware strapping is not used)• Set Swift64 (M4) and Aero service priorities• Change the LES Access Codes• Reset the system to activate the new configuration.TERMINAL CATEGORY HW STRAPPED VALUE0=SAT906 1=STANDALONE 2=HW STRAPPING 3=MCS3000 4=MCS6000 5=MCS70006=MCS COMB 7=STANDALONE W/O ANTENNA 8=HCM COMBINED9=COOPERATIVE ROCKWELL-COLLINS SAT906 10=OLD COMBINED MODE DEVELOP11=HSD-X NETWORK 12=HSD-X NETWORK W/O ANTENNA 13=VIPERNEW TERMINAL CATEGORY = ? 9
Page 2–1818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(a) Step One: Honeywell System ConfigurationUsing the Honeywell SATCOM Direct CMT, obtain the antenna loss parameter and configure the High Rate Data Support settings. The connection to the Honeywell SATCOM Direct CMT Port uses an RS-232 interface with any “VT-100” terminal emulator program. Configure your VT-100 terminal settings as follows: 9600 bps, no parity, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit. Refer to Honeywell provided documentation for more information. To configure the Honeywell System:1. Obtain the HPA to Antenna Loss Parameter ValueTo maximize system performance, adjust the HPA-to-Antenna Loss parameter within the HSD system to accommodate the HPA to antenna loss from the Honeywell SDU. • Using the Honeywell CMT, obtain the value of the HPA to antenna loss from the Honeywell SDU.• Record the HPA to antenna loss value for future reference. Typically, the value is between 1.5 dB and 2.5 dB. Enter this antenna-loss value into the HSD system configuration using the HSD transceiver’s Maintenance Port Utility Program.2. Configure the High Rate Data Support SettingsUsually, the High Rate Data Support parameters of the Honeywell SDU (Global Beam, High Rate Data and Spot Beam, High Rate Data) are configured to “DIS/EN” (disabled/enabled). Although not mandatory, setting both parameters to “disabled” is recommended.(b) Step Two: Configuring the HSD Transceiver for HCM ModeThis section describes how to use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility to configure the HSD system parameters for operation in HCM Mode.Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for detailed instructions on how to connect to and use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program. When all the required system parameters have been configured, the HSD must be “reset” to activate the new configuration. To configure the required system parameters first establish a connection to the HSD Maintenance Port Utility program:• Connect a computer to the maintenance port of the HSD transceiver as described in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1, and then power up the system.• Using a terminal emulation program, open the HSD maintenance utility program.• Type the password MAINT. (The password does not appear on the screen.)The HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program menus appear. You are now ready to begin configuring the system parameters for HCM operation as described in the following sections.
Page 2–1918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal1. Configuring the Terminal Category for Combined ModeIf the HSD transceiver does not have the recommended hardware strapping for system configuration installed, configure the terminal category using the HSD Maintenance Port EEPROM parameters as described in the following procedure.To configure the Terminal Category: 1. In Menu 3, to select misc. EEPROM parameters press M.The Miscellaneous Parameters list appears. The available parameters may differ depending on the version of control processor software installed. 2. To select the Terminal Category, type 16 and then press Enter.The Terminal Category Menu appears. 3. Type 8 for HCM Combined and then press Enter.A system message appears stating that the EEPROM has been updated. This completes the configuration of the terminal category. 2. Configuring Antenna LossTo configure the Antenna Loss: 1. In Menu 3, to select misc. EEPROM parameters, press M.The Miscellaneous Parameters list appears.MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.xL list EEPROM S list event logM misc. EEPROM parameter F list call log O list ORT P ocean region parameterI set all LES id’s<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reportsMISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 1 HPA-TO-ANTENNA TOTAL LOSS 11 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED 2 FORWARD ID 14 MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO 3 GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS 15 MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL 4 REGISTRATION REQ'D BEFORE CALLS 16 TERMINAL CATEGORY10 NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS 17 VIPER ANTENNA GAINWHICH PARAMETER # <CTRL> N for next page ? 16TERMINAL CATEGORY HW STRAPPED VALUE0=SAT906 1=STANDALONE 2=HW STRAPPING 3=MCS3000 4=MCS6000 5=MCS70006=MCS COMB 7=STANDALONE W/O ANTENNA 8=HCM COMBINED9=COOPERATIVE ROCKWELL-COLLINS SAT906 10=OLD COMBINED MODE DEVELOP11=HSD-X NETWORK 12=HSD-X NETWORK W/O ANTENNA 13=VIPERNEW TERMINAL CATEGORY = ? 8
Page 2–2018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 2. To select the HPA Antenna Cable Loss parameter, type 1 3. Press Enter.The current value for HPA to antenna cable loss appears. 4. Enter the “HPA to Antenna Cable Loss” value recorded from the Honeywell SDU, and then press Enter.Note: The loss refers to the total loss from the HPA to the antenna, including the coax cable and the DLNA insertion loss (typically 0.8 dB maximum).A system message appears stating that the EEPROM has been updated. This completes the configuration of the HPA to Antenna Cable Loss parameter. 3. Configuring Service PriorityThe HSD system can be configured to give priority to either Aero H or M4 (HCM HSD Swif64) communications. The system default gives priority to Aero H communications.If the HSD parameter is set to Aero priority, the SATCOM Aero H calls are given the priority for power consumption when HPA resources become limited. If the HSD parameter is set to M4 priority, M4 calls have priority when HPA resources become limited. To configure the Service Priority: 1. In Menu 3, press M for misc. EEPROM parameters.The Miscellaneous Parameters List appears.MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.xL list EEPROM S list event logM misc. EEPROM parameter F list call log O list ORT P ocean region parameterI set all LES id’s<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reportsMISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 1 HPA-TO-ANTENNA TOTAL LOSS 11 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED 2 FORWARD ID 14 MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO 3 GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS 15 MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL 4 REGISTRATION REQ'D BEFORE CALLS 16 TERMINAL CATEGORY10 NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS 17 VIPER ANTENNA GAINWHICH PARAMETER # <CTRL> N for next page ? 1HPA-ANTENNA CABLE LOSS 2.5 dB = ?
Page 2–2118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 2. To select HCM Aero/M4 Prioritization, type 42 and then press Enter.The system prompts you to select a service priority. 3. Set the service priority for the system as follows:• To select M4 services as the system priority, type 1 then press Enter.• To select Aero services as the system priority, type 0 (the number zero) then press Enter (as displayed in the example provided above).A system message appears stating that the EEPROM has been updated. This completes the configuration of service priority. You now need to configure the LES Access Codes.(4) Configuring System Parameters for Selective Mode This section describes how to use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility to configure the HSD system parameters for operation in Selective Mode.Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for detailed instructions on how to connect to and use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program. When all the required system parameters have been configured, “reset” or cycle the power on the HSD to activate the new configuration.To configure the required system parameters first establish a connection to the HSD Maintenance Port Utility program:• Connect a computer to the maintenance port of the HSD transceiver as described in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1, and then power up the system.• Using a terminal emulation program, open the HSD maintenance utility program.• Type the password MAINT. (The password does not appear on the screen.)MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS1 HPA-TO-ANTENNA TOTAL LOSS 11 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED2 FORWARD ID 14 MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO3 GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS 15 MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL4 REGISTRATION REQ'D BEFORE CALLS 16 TERMINAL CATEGORY10 NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS 17 VIPER ANTENNA GAINWHICH PARAMETER # <CTRL> N for next page ?18 VIPER HPA/ANT LOSS 31 OBEY OXCO STATUS24 RECEIVER CALIBRATION 42 HCM AERO/M4 PRIORITIZATION28 RX32 ACTIVE 45 CATEGORY B LOWER FREQUENCY LIMIT29 DEFAULT LATITUDE 46 CATEGORY B UPPER FREQUENCY LIMIT30 DEFAULT LONGITUDE…….WHICH PARAMETER #.? 42HCM AERO/M4 PRIORITIZATION AERO (1=M4 0=AERO) = ? 0 EEPROM UPDATED
Page 2–2218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalThe HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program menus appear. You are now ready to begin configuring the system parameters for Selective Mode operation as described in the following procedure.(a) Configuring the Terminal Category for Selective ModeIf the HSD transceiver does not have the recommended hardware strapping for system configuration installed, the terminal category must be configured using the HSD Maintenance Port EEPROM parameters.To configure the Terminal Category: 1. In Menu 3, to select misc. EEPROM parameters press M.The Miscellaneous Parameters list appears. The available parameters may differ depending on the version of control processor software installed. 2. To select the Terminal Category, type 16 and then press Enter.The Terminal Category Menu appears. 3. Type the appropriate terminal category number required Selective Mode (0, 3, 4, 5, or 6), and then press Enter.A system message appears stating that the EEPROM has been updated. This completes the configuration of the terminal category. You now need to configure the LES Access Codes as described on page 24.MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.xL list EEPROM S list event logM misc. EEPROM parameter F list call log O list ORT P ocean region parameterI set all LES id’s<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reportsMISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 1 HPA-TO-ANTENNA TOTAL LOSS 11 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED 2 FORWARD ID 14 MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO 3 GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS 15 MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL 4 REGISTRATION REQ'D BEFORE CALLS 16 TERMINAL CATEGORY10 NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS 17 VIPER ANTENNA GAINWHICH PARAMETER # <CTRL> N for next page ? 16TERMINAL CATEGORY HW STRAPPED VALUE0=SAT906 1=STANDALONE 2=HW STRAPPING 3=MCS3000 4=MCS6000 5=MCS70006=MCS COMB 7=STANDALONE W/O ANTENNA 8=HCM COMBINED9=COOPERATIVE ROCKWELL-COLLINS SAT906 10=OLD COMBINED MODE DEVELOP11=HSD-X NETWORK 12=HSD-X NETWORK W/O ANTENNA 13=VIPERNEW TERMINAL CATEGORY = ? 3
Page 2–2318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(5) Configuring System Parameters for Multi-Channel ConfigurationsThis section describes how to use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility to configure the HSD system parameters for operation in Multi-Channel Configurations.Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for detailed instructions on how to connect to and use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program. When all the required system parameters have been configured, “reset” or cycle the power on the HSD to activate the new configuration.To configure the required system parameters first establish a connection to the HSD Maintenance Port Utility program:• Connect a computer to the maintenance port of the HSD transceiver as described in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1, and then power up the system.• Using a terminal emulation program, open the HSD maintenance utility program.• Type the password MAINT. (The password does not appear on the screen.)The HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program Menu 1 appears. You are now ready to begin configuring the system parameters for Multi-Channel operation as described in the following sections.(a) Configuring the Terminal Category for Multi-Channel If the HSD transceiver does not have the recommended hardware strapping for system configuration installed, the terminal category must be configured using the HSD Maintenance Port EEPROM parameters.To configure the Terminal Category: 1. In Menu 3, to select misc. EEPROM parameters press M.The Miscellaneous Parameters list appears. The available parameters may differ depending on the version of control processor software installed. 2. To select the Terminal Category, type 16 and then press Enter.The Terminal Category Menu appears.MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.xL list EEPROM S list event logM misc. EEPROM parameter F list call log O list ORT P ocean region parameterI set all LES id’s<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reportsMISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 1 HPA-TO-ANTENNA TOTAL LOSS 11 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED 2 FORWARD ID 14 MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO 3 GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS 15 MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL 4 REGISTRATION REQ'D BEFORE CALLS 16 TERMINAL CATEGORY10 NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS 17 VIPER ANTENNA GAINWHICH PARAMETER # <CTRL> N for next page ? 16
Page 2–2418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 3. Type the appropriate terminal category number appropriate Multi-Channel Configuration (11, 12, or 13), and then press Enter.A system message appears stating that the EEPROM has been updated. This completes the configuration of the terminal category. You now need to configure the LES Access Codes.D. Configuring LES Access Codes (All Modes)This section describes how to configure the LES access codes provided by your Inmarsat service provider in HSD and HSD-X transceivers.Note: You can remove the label that covers the LES Access Codes LEDs once you have configured the LES Access Codes.(1) General Overview Inmarsat Service Providers (ISPs) operate Land Earth Stations (LES). The ISPs are typically public telephone companies of the country where the LES is located.Using satellite communications antennae and up-and-downlink communications equipment, the LES converts the space segment to a format compatible with public and private telephone and data networks. Each satellite is associated with a number of LES that fall within its coverage.Inmarsat assigns each LES an access code. These access codes are used by the Inmarsat system to route calls to the correct Ocean Region Satellite and LES. New and upgraded HSD units, with Control Processor software version 5.7 or later, are shipped with the factory default LES Access Codes set to ‘0’ (zero). All HSD units (including HSD-X units in Multi-Channel configurations) must be configured with the valid LES Access Codes provided by your Inmarsat Service Provider. (a) Changing Default LES using the HSD Maintenance Port Utility ProgramThe LES access codes can be configured using the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program accessed by connecting a computer running a VT100 terminal emulation program to the RS-232 Maintenance Port on the HSD (or HSD-X) transceivers (refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for connection settings and cabling information). The LES access codes for HSD-X transceivers can either be configured directly, through the HSD-X RS-232 Maintenance Port, or by “passing through” the HSD-128 by activating the console mode feature. (To activate console mode, in menu 18, press X). When configuring the LES access codes using the HSD Maintenance Port Utility, the application requests the input of a Secondary LES Access Code. At the time of writing, the Inmarsat LES have not implemented the recognition of the TERMINAL CATEGORY HW STRAPPED VALUE0=SAT906 1=STANDALONE 2=HW STRAPPING 3=MCS3000 4=MCS6000 5=MCS70006=MCS COMB 7=STANDALONE W/O ANTENNA 8=HCM COMBINED9=COOPERATIVE ROCKWELL-COLLINS SAT906 10=OLD COMBINED MODE DEVELOP11=HSD-X NETWORK 12=HSD-X NETWORK W/O ANTENNA 13=VIPERNEW TERMINAL CATEGORY = ? 11
Page 2–2518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminalsecondary LES value in their systems. However, a valid Secondary LES Access Code must be entered in the HSD system. The Secondary LES Access Code must be the same as the Primary LES Access Code. When operating HSD software version 5.7, DO NOT select the “Send line ends with line feeds” option in the terminal emulation program’s ASCII Setup. (See example dialog box presented in Figure 2–3.) If this ASCII Sending option is selected, the LES Access Code entered in Menu 3 using the “P” command codes will not be updated or saved to EEPROM. Figure 2–3. Terminal Emulation Program, ASCII SetupHSD transceivers with earlier versions of control processor software (5.4 or earlier) are set with a factory default LES access code of 001. When installing and commissioning the HSD transceiver, change the factory-set default LES for each Ocean Region to the LES access codes provided by your Inmarsat Service Provider.Table 2–6 provides LES access codes for the service providers providing Swift64 services at the time of publication. Contact Inmarsat directly for an up-to-date list of LES and Swift64 service providers. For more information visit Inmarsat’s Web site at www.inmarsat.com/swift64 or contact their Customer Care Service at:Telephone: +44 20 7728 1777 Fax: +44 20 7728 1142 E-mail: customer_care@inmarsat.com
Page 2–2618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalNote: *When using the LES code 001 for Telenor, calls are automatically routed to the appropriate service (either Swift64 LSV or Swift64 HSD, as defined by the OD/ID code of the call). No additional user action is required. Contact Inmarsat for an up-to-date listing of service providers. Contact your service provider for more information on the services they provide.(b) Equipment RequiredThe following equipment is required to change the default LES access code in an HSD system (HSD or HSD-X transceivers): • Computer (Laptop or PC)• Windows 95® or later (Window 2000® recommended)• HSD control processor software 4.1 or later• Terminal emulation program (e.g. HyperTerminal)(c) Connecting to the HSD Maintenance Port Connect a PC/laptop running a terminal emulation program (e.g., HyperTerminal) to the HSD maintenance port, and then power up the system. (Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for detailed connection information.) Table 2–6. Inmarsat Swift64 LES Status (As of January, 2004)Ocean RegionService Provider (LES)Global LES Access CodeService StatusAORE Stratos Mobile Networks (Satcom Direct)002 Swift64 – Low Speed Voice (LSV)/HSD (Secure LSV–future availability)AORE Xantic (Station 12) 012 Swift64 LSV/HSDAORE Telenor USA 001* Swift64 LSVAORW Stratos Mobile Networks (Satcom Direct)002 Swift64 – Low Speed Voice (LSV)/HSD (Secure LSV–future availability)AORW Xantic (Station 12) 012 Swift64 LSV/HSDAORW Telenor USA 001* Swift64 LSVIOR Stratos Mobile Networks (Satcom Direct)002 Swift64 – Low Speed Voice (LSV)/HSD (Secure LSV–future availability)IOR Xantic (Telstra) 022 Swift64 LSV/HSDIOR Telenor USA 001* Swift64 LSV/HSDPOR Stratos New Zealand(Satcom Direct)002 Swift64 – Low Speed Voice (LSV)/HSD (Secure LSV–future availability)POR Xantic (Telstra) 022 Swift64 LSV/HSDPOR Telenor USA 001* Swift64 LSV
Page 2–2718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(d) Changing LES access codes on a call-by-call basisThe following procedure provides detailed instructions in how to change the LES default access code for HSD and HSD-X transceivers. Note: This procedure provides instructions on how to change the HSD system default for LES selection. You can also change the LES code on a call-by-call basis using the dial code prefix 901 when troubleshooting and diagnosing network problems. To change the LES access code on a call-by-call basis in all control processor software versions:• Enter the following dial-sequence (Xantic POR LES Access Code (022) used as an example only): (e) Changing LES access codes using control processor software version 5.4 (and earlier)To change the HSD or HSD-X default LES access code in systems operating control processor software version 5.4 or earlier: 1. Connect a computer to the maintenance port of the HSD transceiver, and then power up system. 2. Using a terminal emulation program, open the HSD maintenance utility program. 3. Type the password MAINT. (The password will not appear on the screen.) 4. Press Ctrl+N (repeatedly) to scroll down to Menu 3.Menu 3 appears. 5. For miscellaneous EEPROM parameters, press M. The Miscellaneous Parameters list appears.901 + LES CODE + International Code + Country Code + Area Code + Telephone Number + #Example: 901 + 022 + 00 + 1+ 613+5551212 + #MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.xL list EEPROM S list event logE reset EEPROM C clear event logM misc. EEPROM parameter J ignored faultsN system serial number F list call logG clear call log<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports
Page 2–2818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 6. Type in the parameter number for the Ocean Region LES access code you want to change (i.e. 3, 21, 22, or 23), and then press Enter.The program prompts you to type in the LES access code. 7. Type in the Ocean Region LES access code, and then press Enter.Note: You may change one or all of the LES defaults. Each must be entered separately. Refer to Table 2–6 for access codes of the LES service providers available at the time of publication. Contact Inmarsat directly for the most up-to-date service provider and LES access code information. 8. In each parameter, enter a valid LES access code as needed.CAUTION: Do not change the Satellite Longitude parameter—press Enter to continue. 9. Reset the system. (In menu 2, press Z to reset the system, cycle the power to the HSD transceiver, or press the front panel “Test” button or the remote reset switch.)Note: To activate the new default LES code(s) reset the system. If you change the default LES code(s), but do not reset the system, the system uses the “original” or previous default LES code(s)—even though the “new” LES codes appear in the MENU 3 EEPROM Listing—the new codes are activated (or loaded) when the system is reset or the power is cycled. To confirm the activation of new LES access code after resetting the system: 1. In Menu 3, press L. 2. The EEPROM Listing appears. Confirm that the new LES access codes are displayed correctly. (See bolded parameters below.)MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 1 HPA-ANTENNA CABLE LOSS 18 AOR E VALID BEAMS 2 FORWARD ID 19 POR VALID BEAMS 3 AORW LES ACCESS CODE 20 IOR VALID BEAMS 4 TERRESTRIAL NETWORK ID 21 AORE LES ACCESS CODE 5 HPA-CHANNEL CARD CABLE LOSS 22 POR LES ACCESS CODE 6 MAX HPA GAIN 23 IOR LES ACCESS CODE 7 MIN ANTENNA GAIN 24 RECEIVER CALIBRATION (AERO) 8 MAX EIRP 25 MAX HPA POWER 9 MAX CHANNEL_CARD POWER 26 HPA RESERVED POWER (AERO)10 NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS 27 CHANNEL CARD STARTUP DELAY11 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED 28 RX32 ACTIVE12 RX ATTENUATION (LAND-ON-WINGS) 29 DEFAULT LATITUDE13 MIN SECS BETWEEN CHAN CARD RESETS 30 DEFAULT LONGITUDE14 MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO 31 OBEY OXCO STATUS15 MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL 32 CC DEBUG PORT16 TERMINAL CATEGORY 33 COMBINED MODE BACKOFF ADJUSTMENT17 AOR W VALID BEAMSWHICH PARAMETER # ?
Page 2–2918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (f) Changing LES access codes using control processor software version 5.7 (or later) To change individual LES access codes in systems operating software version 5.7 up to version 7.0:EEPROM LISTING: MAGIC NUMBER :OK EEPROM VERSION NUMBER 2001 FIRMWARE VERSION 1018SERIAL NUMBER: 114IGNORED FAULTS: 0HARDWARE CONFIG: 0 NUMBER OF POWERUPS (index 0) 13 HOURS OF OPERATION (index 0) 49MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERSHIT 'L' for MOREMISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERSHIT 'L' for MORE HPA-ANTENNA CABLE LOSS: 2.5 dB FORWARD ID: 000000 AORW LES ACCESS CODE: 1 TERRESTRIAL NETWORK ID: 0 HPA-CHANNEL CARD CABLE LOSS: 10.0 dB MAX HPA GAIN: 65.0 dB MIN ANTENNA GAIN: 11.0 dB MAX EIRP: 53.5 dBm MAX CHANNEL_CARD POWER: 0.0 dBm NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS : 2 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED: 1 RX ATTENUATION (LAND-ON-WINGS): 0.0 dB MIN SECS BETWEEN CHAN CARD RESETS: 300HIT 'L' for MORE MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO: 0 MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL: 0 TERMINAL CATEGORY: HW STRAPPED VALUE AOR W VALID BEAMS: 4 5 6 AOR E VALID BEAMS: 5 6 POR VALID BEAMS: 4 5 6 IOR VALID BEAMS: 5 6 AORE LES ACCESS CODE: 1 POR LES ACCESS CODE: 1 IOR LES ACCESS CODE: 1 RECEIVER CALIBRATION (AERO): 11.0 dB MAX HPA POWER: 18.0 dBw HPA RESERVED POWER (AERO): 16.0 dBwHIT 'L' for MORECHANNEL CARD STARTUP DELAY: 30 sec RX32 ACTIVE: 1 DEFAULT LATITUDE: 45 D 0' 0.0" N DEFAULT LONGITUDE: 75 D 0' 0.0" W OBEY OXCO STATUS: YES CC DEBUG PORT: NONE COMBINED MODE BACKOFF ADJUSTMENT: 10.0 dBCHECKSUM (stored at offset 462) 9695 OKlongest write cycle took 0 MSEC
Page 2–3018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 1. Connect to the HSD-128 Maintenance Port. 2. Type the password maint 3. In Menu 3, press P. 4. Follow the application prompts and enter the LES access codes for each Ocean Region as provided by your service provider. A valid LES ID (LES Access Code) must be entered for all Ocean Regions. A valid LES ID number must also be entered for the Secondary LES parameter; the same LES Access Code as the Primary LES Access Code must be used. Note: Although at the time of writing the Inmarsat LES have not yet implemented the recognition the Secondary LES Access Code parameter in their systems, the HSD requires that a valid LES Access Code for the Secondary LES is entered in the configuration. 5. Using the “Console Mode” function in Menu 18, access each HSD-X installed on the system and configure the LES access codes as described above.CAUTION: Do not change the Satellite Longitude parameter—press Enter to continue. (g) Changing LES access codes using control processor software version 7.0 (or later)To change all of the LES Access Codes simultaneously to the same LES Access Code—available in systems operating software version 7.0 or later: 1. Connect to the HSD-128 Maintenance Port. 2. Type the password maint. 3. In Menu 3, press I. 4. Follow the application prompts and enter the LES access code. The Menu 3, I command configures the Primary and Secondary LES Access Codes for all of the Ocean Regions to the same LES Access Code. Note: In cases where the Service Provider requires different LES Access Codes for different Ocean Regions, each LES Access Code must be programmed individually using Menu 3, item P. 5. Using the “Console Mode” function in Menu 18, access each HSD-X installed on the system and configure the LES access codes as described above.E. Removing the LED LabelA label covers the LES Access Codes LEDs. You can remove this label once you have configured the LES Access Codes.F. Activating ConfigurationsAfter configuring the HSD system parameters, the HSD and HSD-X transceivers must be reset using one of the following methods:•In Menu 2, press Z to reset the system;• Cycle the power to the HSD, and if applicable, HSD-X transceiver(s); or,
Page 2–3118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal• Press the reset or remote reset button on all HSD and HSD-X units installed in the system. (Not supported in Cooperative or Combined Mode systems.)When the “reset” or “restart” is completed, the configuration values and parameters are activated. Note: In Multi-Channel configurations, the application prompts the user to select the specific units to reset as shown in the example screen below. • Press Y (for yes) to reset the HSD-X.• Press Y (for yes) to reset the HSD.The configuration values and parameters are now activated. (1) Verifying ConfigurationsThis section describes how to verify or refer to the HSD system configuration parameters. To view the HSD ORT system configuration: 1. In Menu 3, press O.The List ORT appears. 2. Press O to scroll through the listing. To view the new system configurations select “List EEPROM” from Menu 3 1. In Menu 3, press L. 2. The List EEPROM appears. Press L to scroll through the listing. G. Configuring System Parameters using the HSD Owner Requirement ToolHSD transceivers operating version 7.0 (or later) control processor software and HSD-X transceivers operating control processor software 6.0, (or later) both support system configuration using the HSD ORT Tool (PN 1110-SW-1047). The HSD Owner Requirements Table (ORT) Tool application is available from EMS Technologies. Contact EMS SATCOM Product Support for more information.The ORT Tool is a Windows-based program that is used to create and change system configuration disks or files for the HSD system. The configuration data files, created using the ORT Tool, are either loaded into the HSD and HSD-X transceivers via the RS-232 maintenance port interface using an HSD load program or loaded using the self-extracting option of the HSD ORT application. MENU 2 FIRMWARE Vx.xA set veh-relative azimuth E set veh-relative elevationK desired az veh-rel velocity R resume automatic steeringT enter time of day N annotate log fileL re-enter logon password V get firmware versionsZ reset HSD-128 S set satellite longitude<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reportsTERMINAL: HSD-X NETWORK MODE HSD-X (y/n) [n] ? HSD (y/n) [n] ?
Page 2–3218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalThe ORT Tool allows users to customize certain user-defined parameters in the HSD system such as:• Satellite Data• Service Provider Information• LES Access Code selection • Ethernet Configuration parameters (including IP Address information)• Cable lossThe HSD ORT Tool has built-in help files that describe in detail the functionality of the tool. To access the help file, open the ORT Tool and click on Help.(1) Creating an ORT using the HSD ORT ToolThis section describes how to create an HSD ORT file that can be loaded on to an HSD/HSD-X transceiver for configuration purposes.Note: The ORT Tool and ORT procedures described in this document may differ from later versions of the ORT Tool. Click the ORT Tool Help button for up-to-date instructions.Note: The HSD ORT Tool is a Windows-based program. Save the program file to either your desktop or in the program files directory of your computer before beginning.To create an HSD ORT configuration file: 1. Double-click on the HSD ORT Tool Icon on your desktop or its filename in the appropriate directory on your computer. The HSD ORT Tool window appears.
Page 2–3318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 2. In the Part Numbers text boxes, type in a Customer PN (required) and Table PN (optional – default is ORT Table). Note: The Part Numbers are used to identify the ORT configuration file. The Customer PN is a required field because of ARINC Data Loader file requirements. If your organization does not require this information, fill in the field the Customer PN fields with any combination of numbers or letters. Note: The optional Table PN is a customer comment field displayed from within the equipment's maintenance menu; it is not a required field. 3. Click Satellite. The Satellite Information dialog box appears with system defaults showing in the satellite names and positions data fields.
Page 2–3418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 4. In the satellite-location-information text boxes (Ocean Region, Index, Location, and Mnemonic), modify the data for a satellite (AORE, AORW, IOR, and POR) as required. Note: In the Index text box, type in a unique number from 0 to 7. This index value references the selected satellite entry’s position with the unit’s tables. 5. In the Service Provider Information text boxes:• Leave the Terrestrial Network ID as the default value.Note: Terrestrial Network ID specifies which telephone network to use; at the time of printing, the Terrestrial Network ID is not required and must be left as the default value. • In the Primary HSD Service Provider text box type the valid LES access code of your primary Inmarsat Swift64 Service Provider.• In the Secondary HSD Service Provider text box, enter the same LES access code of your secondary Inmarsat Swift64 service provider. The Primary and Secondary HSD Service Provider ID codes must be identical. Note: In both the Primary and Secondary HSD Service Provider text box, enter a valid LES access code. Both the Primary and Secondary Service Provider fields may contain the same ID or LES access code as at the time of printing, the Inmarsat Network does not support Secondary Service Providers. 6. Modify the Satellite Information configuration by doing one of the following:• Click Add to create a new entry in the satellite list field.
Page 2–3518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal• Click Remove to delete selected satellite entries from the satellite list field.• Click Update to change the data values of a satellite selected from the existing list (the selected satellite appears highlighted). Note: If the required data fields are not completed correctly, an error message appears indicating incomplete or incorrect field entries. Follow the instructions provided in the system error messages and re-try the step. 7. Repeat steps for each satellite that requires new or revised data. 8. Click OK. You return to the main dialog box of the HSD ORT Tool. 9. Click Data I/O.The Data I/O Configuration dialog box appears. The Data I/O dialog box has two, tabbed property sheets: IP and PPPoE. 10. If applicable, select the Get IP Address Automatically check box.Note: If Get IP Address Automatically is selected, BASE IP Address and Network Mask data is not required. 11. If required, in the IP property sheet text boxes, enter the IP addressing information (Host Name, Base IP Address, and Network Mask) that applies to your system configuration. 12. If applicable, select the Allow Telnet check box. Note: Telnet provides remote monitoring and maintenance of devices using a password-protected, terminal-emulation-program session over TCP port 23 (the Telnet Port). Selecting the Allow Telnet check box enables remote access to the HSD using Telnet over the Ethernet port. Clearing the Allow Telnet check box disables this remote functionality.
Page 2–3618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 13. Click the PPPoE tab.The PPPoE property sheet appears. 14. In the AC-Name text box (Access Concentrator Name), type the name of the Access Concentrator used by the PPPoE client to differentiate between multiple PPPoE devices. Note: The “AC-Name” is the “name of the HSD unit’s Data I/O card” that is used to direct PPPoE communications to a specific Data I/O card of an HSD installed on a Local Area Network. When configuring Multi-Channel HSD systems, use the naming convention described in Table 2–7. The AC-Name is used to identify the Data I/O cards of HSD and HSD-X units installed on a Local Area Network. If the AC-Name text box is left blank, all of the installed HSD/HSD-X units will respond to a PC’s request for a connection. With each unit specifically identified by a unique AC-Name, connections are managed through the controlled distribution of connection requests. Using the AC-Name to identify each unit’s Data I/O card is particularly useful in the following reasons:• To direct communication traffic to a specific unit to leave the other units installed on the network free to handle different service types. For example, direct all MPDS traffic to a specific HSD-X unit so that the HSD transceiver channels are available for ISDN data or voice calls. • To specify the distribution of connections using the AC-Name, so that the connection requests are managed effectively to ensure faster and more efficient connection start ups. • In Multi-Channel HSD networks, to direct connection requests using the AC-Name identifier manages call requests so that multiple connection requests (from different computers on the network) are not sent simultaneously to the same unit, which could lead to call failure.
Page 2–3718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 15. Select or clear the LCP Filtering and Allow MPDS as default service check boxes as required. 16. In the Accessible through PPPoE field, select the appropriate service option (MPDS and ISDN, MPDS Only, None-disable, or ISDN Only). 17. Click OK.You return to the main screen of the HSD ORT Tool. 18. Click Installation.The Installation dialog box, Signal Loss tab sheet appears. 19. In the HSD-X to HSD text boxes, enter the Signal Loss values for each HSD-X unit installed in the HSD system. Note: The installer determines this value. Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for more information. 20. In the HSD-to Antenna Loss text box, enter the installation-specific HSD to Antenna Loss value.Note: The installer determines this value (minimum of 1 dB and maximum of 2.5 dB). 21. To exit the Installation dialog box and return to the main ORT Tool menu, click OK. Clicking OK applies the all changed or left as default values in the Installation dialog box, Signal Loss tab fields. Table 2–7. DATA I/O Naming Convention for AC-NameHSD HSD-X #1 HSD-X #2AC-Name DataIO (default) DataIO-1 DataIO-2
Page 2–3818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(2) Saving the ORT fileTo save the ORT file: 1. Click Save. A Save as dialog box appears.Note: Save a copy of the configuration file for back up and future reference. 2. In the File name text box, type the name of the configuration file. 3. Click Save. You return to the main screen of the HSD ORT Tool.(3) Loading the ORTTo create a disk to load the ORT: 1. Click Make Disk. Note: If the configuration file is incomplete or contains invalid data, an error message appears. If an error message appears: • Ensure that all required fields have valid data entered• Save the configuration file• Click Make Disk againThe Select contents dialog box appears. The Files to create area of the Select contents dialog box contains four file creation options. The Select contents dialog box also provides two options for creating files: basic ORT files and self-loading ORT files. All of the Select content options are described in Table 2–8.
Page 2–3918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalThe system prompts you to select a destination. 2. Select the appropriate destination to create the disk, and then click OK. The HSD ORT Tool creates the disk copy of the configuration file. A message appears confirming that the disk has been created successfully. 3. After completion of making the disk, click Exit to close the ORT Tool. After completing the configuration of the ORT, load the ORT disks to each HSD or HSD-X unit as described in the next section.(4) Loading ORT FilesThis section describes how to load both basic and self-loading ORT files. Table 2–8. Description of Select Contents Dialog Box OptionsOption DescriptionSelecting the HSD-X option creates an ORT file for HSD-X transceivers. The format of the basic file is HSDX.ORT. The format for a self-loading file is HSDXORT.exe.Selecting the HSD option creates an ORT file for HSD transceivers. The format of basic file is HSD.ORT. The format of a self-loading file is HSDORT.exe.Selecting the Installation option creates an ORT files containing the installation configuration information. This file is loading into the HSD transceiver only. The format of a basic installation file is INST.ORT. The format for a self-loading file is INSTORT.exe.Selecting the Embed Installation option includes the Installation configuration data in the HSD ORT file. Use this option to create a single, HSD ORT file that contains both the HSD ORT and Installation configuration files so that they do not have to be loaded separately.Selecting the Create basic ORT files option generates ORT files that are loading using the HSD Software Load Application, ADT_LOAD.exe (PN 1110-SW-1021). Selecting the Create self-loading ORT files option generates ORT files that are self-loading, executable files that contain the ORT configuration data.
Page 2–4018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(a) Loading Self-loading ORT FilesSelf-loading ORT files have the HSD software load application embedded in the file. Self-loading ORT files are executable. Opening the file executes the software load application. To load self-loading ORT configuration files onto an HSD or HSD-X unit: 1. Remove power from the system. 2. Connect a computer to the maintenance port of the HSD or HSD-X (Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for cabling and connection details.) 3. Turn on the computer. 4. Apply power to the unit. 5. Close all other applications running on the computer (especially programs that use the serial COM port, e.g. HyperTerminal). The ORT load program may not execute successfully if other programs are running. 6. Open the self-loading ORT configuration file.The ORT Loader application window appears. 7. To load the self-loading, ORT configuration files, follow the directions as indicated by the ORT Loader application.The ORT Loader application loads the software to the unit connected to the computer via the selected COM port. When the software load is complete, the window closes. (b) Loading Basic ORT FilesWhen loading a basic ORT file that does not have the self-loading application embedded, load the file using the HSD serial loader, ADT_LOAD.exe (PN 1110-SW-1021).Note: HSD ORT configuration files must be loaded into the HSD transceiver. HSD-X ORT configuration files must be loaded into each of the Multi-Channel HSD-X units installed on the system. The IP addresses are automatically incremented.To load basic ORT configuration files onto an HSD or HSD-X unit: 1. Remove power from the system. 2. Connect a computer to the maintenance port of the HSD or HSD-X (Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for cabling and connection details.) 3. Turn on the computer. 4. Apply power to the unit.
Page 2–4118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 5. Close all other applications running on the computer (especially programs that use the serial COM port, e.g. HyperTerminal). The load program may not execute successfully if other programs are running. 6. Start the HSD Software Load program (ADT_LOAD.exe) to launch the load program.A DOS window opens displaying the “Load Target” menu; it shows a number of load selection options. 7. From the “Which Target” menu:•Type “15” to load the ORT file to an HSD unit.•Type “16” to load the ORT file to an HSD-X unit. 8. Press Enter.The load application prompts you to type in a filename. 9. Type the appropriate filename for the software being loaded to the unit, and then press Enter.The application prompts you to select a COM port. 10. Select the COM port on your computer connected to the HSD. 11. Type the appropriate COM port (1 or 2—typically 1), and then press Enter. 12. To start the load, press Enter.Communication with the HSD transceiver is established. The following screen appears. A percentage (%) progress indicator appears on the screen showing load status. Once the load is complete, a confirmation message briefly appears on the screen indicating that the file has been successfully loaded. The DOS window then closes and the unit resets. HSD/HST LOADER Vx.x -- Mon Mar 24 12:12:17 2003which target ? 0 = control processor 1 = channel card #1 2 = channel card #2 3 = HPA application 4 = data i/o card 5 = HPA application with manual setup 6 = HPA application plus boot with manual setup 7 = HPA application plus boot 8 = channel card #1 boot code 9 = channel card #2 boot code 11 = channel card #1 pic code 12 = channel card #2 pic code 13 = HCM application 14 = HST ORT 15 – HSD ORT 16 – HSD-X ORT?
Page 2–4218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalHSD/HST LOADER Vx.x – [Date]which target ? 0 = control processor 1 = channel card #1 2 = channel card #2 3 = HPA application 4 = data i/o card 5 = HPA application with manual setup 6 = HPA application plus boot with manual setup 7 = HPA application plus boot 8 = channel card #1 boot code 9 = channel card #2 boot code 11 = channel card #1 pic code 12 = channel card #2 pic code 13 = HCM application 14 = HST ORT 15 = HSD ORT 16 = HSD-X ORT? File name which contains the firmware image? This download will require one of the PC's COM ports. (1, 2, etc) [1] ? Connect COM1 of this PC to the maintenance port of the data terminal.Hit <ESC> to abort, or <ENTER> to proceedEstablishing communication to the data terminal -- DO NOT CYCLE THE POWER!!Hit ESC to abort.DATA TERMINAL APPARENTLY READY TO ACCEPT PROGRAMswitching to 57.6 kbaudloading c:\ort\hsd.ort 67% 100%DATA TRANSFER COMPLETE -- 0 SECONDSdio state 1DATA TRANSMITTED: 1506 BYTES CHECKSUM = 13D9FHSD/HST LOADER Vx.x – [Date]
Page 2–4318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal4. Using the HSD SystemThis section describes how to place voice and fax calls using the ISDN interface of the HSD SATCOM system. A. Placing Voice and Fax CallsPlacing voice and fax calls using the HSD system are similar to placing an international telephone call or entering a telephone number for dial-up networking data calls. Like international telephone numbers, the HSD “dialing-number-sequence” includes different “routing” components or codes. Figure 2–4 illustrates the required order of the dialing components.Figure 2–4. HSD Dialing-Sequence ComponentsEach dialing sequence component serves a different routing function:• Dial Code Prefix:Use service-specific dial code prefixes when sending fax or using analogue modems, or for overriding system defaults to force the system to request a specific service type. The illustration uses the dial code prefix for 3.1 KHz audio service type (*82*). (See Table 2–9.)• International Access Code:The international access code for all airborne equipment is 00. However, when calling the aircraft during ground-to-air calls, use the international code of the ground location where the call is originating from.• Country Code:Public Switch Telephone Network (PSTN) number assigned to the country of your call destination. (Example: “1” is the Country Code for North America.)• Area Code (and City Code, if applicable):PSTN routing number assigned to the area (and if applicable, city) of your call destination.
Page 2–4418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal•# (SEND):Pressing # (or entering # at the phone number field on data devices) signals the system to “send” the call. Certain devices using the HSD system may not have the functionality to insert the # symbol at the end of the dialing sequence. For those devices, additional Dial Code Prefixes are required to override the “send” command requirement. Refer to Table 2–10 for more information.Note: For more information on using the HSD transceiver for voice and fax, refer to the HSD User Guide (MN-1110-10048).(1) Dial Code PrefixesAlthough the system automatically selects the appropriate service types on outgoing calls for ISDN devices, a Dial Code Prefix is required to send fax, identify an analogue modem, or force the system to override the system defaults to select a specific service type. (See Table 2–9.) The system requires the Dial Code Prefix *82* for sending fax or when using analogue modems; it forces the system to request the required 3.1 kHz audio service from the Inmarsat Satellite Communications Network. If required, use the Dial Code Prefixes to override the system defaults for selecting specific service types. Dial Code Prefixes for all service types require a “¿” before and after the code number.Other Dial Code Prefixes provide system overrides required if you are using either devices that cannot add a # symbol to the dialing string or devices that are slow dialing. Table 2–10 provides a description of the additional Dial Code Prefixes used for system overrides. Table 2–6 provides a list of the LES and their associated codes available. Table 2–9. Dial Code Prefixes for Forcing Service Type SelectionService Type Service DescriptionDial Code Prefix (Forces Service Selection)Speech 64 kbps High-Speed Voice *81*3.1 kHz audio Fax, Analogue Modem, STU-III *82*56 kbps data High-Speed Data *83*64 kbps data High-Speed Data *84*4.8 kbps speech Mini-M Voice (Swift64 Low Speed Voice)*80*
Page 2–4518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalNote: When using the System Override Dial-Code-Prefixes do not press “¿” before or after the Dial Code Prefix as with other dial code prefixes. (2) Mobile-to-Mobile CommunicationThe HSD provides a two-way link for mobile-to-mobile (aircraft-to-aircraft) communication. Using mobile-to-mobile calling requires additional information. You need to know the IMN of the device or service on the aircraft you are calling. If your service provider does not support Inmarsat’s Single Network Access Code (SNAC) 870, you also need to know which Satellite Ocean Region that the aircraft you are calling is logged on to. Table 2–11 lists the SNAC code and the Satellite Ocean Regions Region Numbers. Table 2–10. Dial Code Prefixes for System OverridesReason for Override Dial Code prefix Example Dialing SequenceUse this Dial Code Prefix to override the default LES configured in the system. This Dial Code Prefix signals the system to override the default LES and use the selected LES instead. (See Table 2–6.)901 + LES CODE901 + LES CODE + International Code + Country Code + Area Code + Telephone Number + #901 + 002 + 00 + 1+ 613 +5551212 + #Use with devices that cannot produce or add a “# “character to end the dialing sequence. This Dial Code Prefix signals the system to send the call after a specified delay in user input when the # symbol cannot be entered.902 902 + International Code + Country Code + Area Code + Telephone Number 902 + 00 + 1+ 613 + 5551212 Use with slow dialing devices that cannot produce or add a “# “character to end the dialing sequence. This Dial Code Prefix signals the system to send the call after a specified delay in user input.903 903 + International Code + Country Code + Area Code + Telephone Number 903 + 00 + 1+ 613 + 5551212 Table 2–11. Satellite Ocean Region CodesSatellite Ocean Region Ocean Region NumberSingle Network Access Code 870Atlantic Ocean Region East (AOR-E) 871Atlantic Ocean Region West (AOR-W) 874Pacific Ocean Region (POR) 872Indian Ocean Region (IOR) 873
Page 2–4618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalIf SNAC is unsupported, use the Ocean Regions Number that the aircraft (based on its projected flight path) is probably logged on to. If the call fails to connect to the aircraft, re-try the call using an alternate Ocean Region Number. Figure 2–5 illustrates the Mobile-to-Mobile dialing sequence.Figure 2–5. Mobile-to-Mobile Dialing SequenceB. Using Data ConnectionsThis section provides a basic overview of the requirements for making data connections using the HSD transceiver. Refer to the HSD Transceiver User’s Guide (MN-1110-10048) for detailed instructions on creating and configuring HSD dial-up networking connections.(1) Mobile ISDN versus MPDSDeciding which service type to use depends how you intend on using your data connections. For surfing the Web (with high turnover of pages and graphics), video conferencing, video streaming, and large file transfers, Mobile ISDN is faster and more efficient. However, service charges for Mobile ISDN are time-based (based on the length of your total connection time). MPDS provides a cost-effective solution for user applications that involve intermittent interaction or transmission of data, such as e-mail, database queries, and connectivity to IP/LAN and intranets.MPDS also has an “always on” advantage over Mobile ISDN. Service charges for MPDS are based on the number of data bits transmitted over the system—not on the length of your connection time.(2) Connecting to Inmarsat Mobile ISDN ServiceThe transmission of data over satellite networks differs from land-based ISDN applications. Factors inherent in satellite communications (signal fading, latency, and transmission blockages) can cause data transit delays and bit errors.
Page 2–4718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalBecause of these challenges, it is sometimes necessary to optimize the system to achieve peak performance over the satellite network.ISDN protocols are not designed specifically for use over satellite communication networks. To improve data transfer rates most ISDN protocols require minor adjustments. For best results, consider how the ISDN protocol you intend to use sends data over the network. Adjust the configuration taking into account the unique operating environment of satellite network communication.As examples, consider the protocols TCP/IP (over PPP) and V.120. As a basic protocol, PPP operates under the networking protocol TCP/IP. PPP has error checking properties but does not offer flow control. TCP/IP is flexible and designed to run over different networks—including the Internet (which like satellite networks experiences high transit delays). When used together, PPP and TCP/IP protocols perform well over the Inmarsat network. Improve the performance of TCP/IP (over PPP) for Mobile ISDN by changing the default parameters. Increase the maximum size of data allowed in transit at one time to a value up to approximately 255,552 bytes.The protocol V.120 includes error correction and flow control applications. Flow control limits the amount of data that can be in transit at any one time and waits for acknowledgment of receipt from the other end of the connection before sending more data. The default parameters of V.120 limit the maximum transit size of the data package to approximately 1764 bytes—causing poor performance results over satellite ISDN networks. Improve the performance of V.120 over Mobile ISDN by changing the default parameters. Increase the maximum size of data allowed in transit at one time to a value up to approximately 8000 bytes. (Some applications of V.120 permit the user to change the “window size”.)When choosing an ISDN protocol for satellite ISDN networks, consider a flexible solution that allows for modifications to the operating parameters to suit the unique environment of satellite communications.Both the HSD ISDN and Ethernet interfaces support connections to Inmarsat’s Mobile ISDN service. Ethernet is available for HSD transceivers, PNs 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 and HSD transceivers with Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished. All HSD-X transceivers support the Ethernet interface. (a) Using the ISDN InterfaceThe basic requirements for using the HSD ISDN interface to access Swift64 Mobile ISDN services over the satellite network are listed below:• A EURO ISDN terminal adapter or router • An account with an Inmarsat Service Provider• A computer • Dial-up Networking capabilitiesThe following sections describe the three main components required for Swift64 Mobile ISDN service using the ISDN interface (terminal adapters – ISDN modems, ISDN protocols, and ISDN line).
Page 2–4818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal1. Terminal Adapters—ISDN ModemTerminal adapters are ISDN devices that function similarly to a modem; they dial and answer calls, and receive and transmit data. They are also referred to as TA’s, ISDN cards, or ISDN modems. Note: The HSD works with Euro S/T ISDN terminal adapters. Inmarsat Swift64 Mobile ISDN service and the HSD do not support the North American ISDN variant.2. ISDN ProtocolsTerminal adapters use ISDN protocols to format data between the ISDN line and the user’s computer. The HSD supports most ISDN protocols that run over a B channel on an ISDN line; however, it does not actually implement any of these protocols. The operating system of the user’s computer implements the protocols.3. ISDN LineThis ISDN satellite link acts similarly to ISDN landline providing the same service, but it supports only a single B channel and emulates the D channel. The B channel transmits data the same as an ISDN landline; it sends data at 64 kbps with full duplex. The MES translates the 16 kbps D Channel into an Inmarsat Mobile ISDN signaling system. Despite the differences between landline ISDN and the Inmarsat Mobile ISDN link, most ISDN applications run successfully over the Inmarsat network. (b) Using the Ethernet Interface for Inmarsat Mobile ISDNHSD transceivers with a Data I/O Type 2 Card (PNs 1110-A-0150, 1110-A-0160 and HSD transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished) and all HSD-X transceiver extensions support the Ethernet interface. The basic requirements for using the HSD Ethernet interface to access Swift64 Mobile ISDN services over the satellite network are listed below: • A PPPoE compatible router—optional devices (e.g. routers) must be PPPoE compatible• An account with an Inmarsat Service Provider• A computer with PPPoE driver installed—a PPPoE driver is the protocol most commonly used by Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) devices; it establishes the connection of the session and the exchanges of PPP frames over Ethernet.• Dial-up Networking capabilities(3) Connecting to Inmarsat MPDS The connection requirements for MPDS service over the satellite network differ depending on whether you access the system through an Asynchronous Serial (RS-232) or Ethernet (10BASE-T) physical connection.(a) Using the RS-232 InterfaceTo make an MPDS connection using the HSD RS-232 port requires the following:
Page 2–4918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal• An RS-232 cable (Asynchronous Serial)• An activated account with an Inmarsat Service Provider that supports MPDS services• A computer with an available COM port• Dial-up Networking capabilitiesWhen operating MPDS over the RS-232 port, no external connecting devices are required. The channel card in the HSD acts as a “modem” and responds to modem “AT” commands. In order to make an MPDS over RS-232 connection, you need to select a standard modem on your computer to direct the data traffic to the PC COM port connected to the RS-232 MPDS port on the HSD.(b) Using the Ethernet Interface HSD transceivers with a Data I/O Type 2 Card (PNs 1110-A-0150, 1110-A-0160 and HSD transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished) and all HSD-X transceiver extensions support the Ethernet interface. Connections using MPDS over the HSD Ethernet port require the following:• A Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) driver installed—a PPPoE driver is the protocol most commonly used by Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) devices; it establishes the connection of the session and the exchanges of PPP frames over Ethernet. • An activated account with an Inmarsat Service Provider that supports MPDS services• A computer with an Ethernet port• Dial-up Networking capabilities/Web browser• Optional devices (e.g. router) must be PPPoE compatible(c) Optimizing the System for MPDSTo optimize your system for MPDS:• Reduce the amount of unnecessary traffic. Ensure that the router configuration disables unnecessary Local Area Network (LAN) messages.• Increase the window size in TCP/IP. • Use DNS caching and Web caching. When using DNS and Web caching, the server only retrieves from the Internet IP addresses and Web pages not stored in the server cache.Note: DNS caching and Web caching is effective when using a LAN configuration on the aircraft. For stand-alone computers, use a personal Web browser cache.To optimize your e-mail client when using MPDS:• Compress attachments (zip files)• Under Tools, in the Options of your e-mail client (e.g. Outlook®, Eudora®) customize the settings for MPDS based on the recommendations below:
Page 2–5018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal• Disable the read receipt option • Send messages in text format not in HTML format and disable signatures to reduce message size• Disable the “automatic download of message when in viewing panel” feature• Increase the time period for automatic mail checks to reduce traffic• Use IMAP4 mail protocol to allow for header retrieval onlyNote: Disable the “Save copy of send messages in the ‘Sent Items’ folder” option.(4) Bonding Channel Cards in Two-Channel Card SystemsThis section provides, as an example, detailed instructions on how to make bonded calls with a two-channel card HSD transceiver using a DIVA T/A ISDN modem.Bonded calls are possible with HSD transceivers that have two channel cards installed. Bonded calls utilize both 64 kbps channels to provide a single 128 kbps data channel. The terminal adapter or router places two separate calls to combine the data transfer over both channels.Although bonded calls provide a single 128 kbps channel, the actual link capacity is application and protocol dependant. Throughput on a Multilink PPP TCP/IP connection is typically 80 to 90 % of the link capacity (running Windows 2000®).The system can only make internally bonded calls if both channels are available. If another device is using one of the B Channels, then the data call proceeds—but as a single channel call. If a bonded call is in progress, (using both B channels) the system is busy and denies all other calls until a channel is free.In Multi-Channel configurations, the HSD transceiver channel cards cannot be internally bonded together with the HSD-X channel cards installed on the system; however, a Multi-Channel configuration, that includes an HSD-128 and two HSD-X extensions, is capable of up to 256 kbps data throughput—with the help of an external device such as a router or Ethernet hub.(a) Bonding HSD Channel Cards using the ISDN InterfaceIf the HSD Transceiver has two channel cards, bonded calls provide the potential for higher throughput. For bonded calls, configure the terminal adapter and connections to use Multilink PPP as the protocol. Note: Not all Internet service providers support Multi-link PPP. Contact your service provider for more information. If a bonded call is in progress, (using both B channels) the system is busy and denies all other calls until a channel is free.
Page 2–5118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalThe following is an example of a configuration for bonded calls using a DIVA T/A for illustration purposes only. Other manufacturers’ terminal adapters may require different or more complex configurations to configure the system for bonded calls. 1. Using HyperTerminal, connect to the Terminal Adapter EURO ISDN modem. 2. Type AT@MENU.The following screen appears. 3. In the protocol field, select Multilink PPP.The protocol field now shows Multilink PPP as the selected protocol.
Page 2–5218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 4. When prompted, select “yes” to save the profile and then reboot your computer. 5. Using the AT@ MENU command, confirm the settings are correct. The Terminal Adapter is now configured to place bonded Multilink calls. Note: If you are dialing a EURO ISDN phone number or a North American ISDN number that has a “HUNT” group assigned, then no changes are required to the Dial-up networking setup of the user’s computer. The following screen illustrates a dial-up networking connection with a “HUNT” group assigned. If a “HUNT” group number is not available, other phone numbers may be used.
Page 2–5318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalNote: If you are dialing a North American ISDN number, both Service Profile Identifier ISDN (SPID) numbers must be included in the dial-up networking connection to place Multilink calls. To configure the dial-up connection to include both SPID numbers, type in both numbers separated by the “&” symbol. The following screen illustrates the configuration of a Multilink connection to a North American number.
Page 2–5418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(b) Bonding Channel Cards using the Ethernet Interface for Mobile ISDN ServiceHSD transceivers with a Data I/O Type 2 Card (PNs 1110-A-0150, 1110-A-0160 and HSD transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished) support the bonding of two channel cards using the HSD Ethernet interface to access Swift64 Mobile ISDN.
Page 2–5518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalTo access Swift64 Mobile ISDN services over the Ethernet interface using a bonded two-channel-card connection 1. Create a new dial-up networking connection for two-channel Ethernet ISDN. 2. Double-click on the connection and select properties.The PPPoE Properties Dialog box appears.
Page 2–5618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 3. From the Connect using list, select both available ISDN channels. 4. Select All devices call the same number. 5. Click Configure.The ISDN Configure dialog box appears. 6. Select 64K Digital as the Line type. 7. Select Negotiate line type. 8. Click OK.
Page 2–5718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 9. Click on the Options tab. The Options tab sheet appears. 10. From the Multiple Devices list select Dial all devices and then click OK. (Display progress while connecting and Prompt for name and password, certificate, etc, and Redialing options are optional.) 11. Click the Security tab. 12. In Security options, select Typical recommended settings and Allow unsecured password. 13. Click OK.
Page 2–5818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 14. Click the Networking tab.The Networking tab sheet appears.
Page 2–5918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 15. Select the Internet Protocol TCP/IP. 16. Click Properties.The Internet Protocol dialog box appears.
Page 2–6018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 17. Select “Obtain an IP address automatically” and “Obtain DNS address automatically”, and then click OK. This completes the creation of the new bonded connection for Mobile ISDN using the Ethernet interface. Before using the connection, you need to configure the Local Area Connection properties.
Page 2–6118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalTo Configure the Local Area Connection Properties for Bonding (PPPoE): 1. In Network and Dial-up Connections, double-click on Local Area Connection.The Local Area Connection Status dialog box appears. 2. Click Properties.The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box appears.
Page 2–6218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 3. Select PPP over Ethernet Protocol and then click Properties.The PPP over Ethernet Protocol Properties dialog box appears.
Page 2–6318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 4. On the General tab sheet, select “2” for the Number of lines (WAN endpoints).This completes the connection configuration for the two-channel Swift64 Mobile ISDN over Ethernet connection. The connection is ready to use.
Page 2–6418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal
Page 3–118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalINSTALLATION1. IntroductionThis section provides general information and procedures required to install HSD transceivers and HSD-X transceivers in Multi-Channel configurations on an aircraft. Mode-specific installation instructions are provided in separate installation sections. The organization of the installation information provided in this section is described below:•General InstallationThis section provides general installation information that applies to all modes and configurations of HSD and HSD-X systems, including pre-installation instructions, general cabling and connector requirements, information on installation kits, and physical placement considerations.•Section I: Stand-Alone Mode InstallationThis section provides installation information specific to Stand-Alone Mode HSD transceiver system configurations.•Section II: Combined Mode (HCM)/Selective Mode InstallationThis section provides installation information specific to Combined Mode and Selective Mode HSD transceiver system configurations.•Section III: Cooperative Mode InstallationThis section provides installation information specific to Cooperative Mode HSD transceiver system configurations.•Section IV: Multi-Channel Configuration InstallationThis section provides installation information specific to Multi-Channel HSD transceiver system configurations that includes the installation of HSD-X transceiver extension units.If installation assistance is required, contact EMS SATCOM Product Support at the telephone or fax numbers listed in the front matter of this manual.
Page 3–218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal2. AdvisoriesBefore performing any installation procedures, read the safety advisories listed in "Introduction" on page TC-1.
Page 3–318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal3. Pre-Installation InspectionBefore installing any HSD equipment, conduct a pre-installation inspection of all parts to ensure that no damage occurred during transit.
Page 3–418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal4. Unpacking and Inspecting Equipment• Unpack the HSD/HSD-X transceiver(s) from their shipping containers. • Verify that the part number displayed on the shipping box and equipment component matches the model and part number ordered. If components are missing from the shipment, contact EMS Technologies immediately and report the problem.• Visually inspect the unit for any shipping damage. If any shipping damage has occurred, contact the shipping carrier immediately and report the problem.• Check the HSD/HSD-X transceiver connectors for corrosion and damage. If damage is noted, do not apply power to the unit. Report any damage to EMS SATCOM immediately.
Page 3–518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal5. Cabling and Connector RequirementsThis section provides general electrical installation information on power, ground, shielding requirements, and cabling that applies to all installation modes for HSD and HSD-X transceivers. A. Power RequirementsThe aircraft power supply provides power to the HSD transceiver. This power supply must be +28 V dc nominal for models PN 1110-A-0001, 1110-A-0160, and 1110-A-0080. For HSD models, PN 1110-A-0060, 1110-A-0150, and PN 1110-A-0070, and HSD-X model PN 1110-A-0401, the power supply must be at 115 V ac, 400 Hz (nominal). The breaker rating for the HSD assembly is based on power consumption details provided in Table 1 Variants of Outline and Installation Diagram (1110-E-0001) presented in 225. The power requirements for the HSD-X transceiver are listed in the notes on the HSD-X Outline and Installation Diagram.B. Ground RequirementsImproper grounding can potentially lead to ground loops and induced Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) or Radio Frequency Interference (RFI). When installing an HSD or HSD-X transceiver, follow standard grounding practices for both chassis and cabling shields.C. Cable Shielding and Termination The preferred method of cable shield termination is in accordance with NEMA WC 27500:2000 and ARINC 741. ARINC Report 413A – Guidance for Aircraft Electrical Power Utilization and Transient Protection provides more detailed information in Attachment 3-2, Wire Shielding and Grounding Requirements and in Appendix 7.Unless otherwise stated, all cable shields must be connected to the closest aircraft ground at both ends of the cable as well as on both sides on any production break in the cable. Where applicable, terminate shields with connectors via the backshell or via a pigtail with a suitable termination to the closest aircraft ground. General aviation cable-routing guidelines apply. Refer to Table 3–1 for detailed information.Note: Typically, Ethernet and ISDN cable has multiple shields; terminate each shield separately. Table 3–1. Cable Shielding and Termination SpecificationsCable Function Conductor Type (Typical) Single PointMultiple PointMinimum Conductor Coverage by ShieldPower Lines Single conductor, stranded N/A N/A N/ADigital Control Twisted pair, stranded Yes 85%Serial Data Twisted pair, stranded Yes 85%Ethernet Data Twisted pair, stranded Yes 85%
Page 3–618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalISDN Data Twisted pair, stranded Yes 85%Discrete Lines Single conductor, stranded N/A N/A N/ARF TX and RX Coaxial Yes 95%Definitions:Single Point: Cable shield terminated at one end only—via a connector or suitable crimp terminal.Multiple Point: Cable shield terminated at both ends via a connector or suitable crimp terminal, usually at both ends of the cable—and at both side of any production break.N/A: Not applicable. Table 3–1. Cable Shielding and Termination SpecificationsCable Function Conductor Type (Typical) Single PointMultiple PointMinimum Conductor Coverage by Shield
Page 3–718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal6. ARINC 600 Trays and ConnectorsThis section provides detailed information on the ARINC 600 trays provided in the HSD Installation Kits that are used in the installation of the HSD and HSD-X transceivers.The HSD LRU is installed in a standard, ARINC 600, 8-MCU tray. Ruggedized trays designed specifically for installations on Helicopter aircraft are also available. The HSD-X LRU is typically installed in a standard, 2-MCU tray. Ruggedized trays designed specifically for installations on Helicopter aircraft are also available. A. Installation KitsInstallation kits for HSD and HSD-X transceivers are available from EMS Technologies Ltd. Contact EMS Technologies Sales department for more information on how to select and order the appropriate HSD Installation Kit. Table 3–2 lists the recommended installation kits for typical installations. Table 3–2. HSD and HSD-X Installation KitsInstallation Kit NameEMS SATCOM Part Number DescriptionHSD Installation Kit AC FAN1110-F-0120-01 Standard Installation Kit: Bottom AC Fan Tray Assembly and ARINC Connector (Un-pressurized Installation)HSD Installation Kit DC FAN1110-F-0120-02 Standard Installation Kit: Bottom DC Fan Tray Assembly and ARINC Connector (Un-pressurized Installation)HSD Installation Kit HELICOPTER AC FAN1110-F-0120-03 Helicopter Installation Kit: Side AC Fan Tray Assembly and ARINC ConnectorHSD-X Installation Kit AC FAN1110-F-0121-01 Standard Installation Kit: Fan Tray Assembly with Bottom AC Fan and ARINC ConnectorsHSD-X Installation Kit NO FAN1110-F-0121-02 Standard Installation Kit: Tray Assembly and ARINC Connectors (No Fan)HSD-X Installation Kit HELICOPTER NO FAN1110-F-0121-03 Helicopter Installation Kit: Tray Assembly with Isolators and ARINC Connectors (No Fan)HSD/HSD-X COAX Cable Kit1110-K-0122 Multi-Channel RF COAX Kit: Tx and Rx Cables (33ft), Combiners, Splitters, Isolators, and HSD-X Cables
Page 3–818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalB. Cabling NotesBefore proceeding with the installation of the HSD transceiver, read all cabling notes provided on the HSD System Interconnection Diagram for the applicable HSD system operational mode.(1) HSD Transceiver CablingWhen installing the HSD transceiver, follow the cabling requirements listed below:• Maximum recommended cable length should not exceed 50 feet. • LAN cables must meet flammability, TIA/EIA568-A CAT 5 requirements, and conform to ARINC 628 specifications. • Wire size recommendations:• For +28 V dc HOT (BP2), +28 V dc RTN GND (BP3), 115 V ac COLD (BP7), and Chassis GND (BP8), use 12 AWG• For 115 V ac HOT (BP1), use 20 AWG• Unless otherwise specified, for signaling use 22 AWG wire.(2) HSD-X Transceiver CablingWhen installing the HSD-X transceiver in Multi-Channel Configurations, follow the cabling requirements listed below:• For 115 V ac HOT (BP2), use 20 AWG• For 115 V ac COLD (BP4), use 20 AWG • Chassis GND (BP3), use 14 AWG(3) HSD Transceiver Coaxial Cable Loss ConsiderationsWhen installing HSD transceivers, consider the following coaxial cable loss requirements:•Transmit cable: Maximum loss is 2.5 dB including DLNA (typically <0.8 dB) as per ARINC 741. In installations that use a high power relay, the high power relay loss must be included.•Receive cable: For HSD transceivers operating in Stand-Alone, Cooperative, and Combined Mode installations, the minimum loss is 6 – 25 dB (including any in-line attenuator) as per ARINC 74. For HSD-128 and HSD-X transceivers installed in Multi-Channel Configurations, the minimum loss is 0 – 19 dB (including cables and splitters).
Page 3–918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal7. Mechanical InstallationThis section describes the mechanical installation requirements for the HSD and HSD-X units. The outline and installation drawings for both transceivers are provided at the end of this section. A. GeneralThis section contains the information required to plan the physical placement of the HSD and HSD-X (Multi-Channel configurations only) transceivers. The HSD Transceiver Outline and Illustration Drawing (Sheet 1 and 2) illustrates the physical and mechanical specifications of the HSD transceiver. The HSD-X Transceiver Outline and Illustration Drawing (Sheet 1 and 2) illustrates the physical and mechanical specifications of the HSD-X transceiver.In typical aircraft installations, the HSD assembly fits into standard ARINC, 8-MCU mounting trays. HSD-X units fit into standard, 2-MCU mounting trays. Specialized trays, that meet the requirements for installations of both the HSD and HSD-X units on Helicopters, are also available from EMS SATCOM. All HSD ARINC installation trays are included in the HSD and HSD-X Installation Kits that are available from EMS Technologies Ltd. Section Installation Kits describes the HSD and HSD-X Installation Kits available from EMS SATCOM.B. Physical PlacementWhen selecting a placement location for the HSD, and if applicable, HSD-X mounting trays, allow for adequate spacing for the installation of the HSD assembly while providing reasonable access for servicing. Leave a minimum gap of 0.5 inches between LRUs. In Multi-Channel configurations, after wiring the tray(s) for HSD-X units, populate the trays in order, starting from the first-in-line tray that is directly connected to the HSD-128 transceiver. The second HSD-X tray is connected to the first HSD-X tray as shown in Figure 3–1. HSD-X trays are strapped to index the HSD-X units to read the appropriate ARINC messages on the crosstalk bus (communications bus).If an HSD-X must be removed for service, the Multi-Channel HSD system will still function, but the remaining HSD-X units must be moved so that no empty trays are in the middle of the series or chain. Refer to "Maintenance and Repair" on page 5-1 for more information.
Page 3–1018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–1. HSD-X Physical Placement RequirementsC. Environmental RequirementsThe environmental requirements that must be considered during the physical placement of the HSD and HSD-X transceivers are based on the RTCA/DO-160D Environmental Specifications detailed in "System Description" on page 1-1.The standard mounting trays for the HSD and HSD-X offer a number of fan configuration options depending on the physical placement of the LRU in the aircraft. (1) Heating and CoolingRefer to "System Description" on page 1-1 for a complete listing of the RTCA/DO-160D Environmental Specifications for the HSD and HSD-X transceivers. (a) HSD TransceiversWhen selecting an installation location for the HSD transceiver, consider the heating and cooling requirements listed below:• Power Dissipation (DC models): 275 Watts nominal, 370 Watts maximum• Power Dissipation (AC models): 275 Watts nominal, 385 Watts maximum• Cooling Air: per ARINC 600• Recommended Flow rate: 175 lbs/hr• Pressure drop: 0.05”, ± 0.025” H2O(b) HSD-X TransceiversWhen selecting an installation location for the HSD-X transceiver, consider the heating and cooling requirements listed below:• Power Dissipation: 34 Watts• Cooling Air: per ARINC 600• Recommended Flow rate: 15.5 lbs/hr• Pressure drop: 0.044”, ± 0.025” H2O
Page 3–1118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(c) HSD Fan Tray RequirementsWARNING: Failure to install and configure the fan tray assembly as instructed may seriously compromise the HSD’s extreme temperature operation.Fan tray assemblies may be shipped with or without hole-plug-buttons installed. For adequate airflow to the HSD subassemblies, the plugs must be installed or removed in the fan/tray configuration as illustrated in Figure 3–2. Installed plugs are shown in black, and removed plugs are shown in white.Figure 3–2. Fan Tray Plug ConfigurationD. Chassis GroundingThe HSD and HSD-X tray-mounted assemblies must be electrically bonded to the airframe. Ensure the mating surfaces are free from contaminants such as paints or other non-conductive elements. Where surface preparations are insufficient to ensure a proper bond, the use of a short, tin-coated, copper bonding strap of at least 1/4 inch wide is recommended. The LRU and tray assemblies should provide a low impedance path of <0.2 ohms.
Page 3–1218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal8. Electrical InstallationThis section provides mode-specific installation details for HSD and HSD-X transceivers. This section is divided into sub-sections that provide the electrical installation requirements for the different modes of operation. The sub-sections are presented as follows:•Section I: Stand-Alone Mode InstallationThis section provides installation requirements for HSD transceivers operating in Stand-Alone Mode.•Section II: Combined Mode (HCM)/Selective Mode InstallationThis section provides installation requirements for HSD transceivers operating in Combined Mode (Honeywell Combined Mode) and Selective Mode. Selective Mode is a non-standard installation and it is not a recommended mode of operation. Selective Mode has been superseded by Combined Mode operation for MCS series SATCOM and with Cooperative Mode operation for SAT-906 series SATCOM. It is recommended that all systems operating in Selective Mode be upgraded to support Combined or Cooperative Mode as applicable.•Section III: Cooperative Mode InstallationThis section provides installation requirements for HSD transceivers operating in Cooperative Mode.•Section IV: Multi-Channel Configuration InstallationThis section provides installation requirements for HSD transceivers operating in Multi-Channel Configurations with HSD-X transceiver extension units.A. Section I: Stand-Alone Mode Installation(1) Stand-Alone Mode Installations Wiring NotesThis section provides detailed information on the external interface and system connections involved in the installation of an HSD transceiver for Stand-Alone Mode operation.(a) Source/Destination Identification (SDI) – Stand-AloneSource/Destination Identification (SDI) is provided for the BSU and the HPA as per ARINC 741 specifications. Pins marked “0” are left open-circuit and pins marked “1” are strapped on the airframe side of the connector to the pin assigned as “SDI Common” (TP5D). For this High Gain Antenna (HGA) HPA application, pin TP5B (“1”) should be strapped and TP5A (“0”) should be left open.Note: The logic for the SDI/WOW is explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. This SDI/WOW logic as applied according to the ARINC specification, where 0=open and 1=strapped to common, is the reverse of the logic applied to all other HSD and HSD-X connectors, Forward ID, System Config, and Data I/O Config , where 0=strapped to common and 1=open. (b) Maintenance Port Interface – Stand-AloneThe HSD transceiver has an RS-232 Maintenance Port interface that provides access to a maintenance utility program for data loading, system monitoring and testing purposes.
Page 3–1318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalAccess to the HSD Maintenance Utility Program is achieved by connecting an RS-232, VT-100 terminal (PC or Laptop operating a terminal emulation program) to the RS-232 Maintenance Port. The HSD Maintenance port is available at the front of the HSD and at the rear ARINC 600 connector. Connection on the front of the HSD is accessible via a DB25S connector for local maintenance of the unit. Remote access is provided for cases where local access is unavailable. For remote access, install an accessible DB9S connector in the cabin area.Note: The front panel and remote connections to the maintenance port cannot be used simultaneously.Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for information on how to connect and use the maintenance port—including, equipment requirements, connection and cabling requirements, software loading instructions, and configuration details.(c) Antenna Subsystem RF Interface – Stand-AloneSeveral external RF parameters (such as cable losses and antenna gain), that must be delimited to ensure proper operation, dictate the HSD performance requirements. Table 3–3 defines these parameters and their expected values.(d) WOW Pin Wiring – Stand-AloneThese Weight-On-Wheel (WOW) discretes are wired only if equivalent information is not strapped as being available to the SDU on an ARINC 429 input [for example, IRS or the Centralized Fault Display System (CFDS)].WOW wiring, for the HSD, is optional for system operation as the HSD already receives speed information for Doppler correction. However, if WOW wiring is not wired, normal maintenance must be disabled when speed or Doppler readings are greater than zero.The WOW1 and WOW2 pins are either left open circuit or they are connected to the airframe DC ground. The WOW Program Select (PGM) pin is either left open circuit or is connected to the Forward Address Common. The three ground states, defined for any pin are:• OPN: Open circuit Table 3–3. RF Parameters DefinitionParameter Min. Value (dB) Max. Value (dB)Antenna Gain 8 17Antenna—DLNA Loss 0.1 0.3DLNA Gain 53 60DLNA Noise Figure 1.5 1.8DLNA—HSD (Rx) Loss 6 25HSD—Antenna (Tx) Loss 1 2.5DLNA Insertion Loss (Tx to Antenna Port)–0.8
Page 3–1418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal• AFG: Airframe DC Ground• FAC: Fwd Address Common (TP7K)Resolve any conflict between WOW1 and WOW2 by assuming the aircraft is “in-air.” The interpretation of the state of the WOW1 and WOW2 pins is defined by the state of the WOW program select pin. Refer to Table 3–4 for details.1. Stand-Alone Mode InstallationsLabeled as WOW1, WOW2, and WOW Program Select, these discretes are wired only if equivalent information is not strapped as being available to the SDU on an ARINC 429 input [for example, IRS or the Centralized Fault Display System (CFDS)].WOW wiring is optional for system operation in Stand-Alone Mode installations as the HSD already receives speed information for Doppler correction. However, if WOW wiring is not wired, normal maintenance must be disabled when speed or Doppler readings are greater than zero.(e) Forward and Return Address IDs – Stand-AloneFigure 3–3 provides an example of a Forward ID address. The Forward ID is a Hex number (example: $ABC123) that must be converted into a binary number for strapping. Table 3–4. WOW Pin Wiring TablePin Name and LocationWOW1 WOW2 PGM Aircraft StatusTP3G TP3H TP3JAFG AFG FAC In-airOPN AFG FAC Not valid – Default in-airAFG OPN FAC Not valid – Default in-airOPN OPN FAC On-groundAFG AFG OPN On-groundOPN AFG OPN Not valid – Default in-airAFG OPN OPN Not valid – Default in-airOPN OPN OPN In-air
Page 3–1518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–3. Forward ID, Hex to Binary ConversionNote: A pin strapped to the same potential as T7K (Forward address common) is considered as a logical “0”, whereas an open circuit pin is considered as a logical “1”. MSB is the Most Significant Bit and LSB is the Least Significant Bit.(f) Remote Status Panel – Stand-Alone (Optional)An optional “remote status panel” may be installed in installations where the HSD and/or any HSD-X units are located in inaccessible or remote locations. The installation of a “remote status panel” is recommended as it provides visual indications of each of the power, fault, and call status of each of the units.
Page 3–1618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalA “remote reset switch” for HSD transceivers can also be installed and located with the Remote Status Panel. Figure 3–4 illustrates a typical wiring diagram for the remote reset circuit. Note: Cooperative and Combined Mode installations and HSD-X transceivers DO NOT support the use of the reset function. 1. HSD Remote Reset Switch Circuit Requirements – Stand-AloneHSD transceivers support the installation of a Remote Reset Switch circuit as shown in Figure 3–4.The HSD Remote Reset circuit requires less than 100 ohms between TP1K (RESET) and MP1F(COM) to be asserted and greater than 10 kilohms to be de-asserted (include all cable and switch contact resistance).2. HSD Remote LED Driver Circuit Requirements – Stand-AloneThe circuit requirements for the HSD Remote Status LED drivers are shown in Figure 3–5. Each LED driver circuit has a 200-ohm current limit resistor. The maximum cable resistance (including the forward and return paths) must not exceed 100 ohms to provide adequate current to the 5 volt LEDs (i.e. 10 mA minimum) at the remote status panel. It is recommended that the installer use shielded cables to provide a level of noise immunity.Figure 3–4. HSD Remote Reset Circuit – Stand-Alone
Page 3–1718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–5. HSD Remote LED Panel Circuit – Stand-Alone(g) User Interfaces – Stand-AloneTo facilitate user access to the HSD interfaces, install the following connectors in the appropriate cabin area. Note: Although the Ethernet interface is only supported by HSD-X transceivers, HSD transceiver models, PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160, and other models of HSD transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished, consider pre-wiring the cabin for all interfaces—even when installing an HSD transceiver that currently does not support the Ethernet interface. 1. ISDN Interface Install an RJ-45 interface connector in the cabin area for user connections to the ISDN interface. RJ-45 Connector Termination Details below describes the RJ-45 connector and cable termination.2. RS-232 Interface (MPDS)Install a DB9S interface connector in the cabin area for connection to the RS-232 interface. Refer to the HSD Interconnection Drawings for pinout designation.3. Ethernet Data Interface HSD transceiver models, part numbers 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 support the Ethernet interface. All other models of HSD transceivers must have service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 (Data I/O Type 2) accomplished to support the Ethernet interface.
Page 3–1818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalInstall an RJ-45 interface connector in the cabin area for user access to the Ethernet interface. The next section describes the RJ-45 connector and cable termination.4. RJ-45 Connector Termination DetailsDetails relating to the RJ-45 cable terminations, required for both the ISDN and/or 10BASE-T services, are shown in Table 3–5 and Figure 3–6. Use LAN cables that meet flammability and TIA/EIA568-A CAT-5 requirements. Cables #922404(4 conductor) and # 922408 (8 conductor), as supplied by Electronics Cable Specialists, are acceptable. Equivalent substitutions from other manufacturers may be used.Figure 3–6. RJ-45 Connector Terminator Details – Stand-Alone Table 3–5. RJ45 Wiring Details – Stand-AloneSignalSERVICEEURO ISDN Ethernet 10BASE-TPinCablePinCableECS Other ECS OtherRX + 3 White White/Green 3 White White/Orange stripeRX−6 Blue Green 6 Green Orange/White stripe or solid OrangeTX+ 4 White Blue 1 White White/Green stripeTX−5 Orange White/Blue 2 Brown Green/White stripe or solid Green 87654312
Page 3–1918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal5. System Configuration Pin Strapping – Stand-AloneThe HSD adjusts its configuration according to the status of several strap pins on the rear ARINC 600 connector.Configuration pins are assigned based on system mode configuration selection and data input/output (I/O) requirements, as shown in Table 3–6. Detailed pin assignment is shown in Table 3–7 and Table 3–8.Note: The logic for the System Configuration pins is reverse to the logic explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. For System Configuration pins, 0=strapped to common and 1=open. • Pins marked “0” are signaled by strapping to “Fwd Address Common” (T7K).• Pins marked “1” are signaled by an open circuit—no connection.• Configurations resulting in all “1’s” are invalid.6. System Mode Strap Pins Coding – Stand-AloneThe HSD must be externally strapped according to its intended operational configuration mode. Table 3–7 illustrates the system pin strapping for all HSD operational modes and configurations. The system pin strapping for Stand-Alone Mode is highlighted. Table 3–6. Configuration Pin Summary – Stand-AlonePin # Name FunctionTP4A to D System Config #1 to #4 System Mode (coded)TP4E to H System Config #5 to #8 Not assigned (set to"1")MP5G to K Data I/O Config #1 to #4 NOTE: Data I/O Mode (coded)MP6G to K Data I/O Config #5 to #8 Not assigned (set to"1")
Page 3–2018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalNote: The logic for the System Mode pins is reverse to the logic explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. For System Mode pins, 0=strapped to common and 1=open. • Pins marked “0” are signaled by strapping to “Fwd Address Common” (TP7K).• Pins marked “1” are signaled by an open circuit—no connection.• Configuration resulting in all “1’s” is Invalid.7. User Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Stand-AloneData I/O Mode Pin strapping is only required for HSD transceivers models with Data I/O Type 2 installed (PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160) or other HSD models that have Data I/O Type 2 cards installed via Service Bulletin, 1110-SB-0004.The following settings allow placing restrictions on the way both channels are used. If the user has no specific requirements then it is recommended to leave both channels as “Unrestricted.”In HSD transceivers with two channel cards, both channels are accessible for Swift64 Mobile ISDN via the ISDN port on a first come-first served basis. All modes, as detailed in Table 3–8, are also described in Figure 3–7.In units where all Data I/O services are available (including Ethernet), the following statements are valid:• The channel cards are pooled, which means that no particular card is operated in one of the selected modes.• If one channel card becomes inoperative, and there is a conflicting configuration (for example, 1 Reserved, 1 SCPC – for Swift64 Mobile ISDN), then the remaining card operates in "Unrestricted" mode. Table 3–7. Stand-Alone System Mode Pin Strapping – Stand-AloneSystem ModesPin StatusTP4A TP4B TP4C TP4D1234INVALID 1111Stand Alone 0101Selective, SAT-906 1101Selective, MCS-30001011Selective, MCS-60001001Selective, MCS-70000111Honeywell Combined1110Reserved 1100Collins Cooperative 0011Multi-Channel 0001
Page 3–2118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal• A “restricted” channel is not handled by the Data I/O Controller, which results in the channel not being accessible for SCPC via Ethernet or for MPDS via RS232 or Ethernet.• An SCPC channel is accessible for SCPC via Ethernet.• An MPDS channel is accessible for MPDS via RS232 and Ethernet.• An “unrestricted” channel is accessible for SCPC via Ethernet and MPDS via RS232 and Ethernet.Note: Use a ”Restricted” Data I/O Mode if only ISDN service is available. Note: (‘0’ = FWD Address Common, ‘1’ No Connection) Table 3–8. Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Stand-AlonePin Status Data I/O ModeMP5G MP5H MP5J MP5K1111Invalid11101 Restricted, 1 Unrestricted11011 Restricted, 1 SCPC11001 Restricted, 1 MPDS10112 Restricted (ISDN only)10102 SCPC10011 SCPC, 1 Unrestricted10002 MPDS01111 MPDS, 1 Unrestricted01101 SCPC, 1 MPDS0 1 0 1 2 Unrestricted (recommended if no specific user requirements)0000Reserved
Page 3–2218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–7. User Data I/O Mode Configurations – Stand-Alone(h) ARINC 429 IRS Bus Interface – Stand-AloneIn Stand-Alone Mode installations, navigational information (refer to "System Description" on page 1-1 for more information) is provided to the HSD through the high-speed ARINC 429 IRS bus interface. The IRS bus connects through the top plug of the ARINC 600 connector to the HSD as follows:• IRS A to TP4J• IRS B to TP4K(i) Antenna Interface – Stand-AloneThe ARINC 741 antenna subsystem BSU is interconnected to the HSD as specified in Table 3–9. Table 3–9. Stand-Alone Mode HSD to BSU InterconnectsSignal NameSignal Source Signal DestinationHSD TransceiverMechanical HGAPhased-Array or Conformal HGAHPA MUTE A Port BSU-G HSD TP3A STBD BSU-G HSD TP3CHPA MUTE B Port BSU-H HSD TP3B STBD BSU-H HSD TP3D
Page 3–2318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(j) Stand-Alone Mode Connection DetailsThe tables in this section provide all top, middle, and bottom plug connection details for Stand-Alone Mode installations. BSU BITE A BSU-W(G)1 Port BSU-W HSD TP2ASTBD BSU-W HSD TP2CBSU BITE B BSU-X(H) Port BSU-X HSD TP2BSTBD BSU-X HSD TP2DMULTI-CONTROL ATP3E BSU-T(A) & HSD TP1AMULTI-CONTROL BTP3F BSU-U(B) & HSD TP1BNOTE 1:Letters in (brackets) represent EMS SATCOM AMT-50 BSU pin designationsTop/Port (T/P): Refers to Mechanical (fin-mount) High Gain Antenna (HGA) SubsystemPort: Refers to Phased Array (Fuselage-mount) or Port side of Dual (side) Conformal-mount, HGA subsystemStarboard (STBD): Refers to Starboard side of Dual (side) Conformal-mount HGA subsystem Table 3–10. Stand-Alone Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection Details I/O From Top Plug Signal Name To DescriptionI1A Multi-control A TP3E Multi-control from control cardI1B Multi-control B TP3F Multi-control from control cardI2A BSU Top/Port BITE A(See Note 1)Mech. Steered Antenna (MA): BSU, Pin G1 or W or Other Antenna2 (OA): BSU, PORT-W & Starboard-P ARINC Tx-HI BITE from Top/Port BSUI2B BSU Top/Port BITE BMA: BSU, Pin H or X, or OA: BSU, PORT-X & STBD-RARINC Tx-LO BITE from Top/Port BSUI2C BSU Starboard (STBD) BITE AMA: Not required OA: BSU, PORT-P & STBD-WARINC Tx-HI BITE from STBD BSU Table 3–9. Stand-Alone Mode HSD to BSU InterconnectsSignal NameSignal Source Signal DestinationHSD TransceiverMechanical HGAPhased-Array or Conformal HGA
Page 3–2418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalI2D BSU STBD BITE B MA: Not required OA: BSU, PORT-R & STBD-XARINC Tx-LO BITE from STBD BSUI3A Top/Port HPA MUTE AMA: Not required OA: BSU, PORT-GHPA Mute-A, Port BSUI3B Top/Port HPA MUTE BMA: Not required OA: BSU, PORT-HHPA Mute-B, Port BSUI3C STBD HPA MUTE AMA: Not required OA: BSU, STBD GHPA Mute-A, STBD BSUI3D STBD HPA MUTE BMA: Not required OA: BSU, STBD-HHPA Mute-B, STBD BSUO3E OUT Multi-Control AIN Multi Ctrl A (TP1A), and MA: BSU, Pin A or T, or OA: BSU, PORT-T & STBD-TMulti-Control-HI to HSD & Antenna SubsystemO3F OUT Multi-Control BIN Multi Ctrl B (TP1B), and MA: BSU, Pin B or U, or OA: BSU, PORT-U & STBD-UMulti-Control-LO to HSD & Antenna SubsystemI2K Remote Reset Normally open momentary switch—open side. (Closed side to MP1F)Remote System ResetI3G WOW 1 TP3G Weight On Wheel, as defined in Note 40 of ARINC 741, Part 1. Refer to "WOW Pin Wiring – Stand-Alone" on page 3-13I3H WOW 2 TP3HI3J WOW Program SelectTP3JI4A, 4B, 4C, 4DSystem Config 1 to 44A & 4C=0 (TP7K common), 4B & 4D=1(Open) Stand-Alone ModeI4E to 4H System Config 5 to 8Open (1) System Configuration - not assignedI4J IRS-A Aircraft main IRS IRS 429 Data, Rx HII4K IRS-B Aircraft main IRS IRS 429 Data, Rx LOI5A SDI 1 Not connected HPA Select Code for I5B SDI 2 SDI common (TP5D) HPA Select Code for I5D SDI Common SDI 2 (TP5B) SDI Common for HPA select codes Table 3–10. Stand-Alone Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection Details I/O From Top Plug Signal Name To Description
Page 3–2518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalI5F FWD Address, BIT 24 (LSB)1=no connection, Six digit Hex ID assigned by Inmarsat /EMSI5G FWD Address, BIT I5H FWD Address, BIT I5J FWD Address, BIT I5K FWD Address, BIT 20I6A FWD Address, BIT I6B FWD Address, BIT I6C FWD Address, BIT I6D FWD Address, BIT I6E FWD Address, BIT I6F FWD Address, BIT I6G FWD Address, BIT I6H FWD Address, BIT I6J FWD Address, BIT I6K FWD Address, BIT I7A FWD Address, BIT I7B FWD Address, BIT I7C FWD Address, BIT I7D FWD Address, BIT I7E FWD Address, BIT I7F FWD Address, BIT I7G FWD Address, BIT I7H FWD Address, BIT I7J FWD Address, BIT 1 (MSB)I7K FWD Address, CommonCommon GND connection for system and I/O configuration and Table 3–10. Stand-Alone Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection Details I/O From Top Plug Signal Name To Description
Page 3–2618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal1. BSU Pin nomenclature for Mechanically-Steered Antennae (MA) is manufacturer dependent.2. “Other antenna types” (OA) represent either conformal or phased array antennae. Table 3–11. Stand-Alone Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection DetailsI/OFrom Middle PlugSignal Name To DescriptionO1A LED 1 Remote Status Panel—GreenHSD—Power On (Optional)O1B LED 2 Remote Status Panel—RedHSD—Fault (Optional)O1F LED Common Remote Status LED Panel, and closed side of N.O. Remote Reset SwitchLED Common O1G Maint Port Tx (OUT)Maint Port serial data, DB9S-2Maintenance computer (laptop/PC), for “Remote” accessI1H Maint Port Rx (IN) Maint Port serial data, DB9S-3I/O1J Maint Port Signal Ground.Maint Port serial data, DB9S-5 O2A CC (channel card) #1 RxDTE-1A, DB9S-2 or DB25P-3User Mobile Packet Data (MPDS), RS-232, DTE-1AI2B CC #1 Tx DTE-1A, DB9S-3 or DB25P-2I2C CC #1 RTS DTE-1A, DB9S-7 or DB25P-4O2D CC #1 CTS DTE-1A, DB9S-8 or DB25P-5I2E CC #1 DTR DTE-1A, DB9S-4 or DB25P-20O2F CC #1 DSR DTE-1A, DB9S-6 or DB25P-6O2G CC #1 CD DTE-1A, DB9S-1 or DB25P-8O2H CC #1 RI DTE-1A, DB9S-9 or DB25P-22I/O2J CC #1 SGND DTE-1A, DB9S-5 or DB25P-7
Page 3–2718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalO3A CC (channel card)#2 RxDTE-1B, DB9S-2 or DB25P-3User Mobile Packet Data (MPDS), RS-232, DTE-1BI3B CC #2 Tx DTE-1B, DB9S-3 or DB25P-2I3C CC #2 RTS DTE-1B, DB9S-7 or DB25P-4O3D CC #2 CTS DTE-1B, DB9S-8 or DB25P-5I3E CC #2 DTR DTE-1B, DB9S-4 or DB25P-20O3F CC #2 DSR DTE-1B, DB9S-6 or DB25P-6O3G CC #2 CD DTE-1B, DB9S-1 or DB25P-8O3H CC #2 RI DTE-1B, DB9S-9 or DB25P-22I/O3J CC #2 SGND DTE-1B, DB9S-5 or DB25P-7I4G BRI Rx+ISDN, RJ45-3 User Data, ISDN–2Refer to "User Interfaces – Stand-Alone" on page 3-17I4H BRI Rx-ISDN, RJ45-6O4J BRI Tx+ISDN, RJ45-4O4K BRI Tx-ISDN, RJ45-5I5G to 5K I/O CONFIG Pins 1 to 4See Table 3–8 System Data I/O Mode ConfigurationsI6G to 6K I/O CONFIG 5 to 8Open (1) System Data I/O Configurations – not assignedI6A BRI Rx+ISDN, RJ45-3 User Data, ISDN–1Refer to "User Interfaces – Stand-Alone" on page 3-17I6B BRI Rx -ISDN, RJ45-6O6C BRI Tx+ISDN, RJ45-4O6D BRI Tx-ISDN, RJ45-5 Table 3–11. Stand-Alone Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection DetailsI/OFrom Middle PlugSignal Name To Description
Page 3–2818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalB. Section II: Combined (HCM)/Selective Mode Installation(1) Combined Mode (HCM)/Selective Mode Installations Wiring NotesThis section provides detailed information on the external interface and system connections involved in the installation of an HSD transceiver for Combined and Selective Mode operation. Note: Selective Mode is a non-standard installation and it is not a recommended mode of operation. Selective Mode has been superseded by Combined Mode operation for MCS series SATCOM and with Cooperative Mode operation for SAT-906 series SATCOM. It is recommended that all systems operating in Selective Mode be upgraded to support Combined or Cooperative Mode as applicable.I7A 10BASE-T Rx+Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-3User Data, Ethernet 10BASE-T(Available in models 1110-A-0150, 1110-A-0160, and in units with Service Bulletin, 1110-SB-0004 accomplished)I7B 10BASE-T Rx-Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-6O7C 10BASE-T Tx+Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-1O7D 10BASE-T Tx-Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-2OC1 RF Tx Output Antenna Subsystem-DLNACoax Cable, RF Transmit Table 3–12. Stand-Alone ARINC 600 Bottom Plug Connection DetailsI/OFrom Bottom PlugSignal Name To DescriptionIBP2 +28 V dc HOT Aircraft Power Source, HOT+28 V dc supplyIBP3 +28 V dc return GNDAircraft Power Source, returnIBP8 Chassis GND Aircraft Ground Aircraft Chassis GroundIBP1 115 V ac HOT Aircraft Power Source, HOT115 V ac 400 Hz supplyIBP7 115 V ac COLD Aircraft Power Source, COLDIBP12 RF Rx Input Antenna Subsystem-DLNACoax Cable, RF Receive Table 3–11. Stand-Alone Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection DetailsI/OFrom Middle PlugSignal Name To Description
Page 3–2918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalNote: All connections, except power and RF, are HSD specific. Refer to “other SATCOM” and antenna manufacturers’ installation documentation for interconnection wiring details.(a) Maintenance Port Interface – Combined/SelectiveThe HSD transceiver has an RS-232 Maintenance Port interface that provides access to a maintenance utility program for data loading, system monitoring, and testing purposes. Access to the HSD Maintenance Utility Program is achieved by connecting an RS-232, VT-100 terminal (PC or Laptop operating a terminal emulation program) to the RS-232 Maintenance Port. The HSD Maintenance port is available at the front of the HSD and at the rear ARINC 600 connector. Connection on the front of the HSD is accessible via a DB25S connector for local maintenance of the unit. Remote access is provided for cases where local access is unavailable. For remote access, install an accessible DB9S connector in the cabin area.Note: The front panel and remote connections to the maintenance port cannot be used simultaneously.Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for information on how to connect and use the maintenance port—including equipment requirements, connection and cabling requirements, software loading instructions, and configuration details.(b) Antenna Subsystem RF Interface – Combined/SelectiveSeveral external RF parameters (such as cable losses and antenna gain), that must be delimited to ensure proper operation, dictate the HSD performance requirements. Table 3–13 defines these parameters and their expected values.(c) WOW Pin Wiring – Combined/SelectiveThis section describes the requirements for WOW pin wiring.• Combined Mode InstallationsIn Combined Mode installations, WOW1, WOW2, and WOW Program Select are reserved for future use. Table 3–13. RF Parameters Definition – Combined/SelectiveParameter Min. Value (dB) Max. Value (dB)Antenna Gain 8 17Antenna—DLNA Loss 0.1 0.3DLNA Gain 53 60DLNA Noise Figure 1.5 1.8DLNA—HSD (Rx) Loss 6 25HSD—Antenna (Tx) Loss 1 2.5DLNA Insertion Loss (Tx to Antenna Port) – 0.8
Page 3–3018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal• Selective Mode InstallationsLabeled as WOW1, WOW2, and WOW Program Select, these discretes are wired only if equivalent information is not strapped as being available to the SDU on an ARINC 429 input [for example, IRS or the Centralized Fault Display System (CFDS)].WOW wiring is optional for system operation in Selective Mode installations as the HSD already receives speed information for Doppler correction. However, if WOW wiring is not wired, normal maintenance must be disabled when speed or Doppler readings are greater than zero.(d) Forward and Return Address IDs – Combined/SelectiveFigure 3–8 provides an example of a Forward ID address. The Forward ID is a Hex number (example: $ABC123) that must be converted into a binary number for strapping. Table 3–14. WOW Pin Wiring Table – Combined/SelectivePin Name and LocationWOW1 WOW2 PGM Aircraft StatusTP3G TP3H TP3JAFG AFG FAC In-airOPN AFG FAC Not valid – Default in-airAFG OPN FAC Not valid – Default in-airOPN OPN FAC On-groundAFG AFG OPN On-groundOPN AFG OPN Not valid – Default in-airAFG OPN OPN Not valid – Default in-airOPN OPN OPN In-air
Page 3–3118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–8. Forward ID, Hex to Binary Conversion – Combined/Selective Note: A pin strapped to the same potential as T7K (Forward address common) is considered as a logical “0”, whereas an open circuit pin is considered as a logical “1”.Note: MSB is the Most Significant Bit and LSB is the Least Significant Bit.
Page 3–3218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(e) Remote Status Panel – Combined/Selective (Optional)An optional “remote status panel” may be installed in installations where the HSD units are located in inaccessible or remote locations. The installation of a “remote status panel” is recommended as it provides visual indications of each of the power, fault, and call status of each of the units. A “remote reset switch” for HSD transceivers can also be installed and located with the Remote Status Panel. Figure 3–10 illustrates a typical wiring diagram for the remote reset circuit. 1. HSD Remote Reset Switch Circuit RequirementsNote: Combined Mode installations DO NOT support the use of the reset function. In Selective Mode installations, the use of the reset function is optional.HSD transceivers support the installation of a Remote Reset Switch circuit as shown in Figure 3–9.The HSD Remote Reset circuit requires less than 100 ohms between TP1K (RESET) and MP1F(COM) to be asserted and greater than 10 kilohms to be de-asserted (include all cable and switch contact resistance).2. HSD Remote LED Driver Circuit RequirementsThe circuit requirements for the HSD Remote Status LED drivers are shown in Figure 3–10. Each LED driver circuit has a 200-ohm current limit resistor. The maximum cable resistance (including the forward and return paths) must not exceed 100 ohms to provide adequate current to the 5 volt LEDs (i.e. 10 mA minimum) at the remote status panel. It is recommended that the installer use shielded cables to provide a level of noise immunity.Figure 3–9. HSD Remote Reset Circuit – Combined/Selective
Page 3–3318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–10. HSD Remote LED Panel Circuit – Combined/Selective(f) User Interfaces – Combined/SelectiveTo facilitate user access to the HSD interfaces, install the following connectors in the appropriate cabin area. Note: Although the Ethernet interface is only supported by HSD-X transceivers, HSD transceiver models, PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160, and other models of HSD transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished, consider pre-wiring the cabin for all interfaces—even when installing an HSD transceiver that currently does not support the Ethernet interface. 1. ISDN Interface Install an RJ-45 interface connector in the cabin area for user connections to the ISDN interface. RJ-45 Connector Termination Details below describes the RJ-45 connector and cable termination.2. RS-232 Interface (MPDS)Install a DB9S interface connector in the cabin area for connection to the RS-232 interface. Refer to the HSD Interconnection Drawings for pinout designation.3. Ethernet Data Interface HSD transceiver models, part numbers 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 support the Ethernet interface. All other models of HSD transceivers must have service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished to support the Ethernet interface.
Page 3–3418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalInstall an RJ-45 interface connector in the cabin area for user access to the Ethernet interface. The next paragraph, describes the RJ-45 connector and cable termination.4. RJ-45 Connector Termination DetailsDetails relating to the RJ45 cable terminations, required for both the ISDN and/or 10BASE-T services, are shown in Table 3–15 and Figure 3–11. Use LAN cables that meet flammability and TIA/EIA568-A CAT-5 requirements. Cables #922404(4 conductor) and # 922408 (8 conductor), as supplied by Electronics Cable Specialists, are acceptable. Equivalent substitutions from other manufacturers may be used.Figure 3–11. RJ-45 Connector Terminator Details – Combined/Selective Table 3–15. RJ45 Wiring Details – Combined/SelectiveSignalSERVICEEURO ISDN Ethernet 10BASE-TPinCablePinCableECS Other ECS OtherRX + 3 White White/Green 3 White White/Orange stripeRX−6 Blue Green 6 Green Orange/White stripe or solid OrangeTX+ 4 White Blue 1 White White/Green stripeTX−5 Orange White/Blue 2 Brown Green/White stripe or solid Green
Page 3–3518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal5. System Configuration Pin Strapping – Combined/SelectiveThe HSD adjusts its configuration according to the status of several strap pins on the rear ARINC 600 connector.Configuration pins are assigned based on system-mode-configuration selection and data input/output (I/O) requirements as shown in Table 3–16. Detailed pin assignment is shown in Table 3–17 and Table 3–18.Note: The logic for the System Configuration pins is reverse to the logic explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. For System Configuration pins, 0=strapped to common and 1=open. • Pins marked “0” are signaled by strapping to “Fwd Address Common” (T7K).• Pins marked “1” are signaled by an open circuit—no connection.• Configurations resulting in all “1’s” are invalid.6. System Mode Strap Pins Coding – Combined/SelectiveThe HSD must be externally strapped according to its intended operational configuration mode. Table 3–17 illustrates the system pin strapping for all HSD operational modes and configurations. The HCM Mode is highlighted as an example. Table 3–16. Configuration Pin Summary – Combined/SelectivePin # Name FunctionTP4A to D System Config #1 to #4 System Mode (See Table 3–17)TP4E to H System Config #5 to #8 Not assigned (set to"1")MP5G to K Data I/O Config #1 to #4 NOTE: Data I/O Mode (See Table 3–18)MP6G to K Data I/O Config #5 to #8 Not assigned (set to"1") Table 3–17. Combined Mode System Mode Pin StrappingPin StatusSystem Modes TP4A TP4B TP4C TP4D1234INVALID 1111Stand-Alone 0101Selective, SAT-9061101Selective, MCS-30001011Selective, MCS-60001001Selective, MCS-70000111Honeywell Combined1110Reserved 1100
Page 3–3618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalNote: The logic for the System Mode pins is reverse to the logic explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. For System Mode pins, 0=strapped to common and 1=open. • Pins marked “0” are signaled by strapping to “Fwd Address Common” (TP7K).• Pins marked “1” are signaled by an open circuit—no connection.• Configuration resulting in all “1’s” is Invalid.7. User Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Combined/SelectiveData I/O Mode Pin strapping is only required for HSD transceivers models, PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 or other HSD models that have Data I/O Type 2 cards installed via Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0004.The following settings allow placing restrictions on the way both channels are used. If the user has no specific requirements then it is recommended to leave both channels as “Unrestricted.”In HSD transceivers with two channel cards, both channels are accessible for Swift64 Mobile ISDN via the ISDN port on a first come-first served basis. All four modes, as detailed in Table 3–18, are also described in Figure 3–12.In units where all Data I/O services are available (including Ethernet), the following statements are valid:• The channel cards are pooled, which means that no particular card is operated in one of the selected modes.• If one channel card becomes inoperative, and there is a conflicting configuration (for example, 1 Reserved, 1 SCPC – for Swift64 Mobile ISDN), then the remaining card operates in "Unrestricted" mode.• A “restricted” channel is not handled by the Data I/O Controller, which results in the channel not being accessible for SCPC via Ethernet or for MPDS via RS232 or Ethernet.• An SCPC channel is accessible for SCPC via Ethernet.• An MPDS channel is accessible for MPDS via RS232 and Ethernet.• An “unrestricted” channel is accessible for SCPC via Ethernet and MPDS via RS232 and Ethernet.Note: Use a ”Restricted” Data I/O Mode if only ISDN service is available. Collins Cooperative 0011Multi-Channel 0001 Table 3–17. Combined Mode System Mode Pin StrappingPin StatusSystem Modes TP4A TP4B TP4C TP4D1234
Page 3–3718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalNote: (‘0’ = FWD Address Common, ‘1’ No Connection) Table 3–18. Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Combined/SelectivePin Status Data I/O ModeMP5G MP5H MP5J MP5K1111Invalid11101 Restricted, 1 Unrestricted11011 Restricted, 1 SCPC11001 Restricted, 1 MPDS10112 Restricted (ISDN only)10102 SCPC10011 SCPC, 1 Unrestricted10002 MPDS01111 MPDS, 1 Unrestricted01101 SCPC, 1 MPDS01012 Unrestricted (recommended if no specific user requirements)0000Reserved
Page 3–3818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–12. User Data I/O Mode Configurations – Combined/Selective(g) ARINC 429 IRS Bus Interface – Combined/SelectiveIn HCM Combined Mode and Selective Mode installations, navigational information (refer to "System Description" on page 1-1 for details) is provided to the HSD through the high-speed ARINC 429 IRS bus interface. The IRS bus connects through the top plug of the ARINC 600 connector to the HSD as follows:• IRS A to TP4J• IRS B to TP4K(h) Antenna Interface – Combined/SelectiveThe SATCOM Aero H/H+ system provides the interface to the antenna. Refer to Honeywell documentation for specific details. (i) RF Splitter Installation – Combined/SelectiveRefer to the Interconnection Diagrams for cabling details. Refer to Table 3–19 for a list of the required cable assembly parts. Substitutions using different parts of equivalent functionality are acceptable.Note: Before installing the RF splitter, read all of the steps included in the following splitter installation procedure.Note: Actual splitter mounting location may vary depending on the placement of the existing RFU and HPA assemblies.
Page 3–3918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalTo install the RF Splitter: 1. Determine a suitable location near the RFU to secure the splitter. 2. Cut the receive coax cable at the splitter mounting location. 3. Re-terminate the cut ends with TNC coax connectors 4. Connect the end coming from the antenna subsystem to the splitter input (S) connector. 5. Connect the end going to TPC1 of the RFU to one of the output ports of the splitter, one or two. 6. Run a new coax cable (length is installation specific) from the unused splitter output port to BP-12 of the ARINC 600 connector of the HSD tray assembly.(j) Combined/Selective Mode Connection DetailsThe tables in this section provide all top, middle, and bottom plug connection details for Combined and Selective Mode installations. Table 3–19. Receive Path Parts Requirements – Combined/SelectiveItem Manufacturer PNEMS SATCOM PN DescriptionRF Splitter ZAPD-2-TNC 32800004 Mini-Circuit, 2-way 0°, TNC, SplitterReceive Coax 432101 – ECS, Coax Cable, 0.130 O.D., 50Ω, 17.5 dB/100 ft @ 1.5 GHzConnector (@ Splitter)CTS522 – ECS, TNC, Straight PlugConnector (@ BP12)P522 – ECS, ARINC 600, Size 5, Socket Table 3–20. Combined/Selective Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection DetailsI/O From Top Plug Signal Name To DescriptionI/O1A to 1D Multi-Control IN and BITE OUTAs per avionics manufacturer’s documentationMulti-Control and BITEI2A BSU Top/Port BITE A SDU, MP7G ARINC Tx-HI BITE From Top/Port BSUI2B BSU Top/Port BITE B SDU, MP7H ARINC Tx-LO BITE From Top/Port BSUI2C BSU STBD BITE A Mechanically Steered Antenna1 (MA): Not required Other Antenna2 (OA): SDU, MP7JARINC Tx-HI BITE From STBD BSU
Page 3–4018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalI2D BSU STBD BITE B MA: Not required OA: SDU, MP7KARINC Tx-LO BITE From STBD BSUI3A to 3D HPA MUTE MA: Not required As per avionics manufacturer’s documentationHPA Mute-A & B to BSUI2K Remote Reset Normally Open momentary switch—open side (Closed side to MP1F) Remote System Reset(Optional; not recommended for Combined Mode)I3G WOW 1 TP3G Weight On Wheel, as defined in Note 40 of ARINC 741 I3H WOW2 TP3HI3J WOW Program Select TP3JI4A to 4D System Config 1 to 4 System Mode Configurations I4E to 4H System Config 5 to 8 Open (1) System Mode configuration-not assignedI4J IRS-A Aircraft main IRS IRS 429 Data, Rx HII4K IRS-B Aircraft main IRS IRS 429 Data, Rx LOI5A, 5B, & 5DSDI 1, SDI 2, & SDI CommonAs per avionics manufacturer’s documentationHPA Select Code for HGAI5F FWD Address, BIT 24 (LSB)1=no connection, 0=Common (TP7K)Six digit Hex ID assigned by Inmarsat /EMS SATCOM Table 3–20. Combined/Selective Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection DetailsI/O From Top Plug Signal Name To Description
Page 3–4118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalI5G FWD Address, BIT 23I5H FWD Address, BIT 22I5J FWD Address, BIT 21I5K FWD Address, BIT 20I6A FWD Address, BIT 19I6B FWD Address, BIT 18I6C FWD Address, BIT 17I6D FWD Address, BIT 16I6E FWD Address, BIT 15I6F FWD Address, BIT 14I6G FWD Address, BIT 13I6H FWD Address, BIT 12I6J FWD Address, BIT 11I6K FWD Address, BIT 10I7A FWD Address, BIT 9I7B FWD Address, BIT 8I7C FWD Address, BIT 7I7D FWD Address, BIT 6I7E FWD Address, BIT 5I7F FWD Address, BIT 4I7G FWD Address, BIT 3I7H FWD Address, BIT 2I7J FWD Address, BIT 1 (MSB)I7K FWD Address, CommonCommon GND connection for system and I/O configuration and FWD ID1. BSU Pin nomenclature for Mechanically-Steered Antennae (MA) is manufacturer dependent. Table 3–20. Combined/Selective Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection DetailsI/O From Top Plug Signal Name To Description
Page 3–4218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal2. “Other antenna types” (OA) represent either conformal or phased array antennae. Table 3–21. Combined/Selective Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection DetailsI/OFrom Middle PlugSignal Name To DescriptionO1A LED 1 Remote Status Panel—GreenHSD-64—Power On (Optional)O1B LED 2 Remote Status Panel—RedHSD-64—Fault (Optional)O1F LED Common Remote Status LED Panel and closed side of N.O. Remote Reset switch (if used)LED CommonO1G Maint Port Tx (Out) Maint Port serial data, DB9S-2Maintenance Laptop/PC, for “Remote” accessI1H Maint Port Rx (In) Maint Port serial data, DB9S-31J Maint Port Signal GNDMaint Port serial data, DB9S-5 O2A Channel Card (CC) #1 RxDTE-1A, DB9S-2 User Mobile Packet Data (MPDS), RS-232, DTE-1AI2B CC #1 Tx DTE-1A, DB9S-3I2C CC #1 RTS DTE-1A, DB9S-7O2D CC #1 CTS DTE-1A, DB9S-8I2E CC #1 DTR DTE-1A, DB9S-4O2F CC #1 DSR DTE-1A, DB9S-6O2G CC #1 DCD DTE-1A, DB9S-1O2H CC #1 RI DTE-1A, DB9S-9I/O 2J CC #1 SGND DTE-1A, DB9S-5I6A BRI RX+ RJ45-3 User Data, ISDN–1 Refer to "User Interfaces – Combined/Selective" on page 3-33I6B BRI RX- RJ45-6O6C BRI TX+ RJ45-4O6D BRI TX- RJ45-5
Page 3–4318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalI5G to 5K I/O CONFIG Pins 1 to 4See Table 3–8 System Data I/O Mode ConfigurationsI6G to 6K I/O CONFIG Pins 5 to 8Open (1) Data I/O Config – not assignedI4G BRI Rx+ ISDN, RJ45-3 User Data, ISDN–2(Provisional)I4H BRI Rx-ISDN RJ45-6O4J BRI Tx+ ISDN, RJ45-4O4K BRI Tx-ISDN, RJ45-5I7A 10BASE-T Rx+ Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-3User Data, Ethernet 10BASE-T (Available in models 1110-A-0150, 1110-A-0160, and in units with Service Bulletin, 1110-SB-0004 accomplished) I7B 10BASE-T Rx-Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-6O7C 10BASE-T Tx+Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-1O7D 10BASE-T Tx-Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-2OC1 RF Tx Output Antenna Subsystem-DLNACoax Cable, RF Transmit Table 3–22. Combined/Selective Mode ARINC 600 Bottom Plug Connection DetailsI/OFrom Bottom PlugSignal Name To DescriptionI2 +28 V dc HOT Aircraft Power Source, HOT+28 V dc supplyI3 +28 V dc Rtn GND Aircraft Power Source, RtnI8 Chassis GND Aircraft Ground Aircraft Chassis GroundI1 115 V ac HOT Aircraft Power Source, HOT115 V ac 400 Hz supplyI7 115 V ac COLD Aircraft Power Source, COLDI12 RF Rx Input RF Rx Splitter output portRF Receive from Antenna Subsystem Table 3–21. Combined/Selective Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection DetailsI/OFrom Middle PlugSignal Name To Description
Page 3–4418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalC. Section III: Cooperative Mode Installation(1) Cooperative Mode Installations Wiring NotesThis section provides detailed information on the external interface and system connections involved in the installation of an HSD transceiver in Cooperative Mode operation.(a) General Overview – Cooperative ModeThis section describes external interfaces unique to HSD Transceivers operating in Collins SAT-906 Cooperative-Mode. For detailed interface descriptions, refer to the Cooperative Mode, Interconnection Diagram, (1110-B-0156).Note: All connections, except power and RF, are HSD specific. Refer to “other SATCOM” and antenna manufacturers’ installation documentation for interconnection wiring details.To achieve the current “best system” operation performance, the HSD should have EMS SATCOM service bulletin 1110-SB-0015 incorporated (service bulletin 1110-SB-0015 supercedes 1110-SB-0003). Cooperative Mode installations that use an HSD without a minimum of service bulletin 1110-SB-0003 (control processor software version 4.5) incorporated will occasionally generate Disable 0100, Disable 0800, and Disable 1000 SAT-906 system errors. Cooperative Mode system installations that use an HSD with service bulletin 1110-SB-0003 incorporated operate with improved system performance and should only generate Disable 1000 SAT-906 system errors (Disable 1000 errors occur on approximately 1% of M4 call terminations). This error occurs due to the HSD reporting a lower than expected actual power out value in the HPA Status Word on the ARINC 429 HPA BITE bus. Currently, Cooperative Mode installations only support single channel card configurations. If installing a dual-channel HSD transceiver in a Cooperative Mode environment, use the maintenance port utility to configure the EEPROM setting, in Menu 3, for a single channel card.The following general wiring notes must be considered before installing an HSD transceiver for Cooperative Mode operation with the Collins SAT-906 system.• Splitter for the RX path• System Configuration strapping is set to “Cooperative Rockwell-Collins SAT-906” in the EEPROM parameter for software versions 4.5. External system strapping to “Collins Cooperative” Mode is used for installations operating software versions 5.7 or later (1110-SB-0011). Software versions 5.7 or later “read” the hardware strapping to automatically identify the system configuration. Add the following HSD-specific wiring:• Forward ID Address (Category B)• Antenna to BSU BITE information from SDU • A “Tx Disable” line from the SDU to the HSD • ARINC 429 SDU to/from HSD, Crosstalk BUS linesOther HSD-specific wiring includes:
Page 3–4518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal• ISDN, Ethernet (if supported with an installed Data I/O Type 2 Card), and/or MPDS (RS-232) interface wiring• System and Data I/O Configuration lines• Optional maintenance and LED remote interfaces(b) Rockwell Collins Requirements for Cooperative Operation with SAT-906At the time of printing, the SAT-906 SDU needs, at a minimum, core software –068, that includes service bulletins 31 and 501, which changes the unit to a –150 designation with wiring SDU pin TP12E grounded to indicate that the SDU is operating with an HSD.The Collins Owner Requirements Table (ORT) must updated with the latest version, ORT generation tool.(c) Maintenance Port Interface – Cooperative ModeThe HSD transceiver has an RS-232 Maintenance Port interface that provides access to a maintenance utility program for data loading, system monitoring and testing purposes. Access to the HSD Maintenance Utility Program is achieved by connecting an RS-232, VT-100 terminal (PC or Laptop operating a terminal emulation program) to the RS-232 Maintenance Port. The HSD Maintenance port is available at the front of the HSD and at the rear ARINC 600 connector. Connection on the front of the HSD is accessible via a DB25S connector for local maintenance of the unit. Remote access is provided for cases where local access is unavailable. For remote access, install an accessible DB9S connector in the cabin area.Note: The front panel and remote connections to the maintenance port cannot be used simultaneously.Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for information on how to connect and use the maintenance port—including, equipment requirements, connection and cabling requirements, software loading instructions, and configuration details.(d) Antenna Subsystem RF Interface – Cooperative ModeSeveral external RF parameters (such as cable losses and antenna gain), that must be delimited to ensure proper operation, dictate the HSD performance requirements. Table 3–23 defines these parameters and their expected values. Table 3–23. RF Parameters Definition – Cooperative ModeParameter Min. Value (dB) Max. Value (dB)Antenna Gain 8 17Antenna—DLNA Loss 0.1 0.3DLNA Gain 53 60DLNA Noise Figure 1.5 1.8DLNA—HSD (Rx) Loss 6 25
Page 3–4618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(e) WOW Pin Wiring – Cooperative ModeIn Cooperative Mode installations, WOW 2 discrete is re-assigned as Tx- Disable and is therefore not used.(f) Forward and Return Address IDs – Cooperative ModeFigure 3–13 provides an example of a Forward ID address. The Forward ID is a Hex number (example: $ABC123) that must be converted into a binary number for strapping.HSD—Antenna (Tx) Loss 1 2.5DLNA Insertion Loss (Tx to Antenna Port) – 0.8 Table 3–23. RF Parameters Definition – Cooperative ModeParameter Min. Value (dB) Max. Value (dB)
Page 3–4718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–13. Forward ID, Hex to Binary Conversion – Cooperative Mode Note: A pin strapped to the same potential as T7K (Forward address common) is considered as a logical “0”, whereas an open circuit pin is considered as a logical “1”.Note: MSB is the Most Significant Bit and LSB is the Least Significant Bit.
Page 3–4818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(g) Remote Status Panel – Cooperative Mode (Optional)An optional “remote status panel” may be installed in installations where the HSD is located in inaccessible or remote locations. The installation of a “remote status panel” is recommended as it provides visual indications of each of the power, fault, and call status of the HSD. Note: Cooperative Mode installations DO NOT support the use of the reset function. 1. HSD Remote LED Driver Circuit Requirements – Cooperative ModeThe circuit requirements for the HSD Remote Status LED drivers are shown in Figure 3–14. Each LED driver circuit has a 200-ohm current limit resistor. The maximum cable resistance (including the forward and return paths) must not exceed 100 ohms to provide adequate current to the 5 volt LEDs (i.e. 10 mA minimum) at the remote status panel. It is recommended that the installer use shielded cables to provide a level of noise immunity.Figure 3–14. HSD Remote LED Panel Circuit – Cooperative Mode(h) User Interfaces – Cooperative ModeTo facilitate user access to the HSD interfaces, install the following connectors in the appropriate cabin area. Note: Although the Ethernet interface is only supported by HSD-X transceivers, HSD transceiver models, PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160, and other models of HSD transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished, consider pre-wiring the cabin for all interfaces—even when installing an HSD transceiver that currently does not support the Ethernet interface.
Page 3–4918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal1. ISDN Interface Install an RJ-45 interface connector in the cabin area for user connections to the ISDN interface. "RJ-45 Connector Termination Details" on page 3-49 describes the RJ-45 connector and cable termination.2. RS-232 Interface (MPDS)Install a DB9S interface connector in the cabin area for connection to the RS-232 interface. Refer to the HSD Interconnection Drawing for pinout designation.3. Ethernet Data Interface HSD transceiver models, part numbers 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 support the Ethernet interface. All other models of HSD transceivers must have service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished to support the Ethernet interface.Install an RJ-45 interface connector in the cabin area for user access to the Ethernet interface. "RJ-45 Connector Termination Details" on page 3-49 describes the RJ-45 connector and cable termination.4. RJ-45 Connector Termination DetailsDetails relating to the RJ-45 cable terminations, required for both the ISDN and/or 10BASE-T services, are shown in Table 3–24 and Figure 3–15. Use LAN cables that meet flammability and TIA/EIA568-A CAT-5 requirements. Cables #922404(4 conductor) and # 922408 (8 conductor), as supplied by Electronics Cable Specialists, are acceptable. Equivalent substitutions from other manufacturers may be used. Table 3–24. RJ-45 Wiring Details – Cooperative ModeSignalSERVICEEURO ISDN Ethernet 10BASE-TPinCablePinCableECS Other ECS OtherRX + 3 White White/Green 3 White White/Orange stripeRX−6 Blue Green 6 Green Orange/White stripe or solid OrangeTX+ 4 White Blue 1 White White/Green stripeTX−5 Orange White/Blue 2 Brown Green/White stripe or solid Green
Page 3–5018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–15. RJ-45 Connector Terminator Details – Cooperative Mode5. System Configuration Pin Strapping – Cooperative ModeThe HSD adjusts its configuration according to the status of several strap pins on the rear ARINC 600 connector.Configuration pins are assigned based on system-mode-configuration selection, and data input/output (I/O) requirements as shown in Table 3–25. Detailed pin assignment is shown in Table 3–26 and Table 3–27.Note: The logic for the System Configuration pins is reverse to the logic explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. For System Configuration pins, 0=strapped to common and 1=open. • Pins marked “0” are signaled by strapping to “Fwd Address Common” (T7K).• Pins marked “1” are signaled by an open circuit—no connection.• Configurations resulting in all “1’s” are invalid.6. System Mode Strap Pins Coding – Cooperative ModeThe HSD must be externally strapped as highlighted in Table 3–26; it illustrates the system pin strapping for operation in Cooperative Mode (with Collins SAT-906). Table 3–25. Configuration Pin Summary – Cooperative ModePin # Name FunctionTP4A to D System Config #1 to #4 System Mode (See Table 3–26)TP4E to H System Config #5 to #8 Not assigned (set to"1")MP5G to K Data I/O Config #1 to #4 NOTE: Data I/O Mode (See Table 3–27)MP6G to K Data I/O Config #5 to #8 Not assigned (set to"1")
Page 3–5118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalNote: The logic for the System Mode pins is reverse to the logic explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. For System Mode pins, 0=strapped to common and 1=open. • Pins marked “0” are signaled by strapping to “Fwd Address Common” (TP7K).• Pins marked “1” are signaled by an open circuit—no connection.• Configuration resulting in all “1’s” is Invalid.7. User Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Cooperative ModeData I/O Mode Pin strapping is only required for HSD transceivers models, PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 or other HSD models that have Data I/O Type 2 cards installed via Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0004.The following settings allow placing restrictions on the way both channels are used. If the user has no specific requirements then it is recommended to leave both channels as “Unrestricted.”In HSD transceivers with two channel cards, both channels are accessible for Swift64 Mobile ISDN via the ISDN port on a first come-first served basis. All four modes, as detailed in Table 3–27, are also described in Figure 3–16.In units where all Data I/O services are available (including Ethernet), the following statements are valid:• The channel cards are pooled, which means that no particular card is operated in one of the selected modes.• If one channel card becomes inoperative, and there is a conflicting configuration (for example, 1 Reserved, 1 SCPC – for Swift64 Mobile ISDN), then the remaining card operates in "Unrestricted" mode. Table 3–26. System Mode Pin Strapping – Cooperative ModeSystem ModesPin StatusTP4A TP4B TP4C TP4D1234INVALID 1111Stand Alone 0101Selective, SAT-906 1101Selective, MCS-30001011Selective, MCS-60001001Selective, MCS-70000111Honeywell Combined1110Reserved 1100Collins Cooperative 0011Multi-Channel 0001
Page 3–5218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal• A “restricted” channel is not handled by the Data I/O Controller, which results in the channel not being accessible for SCPC via Ethernet or for MPDS via RS232 or Ethernet.• An SCPC channel is accessible for SCPC via Ethernet.• An MPDS channel is accessible for MPDS via RS232 and Ethernet.• An “unrestricted” channel is accessible for SCPC via Ethernet and MPDS via RS232 and Ethernet.Note: Use a ”Restricted” Data I/O Mode if only ISDN service is available. Note: (‘0’ = FWD Address Common, ‘1’ No Connection) Table 3–27. Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Cooperative ModePin Status Data I/O ModeMP5G MP5H MP5J MP5K1111Invalid11101 Restricted, 1 Unrestricted11011 Restricted, 1 SCPC11001 Restricted, 1 MPDS10112 Restricted (ISDN only)10102 SCPC10011 SCPC, 1 Unrestricted10002 MPDS01111 MPDS, 1 Unrestricted01101 SCPC, 1 MPDS01012 Unrestricted (recommended if no specific user requirements)0000Reserved
Page 3–5318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–16. User Data I/O Mode Configurations – Cooperative Mode(i) ARINC 429 IRS Bus Interface – Cooperative ModeAlthough the IRS bus connections are not required, the installation of provisional wiring for these connections is recommended.(j) Antenna Interface – Cooperative ModeThe SAT-906 Aero H/H+ system provides the interface to the antenna. Refer to Rockwell Collins SAT-906 documentation for specific details. (k) RF Splitter Installation – Cooperative ModeRefer to Table 3–28 for a list of the required cable assembly parts. Substitutions using different parts of equivalent functionality are acceptable.Note: Before installing the RF splitter, read all of the steps included in the following splitter installation procedure.Note: Actual splitter mounting location may vary depending on the placement of the existing RFU and HPA assemblies.To install the RF Splitter: 1. Determine a suitable location near the RFU to secure the splitter. 2. Cut the receive coax cable at the splitter mounting location. 3. Re-terminate the cut ends with TNC coax connectors.
Page 3–5418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 4. Connect the end coming from the antenna subsystem to the splitter input (S) connector. 5. Connect the end going to TPC1 of the RFU to one of the output ports of the splitter, one or two. 6. Run a new coax cable (length is installation specific) from the unused splitter output port to BP-12 of the ARINC 600 connector of the HSD tray assembly.(l) Cooperative Mode Connection DetailsThe tables in this section provide all top, middle, and bottom plug connection details for Cooperative Mode installations. Table 3–28. Receive Path Parts Requirements – Cooperative ModeItem Manufacturer PNEMS SATCOM PNDescriptionRF Splitter ZAPD-2-TNC 32800004 Mini-Circuit, 2-way 0°, TNC, SplitterReceive Coax 432101 – ECS, Coax Cable, 0.130 O.D., 50Ω, 17.5 dB/100 ft @ 1.5 GHzConnector (@ Splitter)CTS522 – ECS, TNC, Straight PlugConnector (@ BP12)P522 – ECS, ARINC 600, Size 5, Socket Table 3–29. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection DetailsI/O From Top Plug Signal Name To DescriptionI/O 1A to 1D Multi-Control IN and BITE OUTAs per Collins documentationMulti-Control and BITEI2A BSU Top/Port BITE A SDU, MP7G ARINC Tx-HI BITE From Top/Port BSUI2B BSU Top/Port BITE B SDU, MP7H ARINC Tx-LO BITE From Top/Port BSUI2C BSU STBD BITE A Mechanically Steered1 Antenna (MA): Not required Other Antenna2 (OA): SDU, MP7JARINC Tx-HI BITE From STBD BSUI2D BSU STBD BITE B MA: Not required OA: SDU, MP7KARINC Tx-LO BITE From STBD BSUO2E OUT SDU Crosstalk ASDU, MP12A ARINC 429O2F OUT SDU Crosstalk BSDU, MP12B ARINC 429
Page 3–5518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalI2H IN SDU Crosstalk A SDU, MP12C ARINC 429I2J IN SDU Crosstalk B SDU, MP12D ARINC 429I3H Tx– disable SDU, MP5J ARINC Discrete, Tx disableI3A to 3D HPA MUTE MA: Not required As per Collins documentationHPA Mute-A &B to BSUI2K Remote Reset Normally Open momentary switch—open side (Closed side to MP1F) Remote System Reset(Not supported in Cooperative Model)I4A to 4D System Config 1 to 4 4A & 4B=0 (TP7K COM) 4C & 4D=1 (OPEN)System Mode – Collins CooperativeI4E to 4H System Config 5 to 8 Open (1) System Mode configuration – not assignedI4J IRS-A Aircraft main IRS IRS Data, Rx HI(Provisional)I4K IRS-B Aircraft main IRS IRS Data, Rx LO(Provisional)I5A, 5B, & 5DSDI 1, SDI 2, & SDI CommonAs per Collins documentationHPA Select Code for HGA Table 3–29. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection DetailsI/O From Top Plug Signal Name To Description
Page 3–5618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalI5F FWD Address, BIT 24 (LSB)1=no connection,0=Common (TP7K)Six digit Hex ID assigned by Inmarsat /EMS SATCOMI5G FWD Address, BIT 23I5H FWD Address, BIT 22I5J FWD Address, BIT 21I5K FWD Address, BIT 20I6A FWD Address, BIT 19I6B FWD Address, BIT 18I6C FWD Address, BIT 17I6D FWD Address, BIT 16I6E FWD Address, BIT 15I6F FWD Address, BIT 14I6G FWD Address, BIT 13I6H FWD Address, BIT 12I6J FWD Address, BIT 11I6K FWD Address, BIT 10I7A FWD Address, BIT 9 Table 3–29. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection DetailsI/O From Top Plug Signal Name To Description
Page 3–5718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalI7B FWD Address, BIT 8I7C FWD Address, BIT 7I7D FWD Address, BIT 6I7E FWD Address, BIT 5I7F FWD Address, BIT 4I7G FWD Address, BIT 3I7H FWD Address, BIT 2I7J FWD Address, BIT 1 (MSB)I7K FWD Address, CommonCommon GND connection for system and I/O configuration and FWD ID1. BSU Pin nomenclature for Mechanically-Steered Antennae (MA) is manufacturer dependent.2. “Other antenna types” (OA) represent either conformal or phased array antennae. Table 3–30. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection DetailsI/OFrom Middle PlugSignal Name To DescriptionO1A LED 1 Remote Status Panel—GreenHSD—Power On (Optional)O1B LED 2 Remote Status Panel—RedHSD—Fault (Optional)I/O1F LED Common Remote Status LED Panel and closed side of N.O. Remote Reset switch (if used)LED CommonO1G Maint Port Tx (Out) Maint Port serial data, DB9S-2Maintenance Laptop/PC, for Remote accessI1H Maint Port Rx (In) Maint Port serial data, DB9S-3I/O 1J Maint Port Signal GNDMaint Port serial data, DB9S-5 Table 3–29. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection DetailsI/O From Top Plug Signal Name To Description
Page 3–5818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalO2A Channel Card (CC) #1 RxDTE-1A, DB9S-2 User Mobile Packet Data (MPDS), RS-232, DTE-1AI2B CC #1 Tx DTE-1A, DB9S-3I2C CC #1 RTS DTE-1A, DB9S-7O2D CC #1 CTS DTE-1A, DB9S-8I2E CC #1 DTR DTE-1A, DB9S-4O2F CC #1 DSR DTE-1A, DB9S-6O2G CC #1 DCD DTE-1A, DB9S-1O2H CC #1 RI DTE-1A, DB9S-9I/O 2J CC #1 SGND DTE-1A, DB9S-5I4G BRI RX+ RJ45-3 User Data, ISDN–2 (Provisional)Refer to "User Interfaces – Cooperative Mode" on page 3-48I4H BRI RX- RJ45-6O4J BRI TX+ RJ45-4O4K BRI TX- RJ45-5I6A BRI RX+ RJ45-3 User Data, ISDN–1Refer to "User Interfaces – Cooperative Mode" on page 3-48I6B BRI RX- RJ45-6O6C BRI TX+ RJ45-4O6D BRI TX- RJ45-5I5G to 5K I/O CONFIG Pins 1 to 4See Table 3–26 System Data I/O Mode ConfigurationsI6G to 6K I/O CONFIG Pins 5 to 8Open (1) Data I/O Config – not assigned Table 3–30. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection DetailsI/OFrom Middle PlugSignal Name To Description
Page 3–5918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalNote: At SDU#1, connect TP12E to GNDD. Section IV: Multi-Channel Configuration Installation(1) Multi-Channel Configuration Installation Wiring NotesThis section provides detailed information on the external interface and system connections involved in the installation of an HSD-128 and HSD-X transceivers for Multi-Channel configuration operation.Table 3–33, Table 3–34, Table 3–35, and Figure 3–38 illustrate the interconnection and contact assignment details of a Multi-Channel HSD configuration. This section provides detailed information on cable loss considerations, the splitter for the receive path, and the combiner for the transmit path.I7A 10BASE-T Rx+ Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-3User Data, Ethernet 10BASE-T (Available in models 1110-A-0150, 1110-A-0160, and in units with Service Bulletin, 1110-SB-0004 accomplished)I7B 10BASE-T Rx-Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-6O7C 10BASE-T Tx+ Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-1O7D 10BASE-T Tx-Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-2OC1 RF Tx Output Antenna Subsystem-DLNACoax Cable, RF Transmit Table 3–31. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Bottom Plug Connection DetailsI/OFrom Bottom PlugSignal Name To DescriptionI2 +28 V dc HOT Aircraft Power Source, HOT+28 V dc supplyI3 +28 V dc Rtn GND Aircraft Power Source, RtnI8 Chassis GND Aircraft Ground Aircraft Chassis GroundI1 115 V ac HOT Aircraft Power Source, HOT115 V ac 400 Hz supplyI7 115 V ac COLD Aircraft Power Source, COLDI12 RF Rx Input RF Rx Splitter output port RF Receive from Antenna Subsystem Table 3–30. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection DetailsI/OFrom Middle PlugSignal Name To Description
Page 3–6018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(a) Multi-Channel Coaxial Cable Loss Considerations – Multi-ChannelWhen installing a Multi-Channel HSD configuration, the transmit loss between the HSD-X slaves and the HSD-128 master must be considered. This loss, taking into consideration the cables, the combiner, and the attenuator, should come as close as possible to 29.5 dB (as shown in Table 3–32). For an illustrated example, refer to Figure 3–17.Note: The installer should try to achieve 29.5 dB loss; ± 3 dB for all HSD-X slaves. (See Figure 3–17.) The loss is generally referred to as “HSD-X cable loss”, even though it includes the combiner and attenuator.Figure 3–17. HSD-X Coax Cable LossAfter installation, the actual calculated (or measured) loss between each HSD-X and the HSD should be included in the HSD-128 ORT or EEPROM configuration. Table 3–32. Coax Cable Losses – Multi-ChannelItem Loss (dB)Cable, HSD-X to combiner 3Combiner 3.5Cable, combiner to attenuator 2Attenuator 20Cable, attenuator to HSD-128 1Tota l: 2 9 .5
Page 3–6118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(b) HSD-128 Transceiver Multi-Channel Configuration InstallationsThe tables in this section provide all top, middle, and bottom plug, connection details for Stand-Alone Mode installations for the HSD-128 transceiver—specific to Multi-Channel HSD configurations. This section describes the general installation details and external interface connections that are the same for all operational modes and configurations of HSD and HSD-X transceivers. (c) Source/Destination Identification (SDI) – Multi-Channel Source/Destination Identification (SDI) is provided for the BSU and the HPA as per ARINC 741 specifications. Pins marked “0” are left open circuit and pins marked “1” are strapped on the airframe side of the connector to the pin assigned as “SDI Common” (TP5D). For this High Gain Antenna (HGA) HPA application, pin TP5B (“1”) should be strapped and TP5A (“0”) should be left open.Note: The logic for the SDI/WOW is explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. This SDI/WOW logic, where 0=open and 1=strapped to common, is the reverse to the logic applied to all other HSD and HSD-X connectors, Forward ID, System Config, and Data I/O Config, where 0=strapped to common and 1=open. (d) Maintenance Port Interface – Multi-ChannelBoth HSD and HSD-X transceivers have an RS-232 Maintenance Port interface that provides access to a maintenance utility program for data loading, system monitoring and testing purposes. Access to the HSD Maintenance Utility Program is achieved by connecting an RS-232, VT-100 terminal (PC or Laptop operating a terminal emulation program) to the RS-232 Maintenance Port. The HSD Maintenance port is available at the front of the HSD and at the rear ARINC 600 connector. Connection on the front of the HSD is accessible via a DB25S connector for local maintenance of the unit. Remote access is provided for cases where local access is unavailable. For remote access, install an accessible DB9S connector in the cabin area.Direct connection to the HSD-X’s front panel, maintenance port requires an HSD-X maintenance port cable. The front connector, maintenance port supports trace and data load functions and is a female, micro-D-type, M83513/04-B11N, or equivalent. As well, a permanent connector wired to the rear, middle-plug, of the ARINC-600 connector can be installed for remote access. Specifications and pinouts for this cable are provided in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1.Note: The front panel and remote connections to the maintenance port cannot be used simultaneously.Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for information on how to connect and use the maintenance port—including, equipment requirements, connection and cabling requirements, software loading instructions, and configuration details.
Page 3–6218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(e) Antenna Subsystem RF Interface – Multi-ChannelSeveral external RF parameters (such as cable losses and antenna gain), that must be delimited to ensure proper operation, dictate the HSD performance requirements. Table 3–33 defines these parameters and their expected values.(f) WOW Pin Wiring – Multi-ChannelThese Weight-On-Wheel (WOW) discretes are wired only if equivalent information is not strapped as being available to the SDU on an ARINC 429 input [for example, IRS or the Centralized Fault Display System (CFDS)].WOW wiring, for the HSD, is optional for system operation as the HSD already receives speed information for Doppler correction. However, if WOW wiring is not wired, normal maintenance must be disabled when speed or Doppler readings are greater than zero.The WOW1 and WOW2 pins are either left open circuit or they are connected to the airframe DC ground. The WOW Program Select (PGM) pin is either left open circuit or is connected to the Forward Address Common. The three ground states, defined for any pin are:• OPN: Open circuit• AFG: Airframe DC Ground• FAC: Fwd Address Common (TP7K)Resolve any conflict between WOW1 and WOW2 by assuming the aircraft is “in-air.” The interpretation of the state of the WOW1 and WOW2 pins is defined by the state of the WOW program select pin. Refer to Table 3–34 for details.1. Multi-Channel ConfigurationsLabeled as WOW1, WOW2, and WOW Program Select, these discretes are wired only if equivalent information is not strapped as being available to the SDU on an ARINC 429 input [for example, IRS or the Centralized Fault Display System (CFDS)]. Table 3–33. RF Parameters Definition – Multi-ChannelParameter Min. Value (dB) Max. Value (dB)Antenna Gain 8 17Antenna—DLNA Loss 0.1 0.3DLNA Gain 53 60DLNA Noise Figure 1.5 1.8DLNA—HSD-128 (BP12), including cables and splitter (Rx) Total Loss019DLNA—HSD-X (BP5), including cables and splitter (Rx) Total Loss524HSD-128—Antenna (Tx) Loss 1 2.5DLNA Insertion Loss (Tx to Antenna Port)–0.8
Page 3–6318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalWOW wiring is optional for system operation in Stand-Alone Mode installations as the HSD already receives speed information for Doppler correction. However, if WOW wiring is not wired, normal maintenance must be disabled when speed or Doppler readings are greater than zero.(g) Forward and Return Address IDs – Multi-ChannelFigure 3–18 provides an example of a Forward ID address. The Forward ID is a Hex number (example: $ABC123) that must be converted into a binary number for strapping. Table 3–34. WOW Pin Wiring Table – Multi-ChannelPin Name and LocationWOW1 WOW2 PGM Aircraft StatusTP3G TP3H TP3JAFG AFG FAC In-airOPN AFG FAC Not valid – Default in-airAFG OPN FAC Not valid – Default in-airOPN OPN FAC On-groundAFG AFG OPN On-groundOPN AFG OPN Not valid – Default in-airAFG OPN OPN Not valid – Default in-airOPN OPN OPN In-air
Page 3–6418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–18. Forward ID, Hex to Binary Conversion – Multi-Channel Note: A pin strapped to the same potential as T7K (Forward address common) is considered as a logical “0”, whereas an open circuit pin is considered as a logical “1”.
Page 3–6518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalNote: MSB is the Most Significant Bit and LSB is the Least Significant Bit.(h) Remote Status Panel – Multi-Channel (Optional)An optional “remote status panel” may be installed in installations where the HSD and/or any HSD-X units are located in inaccessible or remote locations. The installation of a “remote status panel” is recommended as it provides visual indications of each of the power, fault, and call status of each of the units. A “remote reset switch” for HSD transceivers can also be installed and located with the Remote Status Panel. Figure 3–19 illustrates a typical wiring diagram for the remote reset circuit. Note: HSD-X transceivers DO NOT support the use of the reset function. 1. HSD Remote Reset Switch Circuit RequirementsHSD transceivers support the installation of a Remote Reset Switch circuit as shown in Figure 3–19.The HSD Remote Reset circuit requires less than 100 ohms between TP1K (RESET) and MP1F(COM) to be asserted and greater than 10 kilohms to be de-asserted (include all cable and switch contact resistance).2. HSD Remote LED Driver Circuit RequirementsThe circuit requirements for the HSD Remote Status LED drivers are shown in Figure 3–20. Each LED driver circuit has a 200-ohm current limit resistor. The maximum cable resistance (including the forward and return paths) must not exceed 100 ohms to provide adequate current to the 5 volt LEDs (i.e. 10 mA minimum) at the remote status panel. It is recommended that the installer use shielded cables to provide a level of noise immunity.3. HSD-X Remote LED Driver Circuit RequirementsThe HSD-X unit’s Remote LED drivers are shown in Figure 3–21. The open collector transistors located in the HSD-X are capable of driving up to 500 mA of current—so either incandescent lamps or LED circuits with the appropriate current limits can be used. The example shown in Figure 3–21 shows an LED powered with a 28-volt source.
Page 3–6618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–19. HSD Remote Reset Circuit – Multi-ChannelFigure 3–20. HSD Remote LED Panel Circuit – Multi-ChannelFigure 3–21. HSD-X Remote Status LED Driver Circuits – Multi-Channel
Page 3–6718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(i) User Interfaces – Multi-ChannelTo facilitate user access to the HSD interfaces, install the following connectors in the appropriate cabin area. Note: Although the Ethernet interface is only supported by HSD-X transceivers, HSD transceiver models, PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160, and other models of HSD transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished, consider pre-wiring the cabin for all interfaces—even when installing an HSD transceiver that currently does not support the Ethernet interface. 1. ISDN Interface Install an RJ-45 interface connector in the cabin area for user connections to the ISDN interface. RJ-45 Connector Termination Details below describes the RJ-45 connector and cable termination.2. RS-232 Interface (MPDS)Install a DB9S interface connector in the cabin area for connection to the RS-232 interface. Refer to the HSD Interconnection Drawings for pinout designation.3. Ethernet Data Interface HSD transceiver models, part numbers 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 support the Ethernet interface. All other models of HSD transceivers must have service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished to support the Ethernet interface.All HSD-X transceivers support the Ethernet Data Interface. Install an RJ-45 interface connector in the cabin area for user access to the Ethernet interface. RJ-45 Connector Termination Details below describes the RJ-45 connector and cable termination.4. RJ-45 Connector Termination DetailsDetails relating to the RJ-45 cable terminations, required for both the ISDN and/or 10BASE-T services, are shown in Table 3–35 and Figure 3–22. Use LAN cables that meet flammability and TIA/EIA568-A CAT-5 requirements. Cables #922404(4 conductor) and # 922408 (8 conductor), as supplied by Electronics Cable Specialists, are acceptable. Equivalent substitutions from other manufacturers may be used.
Page 3–6818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–22. RJ-45 Connector Terminator Details – Multi-Channel5. System Configuration Pin Strapping – Multi-ChannelThe HSD adjusts its configuration according to the status of several strap pins on the rear ARINC 600 connector.Configuration pins are assigned based on system-mode-configuration selection and data input/output (I/O) requirements as shown in Table 3–36. Detailed pin assignment is shown in Table 3–37 and Table 3–38. Table 3–35. RJ-45 Wiring Details – Multi-ChannelSignalSERVICEEURO ISDN Ethernet 10BASE-TPinCablePinCableECS Other ECS OtherRX + 3 White White/Green 3 White White/Orange stripeRX−6 Blue Green 6 Green Orange/White stripe or solid OrangeTX+ 4 White Blue 1 White White/Green stripeTX−5 Orange White/Blue 2 Brown Green/White stripe or solid Green
Page 3–6918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalNote: The logic for the System Configuration pins is reverse to the logic explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. For System Configuration pins, 0=strapped to common and 1=open. • Pins marked “0” are signaled by strapping to “Fwd Address Common” (T7K).• Pins marked “1” are signaled by an open circuit—no connection.• Configurations resulting in all “1’s” are invalid.6. System Mode Strap Pins Coding – Multi-ChannelThe HSD transceiver must be externally strapped according to its intended operational configuration mode. Table 3–37 illustrates the system pin strapping for all HSD operational modes and configurations.Note: The logic for the System Mode pins is reverse to the logic explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. For System Mode pins, 0=strapped to common and 1=open. • Pins marked “0” are signaled by strapping to “Fwd Address Common” (TP7K). Table 3–36. Configuration Pin Summary – Multi-ChannelPin # Name FunctionTP4A to D System Config #1 to #4 System Mode (See Table 3–27)TP4E to H System Config #5 to #8 Not assigned (set to"1")MP5G to K Data I/O Config #1 to #4 NOTE: Data I/O Mode (See Table 3–28)MP6G to K Data I/O Config #5 to #8 Not assigned (set to"1") Table 3–37. System Mode Pin Strapping – Multi-ChannelSystem ModesPin StatusTP4A TP4B TP4C TP4D1234INVALID 1111Stand Alone 0101Selective, SAT-906 1101Selective, MCS-3000 1011Selective, MCS-6000 1001Selective, MCS-7000 0111Honeywell Combined 1110Reserved 1100Collins Cooperative 0011Multi-Channel 0001
Page 3–7018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal• Pins marked “1” are signaled by an open circuit—no connection.• Configuration resulting in all “1’s” is Invalid.7. User Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Multi-ChannelData I/O Mode Pin strapping is only required for HSD transceivers models, PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 or other HSD models that have Data I/O Type 2 cards installed via Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0004.The following settings allow placing restrictions on the way both channels are used. If the user has no specific requirements then it is recommended to leave both channels as “Unrestricted.”In HSD transceivers with two channel cards, both channels are accessible for Swift64 Mobile ISDN via the ISDN port on a first come-first served basis. All four modes, as detailed in Table 3–38, are also described in Figure 3–23.In units where all Data I/O services are available (including Ethernet), the following statements are valid:• The channel cards are pooled, which means that no particular card is operated in one of the selected modes.• If one channel card becomes inoperative, and there is a conflicting configuration (for example, 1 Reserved, 1 SCPC – for Swift64 Mobile ISDN), then the remaining card operates in "Unrestricted" mode.• A “restricted” channel is not handled by the Data I/O Controller, which results in the channel not being accessible for SCPC via Ethernet or for MPDS via RS232 or Ethernet.• An SCPC channel is accessible for SCPC via Ethernet.• An MPDS channel is accessible for MPDS via RS232 and Ethernet.• An “unrestricted” channel is accessible for SCPC via Ethernet and MPDS via RS232 and Ethernet.Note: Use a ”Restricted” Data I/O Mode if only ISDN service is available.
Page 3–7118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalNote: (‘0’ = FWD Address Common, ‘1’ No Connection) Table 3–38. Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Multi-ChannelPin Status Data I/O ModeMP5G MP5H MP5J MP5K1111Invalid11101 Restricted, 1 Unrestricted11011 Restricted, 1 SCPC11001 Restricted, 1 MPDS10112 Restricted (ISDN only)10102 SCPC10011 SCPC, 1 Unrestricted10002 MPDS01111 MPDS, 1 Unrestricted01101 SCPC, 1 MPDS0 1 0 1 2 Unrestricted (recommended if no specific user requirements)0000Reserved
Page 3–7218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–23. User Data I/O Mode Configurations – Multi-Channel(j) Multi-Channel Configuration Connection DetailsThe tables in this section provide all top, middle, and bottom plug connection details for Multi-Channel Configuration installations of HSD-128 transceivers and HSD-X transceiver extensions.
Page 3–7318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–39. HSD-128 Multi-Channel Configuration ARINC 600 Top Plug ConnectionsI/O From Top Plug Signal Name To DescriptionI1A Multi-control A TP3E Multi-control from control cardI1B Multi-control B TP3F Multi-control from control cardI2A BSU Top/Port BITE A (See Note 1)Mech. Steered Antenna (MA): BSU, Pin G1 or W or Other Antenna2 (OA): BSU, PORT-W & Starboard-P ARINC Tx-HI BITE from Top/Port BSUI2B BSU Top/Port BITE BMA: BSU, Pin H or X, or OA: BSU, PORT-X & STBD-RARINC Tx-LO BITE from Top/Port BSUI2C BSU Starboard (STBD) BITE AMA: Not required OA: BSU, PORT-P & STBD-WARINC Tx-HI BITE from STBD BSUI2D BSU STBD BITE BMA: Not required OA: BSU, PORT-R & STBD-XARINC Tx-LO BITE from STBD BSUI3A Top/Port HPA MUTE AMA: Not required OA: BSU, PORT-GHPA Mute-A, Port BSUI3B Top/Port HPA MUTE BMA: Not required OA: BSU, PORT-HHPA Mute-B, Port BSUI3C STBD HPA MUTE AMA: Not required OA: BSU, STBD GHPA Mute-A, STBD BSUI3D STBD HPA MUTE BMA: Not required OA: BSU, STBD-HHPA Mute-B, STBD BSUO3E OUT Multi-Control AIN Multi Ctrl A (TP1A), and MA: BSU, Pin A or T, or OA: BSU, PORT-T & STBD-TMulti-Control-HI to HSD & Antenna SubsystemO2E A OUT All slave HSD-Xs TP6A ARINC 429 Tx-HI HSD-X crosstalk broadcastO2F B OUT All slave HSD-Xs TP6B ARINC 429 Tx-Lo HSD-X crosstalk broadcastI2H A IN HSD-X slave 1 TP6C ARINC 429 Tx-HI HSD-X crosstalk chainI2J B IN HSD-X slave 1 TP6D ARINC 429 Tx-Lo HSD-X crosstalk chain
Page 3–7418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalO3F OUT Multi-Control BIN Multi Ctrl B (TP1B), and MA: BSU, Pin B or U, or OA: BSU, PORT-U & STBD-UMulti-Control-LO to HSD & Antenna SubsystemI2K Remote Reset Normally open momentary switch—open side. (Closed side to MP1F)Remote System ResetI3G WOW 1 TP3G Weight On Wheel, as defined in Note 40 of ARINC 741, Part 1.I3H WOW 2 TP3HI3J WOW Program SelectTP3JI4A, 4B, 4C, 4DSystem Config 1 to 44A, 4B, & 4C=0 (TP7K common)4D=1(Open) Multi-Channel Mode ConfigurationsI4E to 4H System Config 5 to 8Open (1) System Configuration - not assignedI4J IRS-A Aircraft main IRS IRS 429 Data, Rx HII4K IRS-B Aircraft main IRS IRS 429 Data, Rx LOI5A SDI 1 Not connected HPA Select Code for HGAI5B SDI 2 SDI common (TP5D) HPA Select Code for HGAI5D SDI Common SDI 2 (TP5B) SDI Common for HPA select codesI5F FWD Address, BIT 24 (LSB)1=no connection,0=Common (TP7K)Six digit Hex ID assigned by Inmarsat /EMS SATCOMI5G FWD Address, I5H FWD Address, I5J FWD Address, I5K FWD Address, BIT 20I6A FWD Address, I6B FWD Address, I6C FWD Address, I6D FWD Address, I6E FWD Address, Table 3–39. HSD-128 Multi-Channel Configuration ARINC 600 Top Plug ConnectionsI/O From Top Plug Signal Name To Description
Page 3–7518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal1BSU Pin nomenclature for Mechanically-Steered Antennae (MA) is manufacturer dependent. 2“Other antenna types” (OA) represent either conformal or phased array antennae.I6F FWD Address, I6G FWD Address, I6H FWD Address, I6J FWD Address, I6K FWD Address, I7A FWD Address, I7B FWD Address, I7C FWD Address, I7D FWD Address, I7E FWD Address, I7F FWD Address, I7G FWD Address, I7H FWD Address, I7J FWD Address, BIT 1 (MSB)I7K FWD Address, CommonCommon GND connection for system and I/O configuration and IC1 RF in Tx Attenuator, from HSD-X slavesCoax Cable, RF Transmit Table 3–40. HSD-128 Multi-Channel Configuration, ARINC 600 Middle Plug ConnectionsI/OFrom Middle PlugSignal Name To DescriptionO1A LED 1 Remote Status Panel—GreenHSD—Power OnO1B LED 2 Remote Status Panel—RedHSD—Fault Table 3–39. HSD-128 Multi-Channel Configuration ARINC 600 Top Plug ConnectionsI/O From Top Plug Signal Name To Description
Page 3–7618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalO1F LED Common Remote Status LED Panel, and closed side of N.O. Remote Reset SwitchLED CommonO1G Maint Port Tx (OUT)Maint Port serial data, DB9S-2Maintenance computer, for “Remote” accessI1H Maint Port Rx (IN) Maint Port serial data, DB9S-3I/O1J Maint Port Signal Ground.Maint Port serial data, DB9S-5 O3A CC (channel card)#2 RxDTE-1B, DB9S-2 or DB25P-3User Mobile Packet Data (MPDS), RS-232, DTE-1BI3B CC #2 Tx DTE-1B, DB9S-3 or DB25P-2I3C CC #2 RTS DTE-1B, DB9S-7 or DB25P-4O3D CC #2 CTS DTE-1B, DB9S-8 or DB25P-5I3E CC #2 DTR DTE-1B, DB9S-4 or DB25P-20O3F CC #2 DSR DTE-1B, DB9S-6 or DB25P-6O3G CC #2 CD DTE-1B, DB9S-1 or DB25P-8O3H CC #2 RI DTE-1B, DB9S-9 or DB25P-22I/O3J CC #2 SGND DTE-1B, DB9S-5 or DB25P-7I4G BRI Rx+ISDN, RJ45-3 User Data, ISDN–2Refer to "User Interfaces – Multi-Channel" on page 3-67I4H BRI Rx-ISDN, RJ45-6O4J BRI Tx+ISDN, RJ45-4O4K BRI Tx-ISDN, RJ45-5I5G to 5K I/O CONFIG Pins 1 to 4See Figure 3–8 System Data I/O Mode Configurations Table 3–40. HSD-128 Multi-Channel Configuration, ARINC 600 Middle Plug ConnectionsI/OFrom Middle PlugSignal Name To Description
Page 3–7718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalI6G to 6K I/O CONFIG 5 to 8 Open (1) System Data I/O Configurations – not assignedI6A BRI Rx+ISDN, RJ45-3 User Data, ISDN–1Refer to "User Interfaces – Multi-Channel" on page 3-67I6B BRI Rx -ISDN, RJ45-6O6C BRI Tx+ISDN, RJ45-4O6D BRI Tx-ISDN, RJ45-5I7A 10BASE-T Rx+Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-3User Data, Ethernet 10BASE-TI7B 10BASE-T Rx-Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-6O7C 10BASE-T Tx+Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-1O7D 10BASE-T Tx-Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-2OC1 RF, Tx Output Antenna Subsystem-DLNA-J3Coax Cable, RF Transmit Table 3–41. HSD-128 Multi-Channel Configuration ARINC 600 Bottom Plug ConnectionsI/OFrom Bottom PlugSignal Name To DescriptionI2 +28 V dc HOT Aircraft Power Source, HOT+28 V dc supplyI3 +28 V dc return GND Aircraft Power Source, returnI8 Chassis GND Aircraft Ground Aircraft Chassis GroundI1 115 V ac HOT Aircraft Power Source, HOT115 V ac 400 Hz supplyI7 115 V ac COLD Aircraft Power Source, COLDI12 RF Rx Input Splitter output from Antenna Subsystem –DLNACoax Cable, RF Receive Table 3–40. HSD-128 Multi-Channel Configuration, ARINC 600 Middle Plug ConnectionsI/OFrom Middle PlugSignal Name To Description
Page 3–7818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(k) HSD-X Installations – Multi-ChannelThe tables in this section provide all top, middle, and bottom plug, connection details for of HSD-Xs integrated with the HSD-128 transceiver in Multi-Channel configurations. Table 3–42. HSD-X Top Plug ConnectionsI/OFrom Top PlugSignal Name To DescriptionI4A, 4B, 4C, 4DSystem Configuration 1 to 44A, 4B, 4C, 4D = 1 (Open) System Configuration ReservedI6A HSD-X/HSD I/F Bus A InHSD-128 Master TP2E ARINC 429 Rx-HI Master Crosstalk BroadcastI6B HSD-X/HSD I/F Bus B InHSD-128 Master TP2F ARINC 429 Rx-LO Master Crosstalk BroadcastO6C HSD-X/HSD I/F Bus A OutRefer to the interconnection diagram 1110-B-0419ARINC 429 Tx-HI HSD-X Crosstalk RingO6D HSD-X/HSD I/F Bus B OutRefer to the interconnection diagram 1110-B-0419ARINC 429 Tx-LO HSD-X Crosstalk RingI8A Input Bus A In Refer to the interconnection diagram 1110-B-0419ARINC 429 Rx-HI HSD-X Crosstalk RingI8B Input Bus B In Refer to the interconnection diagram 1110-B-0419ARINC 429 Rx-LO HSD-X Crosstalk RingI9D Fwd ID Common Common GND connection for system, I/O configuration, and FWD IDI10A Fwd ID #1 (MSB) 1 = no connection,0 = common (TP9D)Six digit Hex ID assigned by Inmarsat / EMS SATCOMI10B Fwd ID #2I10C Fwd ID #3I10D Fwd ID #4I11A Fwd ID #5I11B Fwd ID #6I11C Fwd ID #7I11D Fwd ID #8I12A Fwd ID #9I12B Fwd ID #10I12C Fwd ID #11
Page 3–7918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–24. HSD-X Top Plug Connections (Illustrated)I12D Fwd ID #12I13A Fwd ID #13I13B Fwd ID #14I13C Fwd ID #15I13D Fwd ID #16I14A Fwd ID #17I14B Fwd ID #18I14C Fwd ID #19I14D Fwd ID #20I15A Fwd ID #21I15B Fwd ID #22I15C Fwd ID #23I15D Fwd ID #24 (LSB) Table 3–42. HSD-X Top Plug ConnectionsI/OFrom Top PlugSignal Name To Description
Page 3–8018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–43. HSD-X Middle Plug Connections– Multi-ChannelI/OFrom Middle PlugSignal Name To DescriptionO1A Maint Port Tx Maint Port serial data, DB9S-2Maintenance Computer, for “Remote” access, RS-232I1B Maint Port Rx Maint Port serial data, DB9S-3I1C Maint Port GND Maint Port serial data, DB9S-5I1D MPDS SGND DTE-1, DB9S-5 or DB25P-7User Mobile Packet Data (MPDS), RS-232, DTE-1A O2A MPDS Rx DTE-1, DB9S-2 or DB25P-3I2B MPDS Tx DTE-1, DB9S-3 or DB25P-2I2C MPDS RTS DTE-1, DB9S-7 or DB25P-4O2D MPDS CTS DTE-1, DB9S-8 or DB25P-5I3C MPDS DTR DTE-1, DB9S-4 or DB25P-20O3D MPDS DSR DTE-1, DB9S-6 or DB25P-6O4C MPDS CD DTE-1, DB9S-1 or DB25P-8O4D MPDS RI DTE-1, DB9S-9 or DB25P-22O10A Channel Available Discrete Channel AvailableO10B Service Ready Discrete System readyO10C HSD-X Fail Discrete An “ON” state indicates that the HSD-X LRU has failedI10D Transmit Disable Discrete An “ON” state commands the HSD-X LRU to turn off its transmit carrier.I11A to 11CI/O Config 1 to 3 As per 245 System Data I/O Mode ConfigurationsI13A ISDN BRI RX+ ISDN, RJ45-3 User Data, ISDN-1 Refer to "User Interfaces – Multi-Channel" on page 3-67I13B ISDN BRI RX- ISDN, RJ45-6O13C ISDN BRI TX+ ISDN, RJ45-4O13D ISDN BRI TX- ISDN, RJ45-5
Page 3–8118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalNote: MP11D: Reserved, 0 = FWD Address CommI15A 10BASE-T RX+ Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-3User Data, Ethernet 10BASE-TI15B 10BASE-T RX- Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-6O15C 10BASE-T TX+ Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-1O15D 10BASE-T TX- Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-2 Table 3–44. HSD-X Bottom Plug – Multi-ChannelI/OFrom Bottom PlugSignal Name To DescriptionO 1 RF, Tx Output Combiner to HSD-128 Coax Cable, RF TransmitI 2 115 V ac HOT Aircraft Power Source, HOT115 V ac 400 Hz supplyI 3 Chassis GND Aircraft Ground Aircraft Chassis GroundI 4 115 V ac COLD Aircraft Power Source, COLD115 V ac 400 Hz supplyI 5 RF Rx Input Splitter from Antenna Subsystem-DLNACoax Cable, RF Receive Table 3–45. HSD-X I/O Data Strapping– Multi-ChannelMP11A MP11B MP11C I/O Config 111Invalid110Restricted (disable Data I/O)101MPDS (Future)100SCPC (M4) only011Unrestricted (recommended if there are no specific user requirements)010Not Assigned001Not Assigned000Reserved Table 3–43. HSD-X Middle Plug Connections– Multi-ChannelI/OFrom Middle PlugSignal Name To Description
Page 3–8218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–46. Inter-LRU RF Connection Considerations for Attenuators– Multi-ChannelFunction From To Frequency (MHz) Loss VSWRHSD-X1 Tx HSD-X1 BP1 HSD-128 TPC1 1626.5-1660.5 29.5dB ± 3.0dB1.5:1, maxHSD-X2 Tx HSD-X2 BP1 HSD-128 TPC1 1626.5-1660.5 29.5dB ± 3.0dB1.5:1, maxHSD-X1 Rx DLNA HSD-X1 BP5 1525.0-1559.0 5.0dB to 24.0dB1.5:1, maxHSD-X2 Rx DLNA HSD-X2 BP5 1525.0-1559.0 5.0dB to 24.0 dB1.5:1, maxHSD-128 Rx DLNA HSD-128 BP12 1525.0-1559.0 0.0dB to 19.0dB1.5:1, max
Page 3–8318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal9. Outline/Installation and Interconnection/Contact Assignment DiagramsThis section contains the outline and installation drawings and interconnection and contact assignment diagrams for all installation modes and configurations of HSD and HSD-X transceivers.All foldout pages are odd-numbered and “not-backed” for print production purposes. A. Outline/Installation DiagramsFigure 3–25 and Figure 3–26 illustrate the physical characteristics of the HSD transceiver and provides installation data for the unit. Figure 3–27 and Figure 3–28 illustrate the physical characteristics of the HSD-X transceiver and provides installation data for the unit.B. Interconnection/Contact Assignment DrawingsFigure 3–29 illustrates the interconnection details for Stand-Alone Mode HSD Transceivers.Figure 3–30 provides the contact assignments for Stand-Alone Mode HSD Transceivers.Figure 3–31 illustrates the interconnection details for Combined/Selective Mode HSD Transceivers.Figure 3–32 provides the contact assignments for Combined/Selective Mode HSD Transceivers.Figure 3–33 illustrates the interconnection details for Cooperative Mode HSD Transceivers.Figure 3–34 provides the contact assignments for Cooperative Mode HSD Transceivers.Figure 3–35 and Figure 3–36 illustrate the interconnection details for Multi-Channel HSD configurations.Figure 3–37 and Figure 3–38 provide the contact assignments for Multi-Channel HSD configurations.
Page 3–8418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalBlank Page
Page 3–85 / blank back18 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–25 (Sheet 1). HSD Outline and Installation Drawing - 1110-E-0001, Rev D
Page 3–87 / blank back18 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–26 (Sheet 2). HSD Outline and Installation Drawing - 1110-E-0001, Rev D
Page 3–89 / blank back18 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–27 (Sheet 1). HSD-X Outline and Installation Drawing - 1110-E-0401, Rev 1
Page 3–91 / blank back18 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–28 (Sheet 2). HSD-X Outline and Installation Drawing - 1110-E-0401, Rev 1
Page 3–93 / blank back18 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–29 (Sheet 1). Stand-Alone Mode HSD System Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0019, Rev F
Page 3–95 / blank back18 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–30 (Sheet 2). Stand-Alone Mode HSD System Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0019, Rev F
Page 3–97 / blank back18 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–31 (Sheet 1). HSD Selective/Combined Mode Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0081, Rev D
Page 3–99 / blank back18 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–32 (Sheet 2). HSD Selective/Combined Mode Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0081, Rev D
Page 3–101 / blank back18 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–33 (Sheet 1). HSD Cooperative Mode Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0156, Rev 3
Page 3–103 / blank back18 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–34 (Sheet 2). HSD Cooperative Mode Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0156, Rev 3
Page 3–105 / blank back18 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–35 (Sheet 1). HSD-128 Multi-Channel Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0419, Rev C
Page 3–107 / blank back18 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–36. (Sheet 2). HSD-128 Multi-Channel Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0419, Rev C
Page 3–109 / blank back18 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–37 (Sheet 3). HSD-128 Multi-Channel Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0419, Rev C
Page 3–111 / blank back18 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 3–38 (Sheet 4). HSD-128 Multi-Channel Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0419, Rev C
Page 4–118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalTEST AND FAULT ISOLATION1. IntroductionThis section provides the information required to determine the operational readiness of the HSD and HSD-X transceivers and to aid service personnel in diagnosing system faults.The operational and diagnostic tests described in this section require using the HSD and HSD-X transceivers built-in diagnostic tool referred to as the HSD maintenance utility program. This section provides detailed descriptions of the HSD maintenance utility program menus, reports, and basic user instructions. Refer to page "HSD Maintenance Utility Program" on page 4-3 for maintenance port cabling details.Note: Depending on the version of software installed, the maintenance utility program report and menu screens displayed may differ from those shown as examples in this manual.
Page 4–218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal2. Operational and Diagnostic TestingA. GeneralUsually, units require testing for one of the reasons listed below:• To verify the operational readiness of the unit during and after installation on an aircraft.• To verify that a fault exists and produce system reports for troubleshooting purposes.• To verify the operational readiness of repaired LRUs during re-installation on an aircraft.This section presents software loading and test and fault isolation procedures for the HSD and HSD-X transceivers. All test and load procedures require using the HSD maintenance utility program, which is accessed by connecting to the maintenance port of the unit.B. Test and Fault Isolation Equipment RequirementsTable 4–1 lists the equipment required to access the HSD maintenance utility program and perform operational and diagnostic testing and software loads on the HSD and HSD-X transceivers.Table 4–2 lists the optional equipment or information that, although not required, may increase test efficiency or allow for optional diagnostic procedures. Equivalent substitutions may be used. Table 4–1. List of Required Test EquipmentItem Equipment Specification QuantityComputer Standard VT-100 386 CPU, 20-MHz or higher1VT-100 terminal emulation programHyperTerminal©, ProComm Plus©, or equivalentSerial communication program using an RS-232 port1Cable, maintenance port interface cable Special HSD units (See Figure 4–3)HSD-X units (See Figure 4–4)Remote access: maximum length 25 ft (Measured from the ARINC 600 connector to the DB9 breakout connector)Front Panel access: maximum length 50 ft 1Multimeter Standard – 1General purpose toolsetStandard – 1Software load program Special PN 1110-SW-1021 1HSD/HSD-X software filesSpecial As specified in applicable service bulletinsAs required
Page 4–318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalC. HSD Maintenance Utility ProgramThis section describes the HSD maintenance port utility program and provides the connection and cabling details required to access and use the program.(1) General OverviewA maintenance utility program, built into the HSD and HSD-X transceiver’s operational software, provides a system interface for fault isolation and diagnostic procedures. Connection to this program is made through the RS-232 maintenance port interface. To use the HSD Maintenance Utility Program, an RS-232, VT-100 terminal (PC or Laptop operating a terminal emulation program) must be connected to the HSD or HSD-X transceiver. The maintenance port on the front panel of HSD transceivers provides a direct connection to the HSD maintenance utility program using a DB25S connector. Optionally, remote cabin access is possible using a DB9S connector via the ARINC 600 connector. Direct connection to the HSD-X’s front panel, maintenance port requires an HSD-X maintenance port cable. The front connector, maintenance port supports trace and data load functions and is a female, micro-D-type, M83513/04-B11N, or equivalent. As well, a permanent connector wired to the rear, middle-plug, maintenance port connector can be installed for remote access. A description of the HSD-X maintenance port pins is provided in 305.For testing and monitoring of all components of a Multi-Channel HSD configuration, access to all units in the system is achieved by using a single terminal (PC or Laptop) connected to the Maintenance Port of the HSD-128 Transceiver. Communication with any installed HSD-Xs installed in the system is possible by passing through the HSD’s Maintenance Facility when operating in “console-mode.” Figure 4–1 illustrates the Maintenance Port Facility in a Multi-Channel configuration.Although system monitoring is possible using the “console-mode” feature, software updates, if required, must be loaded directly to the HSD-128 and each HSD-X via their respective maintenance port. Table 4–2. List of Optional Test EquipmentItem Equipment Specification QuantityService Provider Information PackageSpecial Inmarsat service provider 1Internet access Standard Inmarsat Swift64 high-speed-data1High speed data terminal Setup GuideSpecial MN-1110-10048 1Time Domain RefectometerStandard – 1
Page 4–418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–1. Multi-Channel Maintenance Port Access(2) Connection RequirementsThis section describes specific cabling requirement needed to connect to and use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility program.(a) Cabling NotesThe HSD and HSD-X transceivers provide two options for physical connection to the HSD maintenance port and utility program: direct connection and remote connection. Table 4–3, Table 4–4, Figure 4–2, and Figure 4–3 provide cabling details for the HSD transceiver for both direct and remote connection types. Select one of the connection options below to access the HSD maintenance utility program. Table 4–5 and Figure 4–4 provide cabling details for the HSD-X transceiver for both direct and remote connection types. Select one of the connection options below to access the HSD maintenance utility program. Note: The direct and remote connection points to the HSD maintenance port cannot be used simultaneously. Table 4–3. Remote Maintenance Port Access Cabling (HSD)Remote AccessPin DefinitionARINC Connector (Rear)Remote (DB9S)Cable (See Figure 4–2)Computer (DB9P)Maint Port SGND (MP1J) 5 5Maint Port Rx (MP1H) 3 3Maint Port Tx (MP1G) 2 2
Page 4–518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(b) Maintenance Port Cable AssemblyHSD maintenance cable connections may vary in length, type of connection used, and pinouts—depending on the access point used.The cable assembly for HSD transceivers assumes that the computer’s COM Port interface is a 9-Pin, D-Sub connector (DB9S). Cable assembly details for HSD transceivers are presented in Figure 4–2 and Figure 4–3. The cable assembly required for HSD-X transceivers is presented in Figure 4–4.Note: The maximum cable length, shown in Figure 4–2 and Figure 4–3, assumes that the length is measured from the ARINC 600 connector to the DB9 breakout connector. Table 4–4. Front-Panel Maintenance Port Access Cabling (HSD)Front Panel AccessPin Definition Front PanelDB25S HSD Maintenance Cable ConnectorDB25PCable (See Figure 4–3)ComputerDB9PMaint Port SGND 10 10 5Maint Port Rx 12 12 3112 Table 4–5. HSD-X Maintenance Port Pin DescriptionsFunction Pin HDS-X In/Out Signal TypeData Loader in A 1 – ReservedData Loader in B 2 – ReservedSpare 3 – –Data Loader out A 4 – ReservedData Loader out B 5 – ReservedSpare 6 – –Data Loader Continuity Link (A) 7 – ReservedMaint Port TD 8 Out RS-232Maint Port GND 9 GND RS-232Maint Port RD 10 In RS-232Data Loader Continuity Link (B) 11 – ReservedATE Reserved 12 – ATEATE Reserved 13 GND ATEATE Reserved 14 – ATEATE Reserved 15 – ATE
Page 4–618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–2. Remote Access, Maintenance Cable (HSD)Figure 4–3. Front Panel Access, Maintenance Cable (HSD)
Page 4–718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–4. HSD-X Front-Panel, Maintenance Port Cable (c) Interface RequirementsA standard VT100 compatible terminal running an emulator program (such as HyperTerminal, ProComm Plus, or another similar serial communication package) provides the user interface to the HSD maintenance utility program. The RS-232 connection settings for HSD and HSD-X maintenance ports are the same. Refer to Table 4–6 for the recommended terminal connection settings.(3) Accessing the Maintenance Utility ProgramAccess to the maintenance utility program menus is password protected. Each password permits access to a different level of program functionality. This document only describes the two password-protected access levels required to perform operational testing and verification, software updates, and the basic system monitoring and troubleshooting procedures provided in this manual: End User and Field Representative. Table 4–6. Terminal Connection SettingsParameter SettingCharacter Format ASCIIBaud Rate 19200 bpsNo. of bits 8Parity NoneStop bits 1Flow Control None
Page 4–818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(a) End User Access: Level 1 – Password: MENUThis limited-access level is for anyone without technical training on the product. It provides read-only access to help users diagnose problems with the assistance of product support personnel.(b) Field Representative Access: Level 2 – Password: MAINTThis level is for trained original equipment manufacturer (O.E.M.) installers and product support personnel. This access level supports “read’” and limited “write” capabilities. Users are able to disable/mask/clear faults, change satellite or LES preferences, view and modify certain EEPROM parameters, and perform other maintenance or upgrade functions.(4) Using the HSD Maintenance Utility ProgramThis section describes the basic operating instructions for using and navigating the HSD maintenance utility program.(a) Entering Passwords• For untrained users use Level 1 access: Type menu, and then press Enter.• For trained technicians and product support personnel use Level 2 access: Type maint, and then press Enter.Note: The typed password does not appear on the screen.(b) Navigating the HSD Maintenance Utility Program• To scroll through the available menus press Ctrl+N.• To go to the previous menu, press Ctrl+O.• To refresh the menu screen or exit from a Reports Menu press ESC.(c) Selecting MENU Items• To enable test or data entry functions, press the letter associated with the menu items. When a menu item is selected, the application may prompt the user for additional inputs or selections. (d) Selecting Report Items• To open the list of possible system reports, press the equals sign (=).A list of report items appears. Active reports show as toggled “ON.” Inactive reports show as toggled “OFF.” • To activate a report item, type the report item number and then press Enter.Note: Multiple report items can be activated at the same time; however, you must type and enter each report item number separately.•To turn “OFF” individual, active report items, type the report item number you want to toggle off, and then press Enter.•To turn “OFF” all active report items, press the equals sign (=) to display the report item list, and then press X.
Page 4–918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(5) Menu DescriptionsThis section describes the menus and menu items available in the HSD maintenance utility program in Level 1 access (using the MENU password) and Level 2 access (using the MAINT password) based on control processor software version 4.5 and 7.0. The differences between version 4.5 and 7.0 are noted within the examples. All menus and items that appear in Level 1 also appear in Level 2. No additional menus or menu items were added with the release of Version 7.5, Control Processor software.Note: Depending on the version of software and configuration mode installed, the actual menus and screen displays in “live” systems may differ slightly from the illustrations provided in this manual. (a) Level 1 Menu Selections (Password: MENU)Figure 4–5 shows all menus available to Level 1 users for control-processor software version 4.5 to 7.0. Menu items added or changed in version 7.0, control processor software are highlighted in bold text. No additional menus or menu items were added with the release of Version 7.5, Control Processor software.Figure 4–5. Level 1 MENU SelectionsNote: Menu 3, item O ‘list ORT’ was added in control processor software version 7.0. MENU1 FIRMWARE V7.0Y explain hpa error status<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports MENU2 FIRMWARE V7.0N annotate log file L re-enter logon passwordV get firmware versions Z reset HSD-128<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports MENU 3 FIRMWARE V7.0L list EEPROM S list event logF list call log O list ORT<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports MENU 4 FIRMWARE V7.0Q channel card forward ID's<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports
Page 4–1018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(b) Level 2 Menu Selections (Password: MAINT)Figure 4–6 through Figure 4–12 show all menus and menu items available in Level 2, menu options in control processor software, version 7.0. Menu items added in version 7.0, control processor software are highlighted in bold. Where applicable, any items that were deleted in version 7.0 are described and noted below each menu. No additional menus or menu items were added with the release of Version 7.5, Control Processor software.Figure 4–6. Level 2: Menu 1 Figure 4–7. Level 2: Menu 2 Figure 4–8. Level 2: Menu 3 Note: In control processor software, version 7.0, menu 3, item N ‘serial number’ was removed. MENU1 FIRMWARE V7.0X override forward id L test LEDsY explain hpa error status S set hcm attenuatorR hcm RF threshold<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports MENU2 FIRMWARE V7.0A set veh-relative azimuth E set veh-relative elevationK desired az veh-rel velocity R resume automatic steeringT enter time of day N annotate log fileL re-enter logon password V get firmware versionsZ reset HSD-128 S set satellite longitude<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports MENU 3 FIRMWARE V7.0L list EEPROM S list event logM misc. EEPROM parameter F list call log O list ORT P ocean region parameterI set all LES id's <CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports
Page 4–1118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–9. Level 2: Menu10 Figure 4–10. Level 2: Menu 13 Figure 4–11. Level 2: Menu 14 MENU 4 FIRMWARE V7.0Q channel card forward ID's F force spot beam selectionO set Ocean Region S change spot beamJ toggle ISDN connection M report MUX stats<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reportsLevel 2: Menu 4 MENU10 FIRMWARE V7.0L simul INS lat G simul INS longH simul INS heading T simul INS true trackP simul INS pitch R simul INS rollS simul INS speed A activate all simul wordsX deactivate all simul words C simul port ACU statusB simul sb ACU status M activate antenna status wordsN deactivate antenna status words<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports MENU 13 FIRMWARE V7.0T query DATA IO elapsed time V query DATA IO versionS query DATA IO services C query DATA IO config pinsF DATA IO fault logging level X DATA IO console mode<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports MENU 14 FIRMWARE V7.0N num entries in call table L list call tableT get call table<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports
Page 4–1218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 4–12. Level 2, Menu 15 Figure 4–13. Level 2, Menu 18 Note: In control processor software, version 7.0, Menu 18 is available when the terminal category is set to HSD-X Network, HSD-X Antenna, or Viper configurations. (6) Menu Item DescriptionsThis section provides a brief description of the Level 2, maintenance-utility-program menu items used for test and fault isolation procedures. Although this section only provides illustrations and descriptions for Level 2 access, descriptions of all Level 1 access menu items shown in Figure 4–5 are covered. (All Level 1 menus are included in Level 2 Menus.)In active HSD systems, menu screens display the firmware version.Note: Depending on the version of software installed, the number of channels cards in the system, and the HSD configuration mode, the menu and report items available to users may differ slightly from the illustrations shown and described in this document. (a) Menu 1Figure 4–14 shows the HSD maintenance utility program Menu 1 screen display. Table 4–7 describes the items available in Menu 1.In control processor software, version 7.0, the following changes were made to menu 3 selections (delta between version 4.5 and 7.0). No additional menu items were added with the release of Version 7.5, Control Processor software.• Added menu items, S ‘set hcm attenuator’ and R ‘ hcm RF threshold’ MENU 15 FIRMWARE V7.0V request channel card versions D channel card serial number<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports MENU 18 FIRMWARE V7.0X HSD-X slave console mode B HSD-X slave cable lossL list HSD-X slave cable loss V get HSD-X firmware version<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports
Page 4–1318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–14. Menu 1 Screen Display(b) Menu 2 Figure 4–15 shows the HSD maintenance utility program Menu 2 screen display. Table 4–8 describes the items available in Menu 2.In control-processor software version 7.0, no changes were made to menu 3 selections. No additional menu items were added with the release of Version 7.5, Control Processor software. MENU1 FIRMWARE V7.0X override forward id L test LEDsY explain hpa error status S set hcm attenuatorR hcm RF threshold<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports Table 4–7. Menu 1 Item DescriptionsMenu Item DescriptionX: override forward id • Used in testing and fault isolation• Enter a “test or alternate” Forward ID to use during fault isolation procedures. Resetting the HSD or cycling the power cancels this function. L: test LEDs • Toggles the “Power ON” (LED 1) and ‘Fault’ (LED 2) LEDs ON (A) and OFF (D) or returns them to software control (X). Y: explain hpa error status• Reports HPA status:• Displays HPA OK when no error codes are reported from the system’s power up test• Displays HPA error code message if system’s power up test failsS• Used to set the preferred attenuation for Honeywell Combined Mode (HCM) operation to reduce the output signal level of the HCM module.R• Displays the HCM module threshold parameters for the RF:• If the measured RF level is below this threshold, the “RF low” bit is set in the HPA maintenance word, which is then sent by the HSD control processor to the Honeywell SDU.
Page 4–1418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–15. Menu 2 Screen Display MENU2 FIRMWARE Vx.xA set veh-relative azimuth E set veh-relative elevationK desired az veh-rel velocity R resume automatic steeringT enter time of day N annotate log fileL re-enter logon password V get firmware versionsZ reset HSD-128 S set sat long<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports Table 4–8. Menu 2 Item DescriptionsMenu Items Item DescriptionNote: Menu 2 selections E and K are used to manually input navigational data to point the antenna to a preferred satellite location and /or peak for a maximum signal reception. These commands are typically used where no IRS data is available. A: set veh-relative azimuth• Antenna azimuth pointing offset with reference to the front centerline of the aircraft• Offset value entered in degrees from 0° to ± 180 °, where a positive entry is clockwise (cw) and a negative entry is counterclockwise (ccw)K: desired az veh-rel velocity• Activates continuous antenna azimuth sweep at a set elevation, as entered with menu item “E”• Azimuth sweep velocity entered as deg/sec valueNote: When combined with a signal-monitoring “reports” selection, sweep the antenna for maximum signal strength to determine optimum location coordinates.T: enter time of day • Permits the on-board entry of date and time for initial one-time setting of the “Real Time Clock” • Where no clock is available (on some early models) the time may be set to time stamp a log file of a “reports” itemL: re-enter logon password• Permits a user to enter a new access level password: menu or maintZ: reset HSD • Enables a complete, soft reset of the LRU; once reset, the menu access password must be re-enteredE: set veh-relative elevation• Antenna elevation pointing offset with respect to the aircraft horizontal “rest” position, i.e., assumed to have no pitch or roll offset• Offset value entered in degrees from 0° to 90°R: resume automatic steering• Re-activates programmed automatic antenna-steering in both azimuth and elevation
Page 4–1518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(c) Menu 3In control processor software version 7.0, the following changes were made to menu 3 selections (delta between version 4.5 and 7.0). No additional menu items were added with the release of Version 7.5, Control Processor software.• Deleted item N, ‘serial number’ as it was no longer required.• The new item O, ‘list ORT’, displays all available ocean regions along with the satellite longitude.• The new item P, ‘ocean region parameter’, displays the ocean region number along with the ocean region e.g. REGION 0: AOR WEST. This command item configures both the Primary and Secondary LES access codes in the unit. • The new item I, ‘set all LES id’s’, sets the LES IDs in all the ocean regions to the same LES access code and service provider. • Removed several miscellaneous parameters from the Menu 3, item M selections.In menu 3, the following changes were made to item M ‘misc. EEPROM parameter’:• Removed extraneous parameters, 12, 19 to 24 and 28 to 31, which were neither required for system configuration nor operation • Added parameter 3, ‘GPS protection algorithm’ — used to disable the GPS algorithms the HSD uses to prevent calls from interfering with the GPS navigational system on the aircraft.• Added parameter 4, ‘Registration Req’d before calls’ — used to require successful ocean region registration before HSD calls are permitted (by default ocean region registration is not required).• Added parameter 17, ‘Viper Antenna Gain’ — used to configure the nominal antenna gain used by the HSD when operating in Viper Mode—presuming that the HSD is connected to an antenna that does not provide antenna status words.• Added parameter 18, ‘Viper HPA/ANT Loss’ — this is the RF loss between the HPA and the antenna, when the system is operating in Viper Mode.N: annotate log file • Allows for input of text into a log file• This feature can be used to document information such as test conditions, system or aircraft identification or any pertinent information needed for later reviewV: get firmware versions• Displays the system Kernel and Application software versions as well as the channel card(s) and HPA firmware revisionsS: set satellite longitude• Sets the satellite longitude Table 4–8. Menu 2 Item DescriptionsMenu Items Item Description
Page 4–1618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal• Added parameter 45, ‘Category B Lower Frequency Limit’ and Parameter 46, “Category B Upper Frequency Limit” — these two parameters specify the “CAT B” terminal frequency range. Calls, which involve transmitting outside of this range, may interfere with the GPS navigational system if an Aero H call occurs at the same time. Usually the GPS protection algorithm tears down these calls.Figure 4–16 shows the HSD maintenance utility program Menu 3 screen display for version 7.0, control processor software. Table 4–9 describes the items available in Menu 3.Figure 4–16. Menu 3 Screen Display MENU 3 FIRMWARE V7.0L list EEPROM S list event logM misc. EEPROM parameter F list call logO list ORT P ocean region parameterI set all LES id's<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports Table 4–9. Menu 3 Item DescriptionsMenu Item Item DescriptionL: list EEPROM • Displays a list of all system EEPROM parameters and their corresponding values (this function is READ only)• Certain parameters are set using menu 3, item M selection. Figure 4–17 shows an example of the EEPROM listingS: list event log • A list of system fault codes stored in non-volatile RAM• When selected, several options are available:0 = Most recent saved entry is displayedS = Displays next most recent entry saved• = Displays all remaining logged entries1 = Special events (Does not include Ocean Region Registration entries)M: misc. EEPROM parameter• Enables entry or entry changes to some of the EEPROM parameters listed in function ‘L’Note: Parameters 5,6,7,8, 9, 13, 25, 26, 27, and 28 are not accessible using Level 1 or Level 2 passwords F: list call log • Displays call log files for HSD or HSD-X. When selected, two options are available:Press “F” to display complete list of all log files Press “X” to list extended EIRP trace data
Page 4–1718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalO: list ORT • Displays all EEPROM parameters, including all cable losses and LES configurationsP: ocean region parameter• Used to configure LES access codes (primary and secondary service providers) for individual ocean regionsI: set all LES id’s • Used to configure the LES access codes to configure all ocean regions to the same LES access code and service provider (including primary and secondary service providers) Table 4–9. Menu 3 Item DescriptionsMenu Item Item Description
Page 4–1818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–17. Menu 3 – L: EEPROM Listing (Version 4.5)EEPROM LISTING:MAGIC NUMBER :OKEEPROM VERSION NUMBER 2001FIRMWARE VERSION 1018SERIAL NUMBER: xxxIGNORED FAULTS: 0HARDWARE CONFIG: 0NUMBER OF POWERUPS (index 0) 570HOURS OF OPERATION (index 0) 117MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERSHIT 'L' for MOREHPA-ANTENNA CABLE LOSS: 2.5 dBFORWARD ID: xxxxxxAORW LES ACCESS CODE: 1TERRESTRIAL NETWORK ID: 0HPA-CHANNEL CARD CABLE LOSS: 10.0 dBMAX HPA GAIN: 66.3 dBMIN ANTENNA GAIN: 11.0 dBMAX EIRP: 53.5 dBMAX CHANNEL_CARD POWER: 0.0 dBNUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS : 2FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED: 1RX Attenuation (LAND-ON-WINGS): 0.0 dBMIN SECS BETWEEN CHAN CARD RESETS: 300HIT 'L' for MOREMAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO: 0MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL: 0TERMINAL CATEGORY: HW STRAPPED VALUEAOR W VALID BEAMS: 4 5 6AOR E VALID BEAMS: 5 6POR VALID BEAMS: 4 5 6IOR VALID BEAMS 5 6AORE LES ACCESS CODE: 1POR LES ACCESS CODE: 1IOR LES ACCESS CODE: 1RECEIVER CALIBRATION (AREO): 11 dBMAX HPA POWER: 18.0 dBwHPA RESERVED POWER: 16.0 dBwHIT ‘L’ for MORECHANNEL CARD STARTUP DELAY: 30 secRX32 ACTIVE: 1DEFAULT LATITUDE: 45 DO’ 0.0”NDEFAULT LONGITUDE: 75 DO’ 0.0”WOBEY OXCO STATUS: YESCCDEBUG PORT: NONECOMBINED MODE BACKOFF ADJUSTMENT: 10.0 dBCHECKSUM (stored at offset 462) 9656 OKLongest write cycle took 0 MSEC
Page 4–1918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalNote: Depending on the version of software installed and the Terminal Category, the EEPROM Listing shown may differ from those shown and described here.Figure 4–18. Menu 3 – Item M: Miscellaneous Parameters (Version 4.5)Figure 4–19. Menu 3 – Item M: Miscellaneous Parameters (Version 7.0)<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reportsMISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 1 HPA-ANTENNA CABLE LOSS 18 AOR E VALID BEAMS 2 FORWARD ID 19 POR VALID BEAMS 3 AORW LES ACCESS CODE 20 IOR VALID BEAMS 4 TERRESTRIAL NETWORK ID 21 AORE LES ACCESS CODE10 NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS 22 POR LES ACCESS CODE11 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED 23 IOR LES ACCESS CODE12 RX ATTENUATION (LAND-ON-WINGS) 24 RECEIVER CALIBRATION (AERO)14 MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO 28 RX32 ACTIVE15 MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL 29 DEFAULT LATITUDE16 TERMINAL CATEGORY 30 DEFAULT LONGITUDE17 AOR W VALID BEAMS 31 OBEY OXCO STATUSWHICH PARAMETER # ?MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 1 HPA-TO-ANTENNA TOTAL LOSS 11 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED 2 FORWARD ID 14 MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO 3 GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS 15 MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL 4 REGISTRATION REQ'D BEFORE CALLS 16 TERMINAL CATEGORY10 NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS 17 VIPER ANTENNA GAINWHICH PARAMETER # <CTRL> N for next page ?18 VIPER HPA/ANT LOSS 31 OBEY OXCO STATUS24 RECEIVER CALIBRATION 42 HCM AERO/M4 PRIORITIZATION28 RX32 ACTIVE 45 CATEGORY B LOWER FREQUENCY LIMIT29 DEFAULT LATITUDE 46 CATEGORY B UPPER FREQUENCY LIMIT30 DEFAULT LONGITUDE
Page 4–2018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–10. Menu 3, Item 'M' EEPROM Parameter Descriptions (Version 4.5)Parameter #Parameter Title Description1 HPA Cable loss • Measured transmit coax cable loss from the HSD at MPC1 to the antenna including the DLNA loss (0.8 dB)• Maximum is 2.5 dB – 0.8 dB = 1.7 dB2 Forward ID • Entry required ONLY if the ID is not strapped, refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for strapping details3, 21, 22, and 23AORW, AORE, POR, and IOR ‘LES’ Access Codes• Inmarsat Service Provider LES access code entry; default is “1”4 Terrestrial Network ID • Used to change Terrestrial Network ID (where applicable)10 Number of Channel Cards• Entry selects the number of channel cards the system is configured for.• Default for Stand-Alone Mode installations is “2”11 Front Panel LEDs Enabled• Future consideration is provided for additional LEDs, beyond the two currently activated• Default is “2”’14 Maintenance Port Inverse Video• Enables a selected “reports” item to be highlighted in Inverse Video when it is activated• Default is “1” (activated)15 Maintenance Port Degrees Symbol• Offers a choice of displaying the letter “D” or the degree symbol “°” when viewing the lat/long information displayed in the ‘Reports’ output:• Select “0” to use the letter “D”, e.g. 180.0 D• Select “1” to use a degree symbol “°”, e.g. 180.0°
Page 4–2118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal16 Channel Card Category• Offers an LRU configuration choice of:• 0 for SAT-906• 1 for Stand-Alone• 2 for HW Strapping• 3 for MCS3000• 4 for MCS6000• 5 for MCS7000• 6 for MCS Combined• 7 for Stand-Alone without antenna• 8 for Honeywell Collaborative• 9 for Cooperative Rockwell Collins SAT-906 • Default is “2” (where hardware is read on power-up)17, 18, 19, and 20AORW, AORE, POR, and IOR Valid Beams• Not applicable (applied to prototype channel card software)24 Receiver Calibration (AERO)• Enables attenuation of receive RF input level to the channel cards• Entered as an absolute number, e.g., 10, means 10 dB of input RF attenuation is added•Not applicable to HSD systems with version C30 (or later) channel card software (Version C30 and later channel card software automatically adjusts RF input)• Default is “0”28 RX32 Active • Not applicable (applied to prototype HPA systems)29 Default Latitude • Allows user to enter a default latitude value• Reset the HSD to activate revised default values30 Default Longitude • Allows user to enter a default longitude value • Reset the HSD to activate revised default values31 Obey OXCO Status • Prevents system operation until OCXO is warmed up (unless overridden)• Use parameter setting to override warm-up during testing procedures Table 4–10. Menu 3, Item 'M' EEPROM Parameter Descriptions (Version 4.5)Parameter #Parameter Title Description
Page 4–2218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–11. Menu 3, Item 'M' EEPROM Parameter Descriptions (Version 7.0)Parameter #Parameter Title Description1HPA cable loss • Measured transmit coax cable loss from the HSD at MPC1 to the antenna including the DLNA loss—maximum is 2.5 dB2Forward ID • Entry required ONLY if the ID is not strapped, refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for strapping details3GPS protection algorithms• Used to disable the GPS algorithms the HSD uses to prevent calls from interfering with the GPS navigational system on the aircraft.4Registration req’d before calls• Used to change Terrestrial Network ID (where applicable)10 Number of channel cards• Entry selects the number of channel cards the system is configured for—default for Stand-Alone Mode installations is “2”11 Front panel LEDs enabled• Future consideration is provided for additional LEDs, beyond the two currently activated—default is “2”’14 Maintenance port inverse video• Enables a selected “reports” item to be highlighted in Inverse Video when it is activated—default is “1” (activated)15 Maintenance port degrees symbol• Offers a choice of displaying the letter “D” or the degree symbol “°” when viewing the lat/long information displayed in the ‘Reports’ output:• Select “0” to use the letter “D”, e.g. 180.0 D• Select “1” to use a degree symbol “°”, e.g. 180.0°
Page 4–2318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal16 Channel card category• Offers an LRU configuration choice of:•0 for SAT-906• 1 for Stand-Alone• 2 for HW Strapping•3 for MCS3000•4 for MCS6000•5 for MCS7000• 6 for MCS Combined• 7 for Stand-Alone without antenna• 8 for HCM Combined (Honeywell Combined Mode)• 9 for Cooperative Rockwell Collins SAT-906 • 10 not used• 11 for HSD-X Network (Multi-Channel AERO)• 12 for HSD-X Network without antenna (Multi-Channel Non AERO)• 13 for VIPER • Default is “2” (where hardware is read on power-up)17 Viper antenna gain • Used to configure the nominal antenna gain used by the HSD when operating in Viper Mode—presuming that the HSD is connected to an antenna that does not provide antenna status words18 Viper HPA/ANT loss • Used to configure the nominal antenna gain used by the HSD when operating in Viper Mode—presuming that the HSD is connected to an antenna that does not provide antenna status words Table 4–11. Menu 3, Item 'M' EEPROM Parameter Descriptions (Version 7.0)Parameter #Parameter Title Description
Page 4–2418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal24 Receiver Calibration (AERO)• Enables attenuation of receive RF input level to the channel cards• Entered as an absolute number, e.g., 10, means 10 dB of input RF attenuation is added•Not applicable to HSD systems with version C30 (or later) channel card software (Version C30 and later channel card software automatically adjusts RF input)• Default is “0”28 RX32 Active • Not applicable (applied to prototype HPA systems)29 Default Latitude • Allows user to enter a default latitude value• Reset the HSD to activate revised default values30 Default Longitude • Allows user to enter a default longitude value • Reset the HSD to activate revised default values31 Obey OXCO status • Prevents system operation until OCXO is warmed up (unless overridden)• Use parameter setting to override warm-up during testing procedures42 HCM AERO/M4 prioritization • Sets HPA power allocation to Aero H/H+ or Swift64 call priority (1=M4, 0=AERO-H)• Default set to AERO priority45 Category B lower frequency limit• Used to specify category B terminal lower frequency range. Calls transmitting outside of this specified range may interfere with the GPS navigational system if an Aero H call occurs simultaneously; however, in this event, the GPS protection algorithm usually tears down the call 46 Category B upper frequency limit• Used to specify category B terminal upper frequency range. Calls transmitting outside of this specified range may interfere with the GPS navigational system if an Aero H call occurs simultaneously; however, in this event, the GPS protection algorithm usually tears down the call Table 4–11. Menu 3, Item 'M' EEPROM Parameter Descriptions (Version 7.0)Parameter #Parameter Title Description
Page 4–2518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(d) Menu 4 In control-processor software version 7.0, the following changes were made to Menu 4 selections (delta between version 4.5 and 7.0). No additional menu items were added with the release of Version 7.5, Control Processor software.• Removed Menu 4, item F, ‘force spot beam’ selection. Figure 4–20 shows the HSD maintenance utility program Menu 4 screen display. Table 4–12 describes the items available in Menu 4.Figure 4–20. Menu 4 Screen Display MENU 4 FIRMWARE V7.0Q channel card forward ID's O set Ocean RegionS change spot beam J toggle ISDN connectionM report MUX stats<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports Table 4–12. Menu 4 Item DescriptionsMenu Item Item DescriptionQ: channel card forward IDs• Enables viewing of channel cards, # 1 and # 2 Forward IDsO: set Ocean Region • Allows for manual selection of satellite Ocean Regions: AORW: “0”AORE: “1”POR: “2”IOR: “3”• To revert to programmed selection, type –1 and press Enter for AUTO selectionJ: toggle ISDN connection• Used for testing and fault isolation purposes• Connects ISDN 1 lines to Channel Card 2 (Does not work in reverse—ISDN 2 to ISDN 1)• Redirection only applies until the system is resetS: change spot beam • Enables manual selection of specific spot beams independently assigned for each channel cardM: report MUX stats • Not applicable• Used for engineering debugging purposes only
Page 4–2618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(e) Menu 10 Menu 10 items are used to manually enter INS parameters to simulate the INS data required for HSD operation when INS data is unavailable. Figure 4–21 shows the HSD maintenance utility program Menu 10 screen display. Table 4–13 describes the items available in Menu 10. No additional menu items were added with the release of Version 7.5, Control Processor software.In control-processor software version 7.0, the following changes were made to Menu 10 selections (delta between version 4.5 and 7.0).• Added item C, ‘simul port ACU status’, which prompts the user to enter both the port antenna gain in dB and the message rate in Hz.• Added item M, ‘activate antenna status words’, which activates all set antenna status words.• Added item N, ‘deactivate antenna status words’, which deactivates all set antenna status words.• Added item B, ‘simul sb ACU status’, which prompts the user to enter the Starboard antenna gain in dB and the message rate in Hz.Figure 4–21. Menu 10 Screen Display MENU10 FIRMWARE Vx.xL simul INS lat G simul INS longH simul INS heading T simul INS true trackP simul INS pitch R simul INS rollS simul INS speed A activate all simul wordsX deactivate all simul words C simul port ACU statusB simul sb ACU status M activate antenna status wordsN deactivate antenna status words<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports Table 4–13. Menu 10 Item DescriptionsMenu Item Item DescriptionL: simul INS lat • Allows user to simulate a latitude by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS H: simul INS heading • Allows user to simulate a aircraft heading by overriding the data received from the aircraft INSP: simul INS pitch • Allows user to simulate aircraft pitch by overriding the data received from the aircraft INSS: simul INS speed • Allows user to simulate aircraft speed by overriding the data received from the aircraft INSX: deactivate all simul words• De-activates all simulated parameters reverting the HSD system back to using the INS data received from the aircraft
Page 4–2718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(f) Menu 13 Menu 13 items are used to query and debug systems with Data I/O Card 2 (available on HSD models 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 or other HSD models via service bulletin 1110-SB-0004). Menu 13 is the same in all control processor software versions 4.5 and later. Figure 4–22 shows the HSD maintenance utility program Menu 13 screen display. Table 4–14 describes the items available in Menu 13.Figure 4–22. Menu 13 Screen DisplayB: simul sb ACU status• Used to enter the starboard antenna gain in dB and the message rate in HzN: deactivate antenna status words• Used to deactivate all set antenna status wordsG: simul INS long • Allows user to simulate aircraft longitude by overriding the data received from the aircraft INST: simul ins true track • Allows user to simulate true track by overriding the data received from the aircraft INSR: simul INS roll • Allows user to simulate aircraft roll by overriding the data received from the aircraft INSA: activate all simul words• Activates all input simulate parameters overriding the INS data received from the aircraft • Lat and Long values from the EEPROM values set in Menu 3C: simul port ACU status• Used to enter both the port antenna gain in dB and the message rate in HzM: activate antenna status words• Used to activate all set antenna status words MENU 13 FIRMWARE Vx.xT query DATA IO elapsed time V query DATA IO versionS query DATA IO services C query DATA IO config pinsF DATA IO fault logging level X DATA IO console mode<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports Table 4–13. Menu 10 Item DescriptionsMenu Item Item Description
Page 4–2818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(g) Menu 14 Menu 14 items are used for debugging and clarifying call routing issues. Menu 14 is the same in all control processor software versions 4.5 and later. Figure 4–23 shows the HSD maintenance utility program Menu 14 screen display. Table 4–15 describes the items available in Menu 14.Figure 4–23. Menu 14 Screen Display Table 4–14. Menu 13 Item DescriptionsMenu Item Item DescriptionT: query Data IO elapsed time• Displays the time (in seconds) since the last Data I/O resetS: query Data IO services • Displays active interfacesF: Data IO fault logging level• Sets the level of minimum severity of events that are reported to the Data I/O cardV: query Data IO version • Displays the firmware version of the Data I/O cardC: query Data I/O config pins• Displays the Data I/O configuration pin summaryX: Data IO console mode • Opens a virtual TTY session to the Data I/O maintenance port on the HSD MENU 14 FIRMWARE Vx.xN num entries in call table L list call tableT get call table<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports Table 4–15. Menu 14 Item DescriptionsMenu Item Item DescriptionN: num entries in call table• Displays the call table number entries for fixed-originated or mobile-originated calls for either channel card 1 or channel card 2 T: get call table • Displays the call table lists for fixed-originated or mobile-originated calls for either channel card 1 or channel card 2L: list call table • Lists the call table for fixed-originated or mobile-originated calls for either channel card 1 or channel card 2
Page 4–2918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(h) Menu 15 Menu 15 was added in control processor software version 7.0 to allow the user to query the system for channel-card, software versions and serial number information. Figure 4–24 shows the HSD maintenance utility program Menu 15 screen display. Table 4–16 describes the items available in Menu 15.Figure 4–24. Menu 15 Screen Display(i) Menu 18 Menu 18 was added in control processor software version 7.0 to support Multi-Channel configurations. No additional menu items were added with the release of Version 7.5, Control Processor software. Menu 18 is only available if the HSD system is configured to either HSD-X Network, HSD-X without Antenna, or Viper terminal categories. Figure 4–25 shows the HSD maintenance utility program Menu 18 screen display. Table 4–17 describes the items available in Menu 18.Figure 4–25. Menu 18 Screen Display MENU 15 FIRMWARE V7.0V request channel card versions D channel card serial number<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports Table 4–16. Menu 15 Item DescriptionsMenu Item Item DescriptionV: request channel card versions• Displays software versions for a selected channel card D: channel card serial number• Displays the serial number of the selected channel card MENU 18 FIRMWARE V7.0X HSD-X slave console mode B HSD-X slave cable lossL list HSD-X slave cable loss V get HSD-X firmware version<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports
Page 4–3018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(7) Report Item DescriptionsWhen testing or troubleshooting the HSD system, monitoring real-time system data is sometimes required. Figure 4–26 shows all the report items potentially available to Level 2 user.Most reports are used for factory debugging purposes only. This document describes only the reports typically used in the field for operational and fault isolation testing. Note: Depending on the version of software installed, the maintenance utility program report items displayed may differ from those shown in Figure 4–26 and Figure 4–27. Table 4–17. Menu 15 Item DescriptionsMenu Item Item DescriptionX: HSD-X slave console mode• Activates a system control connection to a selected HSD-X unit installed on the systemL: list HSD-X slave cable loss• Select this item to display the HSD to HSD-X cable loss for a selected HSD-X unit installed on the systemB: HSD-X slave cable loss • Used to enter the measured HSD to HSD-X cable loss for selected HSD-X unitV: get HSD-X firmware version• Select this item to display the software version of a selected HSD-X unit installed on the system
Page 4–3118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–26. HSD Maintenance Utility Program: Report Items (Version 4.5) 1 OFF messages to channel card #1 13 OFF messages to channel card #2 2 OFF hex output to channel card #1 14 OFF hex output to channel card #2 3 OFF responses from channel card #1 15 OFF responses from channel card #2 4 OFF hex input from channel card #1 16 OFF hex input from channel card #2 5 OFF channel #1 misc info 17 OFF channel #2 misc info 6 OFF sb antenna arinc input 18 OFF port antenna arinc input 7 OFF sb antenna maintenance word 19 OFF port antenna maintenance word 8 OFF sb antenna status word 20 OFF port antenna status word 9 OFF channel card call status 21 OFF call codes10 OFF channel card THA codes 22 OFF spot beam selection11 OFF channel card errors 23 OFF standard output12 OFF INS input 24 OFF doppler, antenna az/el25 OFF HPA arinc i/o 37 OFF combined-mode spoofed output26 OFF HPA error status 38 OFF combined-mode power allotment27 OFF HPA/channel card backoffs 39 OFF combined-mode debugging28 OFF miscellaneous digital inputs 40 OFF enthusiastic combined-mode debug29 OFF channel card A_AM msgs 41 OFF delta combined-mode debugging30 OFF multi-control arinc bus 42 OFF raw arinc data from ITS31 OFF ocean region info 43 OFF high-precision hpa power32 OFF hex input from data i/o 44 OFF hpa calibration (gain droop)33 OFF hex output to data i/o 45 OFF combined mode ocean region debug34 OFF input from data i/o 46 OFF hpa resets35 OFF changes in multi-control bus 47 OFF channel card temperature36 OFF unit test call setup 48 OFF hexadecimal INS input49 OFF main loop latency 59 OFF RC Satellite Position50 OFF main loop timing 60 OFF debug channel card power51 OFF one second tick 61 OFF non-zero channel card power52 OFF extended call codes 62 OFF m4 availability status53 OFF standalone w/o ant data 63 OFF enthusiastic output to RC SDU54 OFF RC SDU time and date 64 OFF channel card frequencies55 OFF RC arinc i/o (hex) 65 OFF enthusiastic messages from HPA56 OFF RC misc arinc i/o (ascii) 66 OFF channel card boot sequence57 OFF RC EIRP 67 OFF HPV power meter/attenuator58 OFF RC SAT-906 Status
Page 4–3218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–27. HSD Maintenance Utility Program: Report Items (Version 7.0) 1 OFF messages to channel card #1 13 OFF messages to channel card #2 2 OFF hex output to channel card #1 14 OFF hex output to channel card #2 3 OFF responses from channel card #1 15 OFF responses from channel card #2 4 OFF hex input from channel card #1 16 OFF hex input from channel card #2 5 OFF channel #1 misc info 17 OFF channel #2 misc info 6 OFF sb antenna arinc input 18 OFF port antenna arinc input 7 OFF sb antenna maintenance word 19 OFF port antenna maintenance word 8 OFF sb antenna status word 20 OFF port antenna status word 9 OFF channel card call status 21 ON call codes10 OFF channel card THA codes 22 OFF spot beam selection11 OFF channel card errors 23 OFF standard output12 OFF INS input 24 OFF doppler, antenna az/el25 OFF HPA arinc i/o 37 OFF combined-mode spoofed output26 OFF HPA error status 38 OFF combined-mode power allotment27 OFF HPA/channel card backoffs 39 OFF combined-mode debugging28 OFF miscellaneous digital inputs 40 OFF enthusiastic combined-mode debug29 OFF channel card A_AM msgs 41 OFF delta combined-mode debugging30 OFF multi-control arinc bus 42 OFF raw arinc data from ITS31 OFF ocean region info 43 OFF high-precision hpa power32 OFF hex input from data i/o 44 OFF hpa calibration (gain droop)33 OFF hex output to data i/o 45 OFF combined mode ocean region debug34 OFF input from data i/o 46 OFF hpa resets35 OFF changes in multi-control bus 47 OFF channel card temperature36 OFF unit test call setup 48 OFF hexadecimal INS input49 OFF main loop latency 61 OFF non-zero channel card power50 OFF main loop timing 62 OFF m4 availability status51 OFF one second tick 63 OFF enthusiastic output to RC SDU52 OFF extended call codes 64 OFF channel card frequencies53 OFF standalone w/o ant data 65 OFF enthusiastic messages from HPA54 OFF RC SDU time and date 66 OFF channel card boot sequence55 OFF RC arinc i/o (hex) 67 OFF debug honeywell combined mode56 OFF RC misc arinc i/o (ascii) 68 OFF CFDS debugging57 OFF RC EIRP 69 OFF vt100 scenario58 OFF RC SAT-906 Status 70 OFF HCM input59 OFF RC Satellite Position 71 OFF HCM power level60 OFF debug channel card power 72 OFF DATA I/O events73 OFF HCM power control 85 OFF debug CC#2 channel card power74 OFF TIM HCM power debugging 86 OFF Channel card rx attenuation75 OFF HCM BITE 87 OFF interworking report76 OFF HSD-X arinc messages 88 OFF all words to SDU77 OFF HSD-X net configuration 89 OFF debug call teardown78 OFF vt100 eirp/power 90 OFF debug cc backoff79 OFF dialtone debugging 91 OFF HSD frequencies80 OFF RC CC#2 SDU time and date 92 OFF intermod debugging81 OFF RC CC#2 arinc i/o (hex) 93 OFF spot beam debugging82 OFF RC CC#2 misc arinc i/o (ascii) 94 OFF vt100 channel card info83 OFF RC CC#2 EIRP 95 OFF vt100 debugging84 OFF RC CC#2 SAT-906 Status
Page 4–3318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(8) Activating Maintenance Reports In Level 1, menu access, report item 23 (standard output) is automatically generated when the equals sign (=) is pressed. Once activated, the report data output is repeated on the computer display at one-second intervals.Level 2, maint access provides more flexibility in the use of the reports function. This access level permits the activation or de-activation any one of the report items (toggle ON and OFF).(a) Report Items: General Guidelines 1. Press the equal sign on the keyboard (=) to open the Report Item menu. 2. To activate a report, type the number of the report item needed, and then press Enter. This toggles ON the report number entered. To toggle the report OFF, type in the report number again, and press Enter. 3. Press X to disable all report items (toggles reports OFF). 4. Press Ctrl+N to display the next group of report items. 5. Press S to save all selected report items to EEPROM. If the items selected are not saved, they are "de-activated" when the system is reset or power is cycled to the unit. 6. Press Esc (in Level 2 access only) to start the scrolling report display. Press Esc again to return to the MENU selection screen. (b) Report Items: DescriptionsNot all the report items are used in the testing or troubleshooting of the system. This section describes only the more commonly used report items.1. Report Item: 23Use report item #23 (the most comprehensive report) to get an overall general impression of the HSD system health. An example of the contents of report item 23 is shown in Figure 4–28. Table 4–18 provides a brief description of the parameters. Each distinct parameter is numbered for description purposes.Figure 4–28. Example of Report Item 23145D38'52.9"N 74D59'29.3"W 2PT 0.2D 3RL -0.4D 4HD 349.9D 5TK 0.2D 60 knots710:26:07 8dop 0 ppb 9az 161.6 deg 10el 33.6 deg 11AOR WEST 12ant gain 13 (sbd)13CARD #1: 14C/No=51.5 dB/Hz 15sig=-16.8 1627 C 17no call 18beam=413CARD #2: 14C/No=51.5 dB/Hz 15sig=-15.4 1627 C 17no call 18beam=4
Page 4–3418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalNote: When the aircraft is stationary the field may appear as ¾’s. 2. Report Items: 5 & 17, 8 & 20, and 21Some other commonly used report items, used in the testing or troubleshooting of the system, are shown in Figure 4–29. These report items shown are only available to Level 2, maint access users.Note: Depending on the version of software installed, and the user’s selection of reports, the maintenance utility program report items displayed may differ from those shown in the example illustrated Figure 4–29.Note: Signal strength values (C/no=) in early versions of software do not show the decimal point. If operating HSD transceivers with earlier software, divide the C/no value by ten. Table 4–18. Report 23 Item DescriptionsReport 23 Item Number Description1 IRS lat/long as interpreted by the HSD2 Aircraft pitch angle, where “UP” is +ve3 Aircraft roll angle, where clockwise (cw) is +ve4 Aircraft heading; where the nose of the aircraft is pointing, based on yaw offset5 Aircraft true track; direction the aircraft is flying—not necessarily the direction it is pointing (See NOTE)6 Aircraft velocity7 Time, based on the system real time clock8 Doppler frequency offset; increases with velocity (See NOTE)9 Antenna azimuth pointing to the satellite, with respect to the nose of the aircraft10 Antenna elevation angle to the satellite, with respect to the horizontal position of the aircraft11 Ocean Region the system is logged-on to12 Reported antenna gain and the selected antenna, port or starboard13 Indicates the channel card for which results 14) to 17) relate to14 RF input Carrier-to-Noise (C/No) level; typically 50.0 to 55.015 RF input signal level; typically –12.0 to –18.0 when not ”in call”: *not to exceed 0 when “in-call”16 HSD internal LRU temperature17 System call status18 Satellite beam the card is registered on
Page 4–3518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–29. Maintenance Port, Report ItemsReport 5; Channel card #1 & #2 miscellaneous information:CARD #1: C/No=51.8 sig=-16.6 no call beam=4 AOR WEST bt=OK oc=OK int=8080CARD #1: C/No=51.6 sig=-16.8 no call beam=4 AOR WEST bt=OK oc=OK int=8080CARD #2: C/No=52.0 sig=-16.1 no call beam=4 AOR WEST bt=OK oc=OK int=8080CARD #2: C/No=51.7 sig=-16.3 no call beam=4 AOR WEST bt=OK oc=OK int=8080Report 8 & 20; Starboard and Port Antenna Status:starboard status: 0x608236 SDI: STARBOARD SSM: NORMAL OPERATION gain: 13OMNIDIRECTIONAL MODE open loop tracking starboard active HGA LNA onstarboard status: 0x608236 SDI: STARBOARD SSM: NORMAL OPERATION gain: 13OMNIDIRECTIONAL MODE open loop tracking starboard active HGA LNA onstarboard status: 0x608236 SDI: STARBOARD SSM: NORMAL OPERATION gain: 13port status: 0x600201 SDI: PORT/TOP SSM: NORMAL OPERATION gain: 0OMNIDIRECTIONAL MODE open loop tracking starboard active HGA LNA offport status: 0x600201 SDI: PORT/TOP SSM: NORMAL OPERATION gain: 0OMNIDIRECTIONAL MODE open loop tracking starboard active HGA LNA offReport 21; Call Codes:13:39:00 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 54 dB/Hz13:39:00 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 19.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 0 dB/Hz13:39:06 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 0 dB/Hz13:39:06 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 19.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 0 dB/Hz13:39:12 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 55 dB/Hz13:39:12 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 19.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 0 dB/Hz13:39:18 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 0 dB/Hz13:39:19 #2 ABC456 E4 stop 1001 call cleared by MES terminal 30 C 0 dB/Hz13:39:20 #1 ABC123 E4 stop 1001 call cleared by MES terminal 28 C 0 dB/Hz13:39:19 #2 ABC456 E4 stop 1001 call cleared by MES terminal 30 C 0 dB/Hz13:39:20 #1 ABC123 E4 stop 1001 call cleared by MES terminal 28 C 0 dB/Hz Table 4–19. Report informationReport(s) InformationReport 5 & 17 Channel card #1 & #2 miscellaneous information:(C/No) - RF input carrier to noise level (value displayed is typically 50 to 55 when not “in-call” and 55 to 65 when “in-call”-may also show as “0’s”)(sig) - RF input signal level (typically –12 to –18 when not “in-call”)(beam) - Satellite Beam the card is registered on(oc) - Ocean region the card is logged-on to(bt) - Card boot-up status
Page 4–3618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalD. Fault Definitions(1) Cause Indication (Fault Codes)The four fields listed below are used to signal the cause indication result:• Coding Standard (1 bit)• Cause Location (4 bits)• Cause Class (4 bits)• Cause Value (4 bits)The Table 4–20 shows the hexadecimal coding for these fields and briefly describes the events relating to each code. (2) Inmarsat Cause CodesThe fault definitions that appear in the HSD Maintenance Menu logs are based directly on the cause code definitions provided by Inmarsat. Table 4–20 defines the Maintenance Port Menu fault codes of the HSD.(oc) - Ocean region registration status(int) - Interface status ( =8080 means the card is ready for dialing)Report 8 & 20 Starboard and Port Antenna Status:(Hex code) - Raw hex code of the 32-bit ARINC word—decoded message follows code(SDI) - Antenna being used (for mechanically steered, only Port data is valid)(SSM) - Antenna serviceability(Gain) - Reported antenna gain (may vary with increased blockage or keyhole pointing)(Mode) - Reports tracking status, antenna selection, and high gain mode (LNA) - Power-on statusReport 21 Call Codes:(Time) - Time based on the system real time clock(Fwd Addr) - Forward Address ID assigned to the system channel cards(Alpha/no.) - Ocean region and beam the card is logged-on to(Call) - Call real-time status, service type code, and Inmarsat Cause Code (See Table 4–20)(RF power) - LES requested HPA power in dBW(OR status) - Ocean region registration status(Call orig) Call originating from MES (Mobile) or from a fixed location.(Call type) Call types (for example, speech) Table 4–19. Report informationReport(s) Information
Page 4–3718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–20. Fault Code DefinitionsInmarsat Cause Code Code Definition1001 Call cleared by MES terminal (normal termination of call)1011 Call failed, MES terminal busy1012 Call cleared, MES terminal busy1021 Call failed, MES time-out (no answer)1081 Call failed, MES terminal not installed1091 Call failed, MES terminal out-of-service1092 Call cleared, MES terminal out-of-service1141 MES preempted clear by higher priority call1142 MES preempted fixed call by higher priority call1143 Offered call cleared, pre-empted at MES1144 Call cleared, MES initiated preemption1145 Attempted call cleared, pre-empted at MES1146 Attempted call abandoned by MES terminal11A0 Call cleared, credit card not accepted11D1 Call failed, Request data invalid11D2 Call failed, insufficient digits in service address11D3 Call failed, invalid service address11D4 Call cleared, credit card data information invalid11D5 Call cleared, invalid country code11D6 Call cleared, PID information is not consistent11D7 Call rejected, invalid service for Pri.1 or 2 call11D8 Call cleared, dialed number not 2 or 3 digits for Pr.1 or 2 call11E0 Call cleared, invalid credit card PIN at this LES11E1 Call cleared, too many invalid credit card call attempts1202 Handover, MES ready1281 Call failed, MES cannot accept1291 Call failed, MES cannot accept at present12B1 Call cleared by MES for unspecified reason12C2 Call cleared, no credit card valid message received12C3 Call failed, MES time-out (no terrestrial answer)12C4 Call cleared, authentication query not received (usually caused by call setup failure)12C5 Call cleared, MES missing sup service SU12C6 Call cleared, MES missing sup service 2SU12C7 Call cleared, MES missing SCPC channel release SU sup service12C8 Handover failed, LES not detected
Page 4–3818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal12D1 Call failed, Spot-beam data invalid12D2 Call failed, invalid scrambling vector1351 Call cleared, insufficient free memory1361 Call cleared by MES cable unwrap1362 Call cleared, long interruption in reception at MES1363 MES secondary clear due to repoint OR1391 Call cleared, traveled distance exceeds 700km1392 Call cleared, spot beam transition (call terminated because aircraft left spot beam)1393 Call cleared, Cooperative Mode1451 Call failed, terrestrial circuits congested1452 Call failed, LES congested (no channel and no circuit)1502 Handover, LES Ready, normal clear1551 Call failed, LES congested (no channel)1581 Call failed, service not provided at this LES1591 Call failed, service temporarily not available at this LES1592 Call cleared, credit card type not supported15A1 Call failed, MES not authorized at this LES15A2 Call failed, service not authorized at this LES15A3 Call cleared, credit card not authorized15A4 Call cleared, authentication reply invalid15A5 Call failed, PID not authorized for any service15A6 Call failed, PID not authorized for requested service15B1 Call cleared by LES for unspecified reason15C1 Call failed, LES time-out (no assignment)15C2 Call failed, LES time-out (no service address)15C3 Call failed, LES time-out (no scrambling vector)15C4 Call failed, no service address and no scrambling vector15C5 Call cleared, incomplete credit card data information15C7 Call failed, LES time-out (no MES Connect)15C9 Call cleared, no authentication reply15CA Call cleared, notification ack not received15CB Call cleared, invalid sequence number in notification ack15CC Handover failed, no response to request15CD Handover failed, MES not ready15D1 Call failed, LES time-out (invalid assignment) Table 4–20. Fault Code DefinitionsInmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
Page 4–3918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal15D2 LES MES already busy15E1 Call cleared but MES still transmitting (FAULT)1651 Call failed, LES congested (no channel unit)1661 Call failed, long interruption in reception at LES1662 LES long term blockage of SCPC MES16C2 LES missing MES SCPC16C3 Handover failed, MES not detected1790 Call cleared, failure credit card validation process1791 Call cleared, failure authentication process1811 NCS MES ID busy1812 NCS MES ID busy IPDS1841 Call cleared, NCS initiated preemption for incoming Pri.1 call1842 Call cleared, NCS initiated preemption for incoming Pri.2 call1843 Call cleared, NCS initiated preemption for incoming Pri.3 call1844 Call cleared, NCS initiated preemption1851 Call failed, satellite congestion NCS reject no SCPC available1852 Call failed, satellite congestion NCS reject SCPC does not match request1853 Call failed, lease channel congestion1854 Call failed, MES outside spot beam coverage area1855 Call rejected, preemption failed, no channel available1856 Call rejected, spot beam selection failed1857 Handover failed, channel not available18A1 NCS MES ID not found18A2 Call failed, MES not authorized18A3 Call failed, LES not authorized18B1 Call failed by NCS for unspecified reason18B2 Call rejected, invalid service requested18C1 NCS MES burst missing18C3 NCS MES busy preemption failed18D1 Call failed, invalid call request18E1 NCS MES busy already18E2 NCS MES busy already MPDS1F01 Call cleared by terrestrial circuit (normal call termination from ground source)1F11 Call failed, terrestrial party busy1F21 Call failed, LES time-out (no answer) Table 4–20. Fault Code DefinitionsInmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
Page 4–4018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal1F61 Call failed, terrestrial circuit failure1F62 Call failed, early clear by terrestrial circuit2000 MES int reject MES RQ invalid CNO2001 MES int reject MES RQ failed qualification2010 MES int reject MES RP invalid CNO2011 MES int reject MES RP failed qualification2012 MES int reject MES RP operation timeout2020 MES int reject NCSA missing2021 MES int reject NCSA invalid CNO2022 MES int reject NCSA failed qualification2023 Call failed, Signal lost on NCSA during call setup, check antenna and try again2024 Call failed, Missing channel assignment, try again2025 Call failed, Signal lost on NCSC during call setup, check antenna and try again2030 MES int reject LES ID failed qualification2040 MES int reject SCCS invalid CNO2041 MES int reject SCCS not paired2048 Call failed, invalid number dialed2049 Call failed, terminal not ready for call, try later2050 Call failed, Not allowed to make another mobile call yet, wait 20 seconds and try again2051 Call failed, dialed number is barred2052 Call failed, LES selected is barred2053 Call failed, number dialed must be in a phonebook2053 Call failed, terminal can only be used with a valid SIM2055 Call failed, user not logged in2056 Call failed, user not logged in to SIM2057 Call failed, LES is not in SIM allowed list2058 Call cleared, SIM removed during call2059 Call failed, terminal is locked for outgoing calls2060 MES int reject NCSS failed qualification2061 MES int reject spot beam invalid2062 Call failed, no spot beams in the ocean region, select another OR2063 Terminal ID is not set correctly, check with dealer2070 Lost NCSC signal, seeking2071 Stand-Alone Mode finished, seeking network Table 4–20. Fault Code DefinitionsInmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
Page 4–4118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal2080 SIM error, check SIM is inserted correctly2090 MES int reject ORR query invalid2091 MES int reject ORR invalid2092 MES int reject MES RR failed qualification2093 MES int reject MES RR invalid CNO2094 MES int reject NCRA missing2095 MES int reject NCRA lost lock2100 MES int reject illegal call type2101 MES Int reject illegal peripheral2102 Call request failed, call already in progress2103 Call failed, star code is badly formatted2104 Call failed, cannot accept two address book star codes2105 Call failed, address book entry not found2106 Call failed, star code does not exist2120 MES int reject no transmit power available2200 Battery flat for terminal operation2201 Call cleared, used all allocated time for call type2300 MES int reject no coop response2301 MES int reject no power2302 MES int reject no location report2400 MES int reject no ORA SU found2F00 LES int reject lack of MES RESP response2F01 LES int reject lack of MES ARN response2F02 LES int reject incorrect SVECSCPC8000 ACSE Recycling8001 ACSE Top Of Find BB8002 ACSE Top Of Process BB8010 ACSE Finding Primary NCS Long8011 ACSE Finding Secondary NCS Short8012 ACSE Finding Primary Standalone Short8013 ACSE Finding Primary NCS Short8014 ACSE Finding Primary Standalone Long8018 ACSE Finding Secondary Standalone Short8019 ACSE Finding Secondary Standalone Long8020 ACSE Found Primary NCS8021 ACSE Found Secondary NCS Table 4–20. Fault Code DefinitionsInmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
Page 4–4218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal8022 ACSE Found Primary Standalone8023 ACSE Found Secondary Standalone8024 ACSE found primary NGNCS8025 ACSE found secondary NGNCS8030 ACSE NSR Invalid8040 ACSE Inert8041 ACSE ODU Status8080 ACSE NSR Valid8081 ACSE NSR Valid LES A8100 ACSE Booting8110 ACSE Booted8120 ACSE FIDR ID Invalid8200 ACSE Spot Beam Selection8201 ACSE Next Spot Beam8202 ACSE Successful Spot Beam Selection8203 ACSE Failed To Find Spot Beam8204 ACSE Spot Beam Selective Clear8210 ACSE Spot Beam Reject Mobile Call No ID8211 ACSE Spot Beam Reject Mobile Call No TDM8300 ACSE ORR8301 ACSE Successful ORR8302 ACSE Failed ORR8303 ACSE No ORR8304 ACSE ORR Tune NCRA8305 ACSE ORR MES RR8306 ACSE failed retry ORR8306 ACSE failed retry ORR8310 ACSE ORR Query Begin8311 ACSE ORR Query Burst8312 ACSE ORR Query Successful8313 ACSE ORR Query Failed8400 ACSE Fixed Begin8401 ACSE Fixed MESRP8402 ACSE Fixed Call Type Set8410 ACSE Fixed Tune NCSA8411 ACSE Fixed Channel Assignment Table 4–20. Fault Code DefinitionsInmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
Page 4–4318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal8420 ACSE Fixed Clearing Call8421 ACSE Fixed Selective Clear8480 ACSE Fixed SCPC Begin8481 ACSE Fixed SCPC Transmitting8482 ACSE Fixed Authentication Begin8483 ACSE Fixed Authentication End8484 ACSE Fixed Power Control8485 ACSE Fixed MES Connect8486 ACSE Fixed Ringing Begin8500 ACSE Mobile Begin8501 ACSE Mobile MES RQ18502 ACSE Mobile MES RQ28503 ACSE Mobile Call Type Set8510 ACSE Mobile Tune NCSA8511 ACSE Mobile Channel Assignment8520 ACSE Mobile Clearing Call8521 ACSE Mobile Selective Clear8580 ACSE Mobile SCPC Begin8581 ACSE Mobile SCPC Transmitting8582 ACSE Mobile Authentication Begin8583 ACSE Mobile Authentication End8584 ACSE Mobile Power Control8585 ACSE Mobile LES Connect8586 ACSE Mobile Ringing Begin8800 ACSE cable call begin8801 ACSE cable call successful8900 ACSE Logoff Begin8901 ACSE Successful Logoff8902 ACSE No ORR Logoff9000 ACSE accepts call9003 ACSE accepted9004 ACSE rejected9020 ACSE call waiting9021 ACSE idle selective clear9022 ACSE TDM not found9080 ACSE rejected fixed call due to invalid NSR Table 4–20. Fault Code DefinitionsInmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
Page 4–4418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal9081 ACSE InMRSII9082 ACSE sounder turned on9083 ACSE sounder turned off9084 ACSE in lock9085 ACSE out of lock9086 ACSE ext sounder turned on9087 ACSE ext sounder turned off9088 ACSE timer about to expire9090 ACSE Smartcard activated9091 ACSE Smartcard removed9092 ACSE Smartcard error90A0 EXPPORT bonding started90A1 EXPPORT bonding ended90A2 EXPPORT remote panel present90A3 EXPPORT remote panel removed90B0 ACSE MPDS mode selected90B1 ACSE SCPC mode selected90C0 ACSE transmit on90C1 ACSE transmit off90D0 ACSE spot beam handover started90D1 ACSE spot beam termination timer started90F0 Event log wiped9100 Peripheral on hook9101 Peripheral off hook9102 Peripheral connected9103 Peripheral ringing9104 Peripheral ready9105 Peripheral hanging up9106 Peripheral hang up9107 Peripheral not responding9108 Peripheral dialing9109 Peripheral abort dialing9120 Peripheral DTMF accepted9121 Peripheral DTMF rejected9122 Peripheral invalid request9123 Peripheral valid request Table 4–20. Fault Code DefinitionsInmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
Page 4–4518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal9124 Peripheral bonding auto9125 Peripheral bonding slave9126 Peripheral bonding none9130 Peripheral STU enabled9131 Peripheral STU disabled9200 MSG T_AM received 9201 MSG A_AM received9202 MSG T_HA received9203 MMI normal9204 MMI inert9205 MMI programming9206 MMI reboot9207 MMI powerdown9208 MMI accepted9209 MMI rejectedB000 Mod error, generalB001 Mod error, tune failedB002 Mod error, mode failedB003 Mod error, mmr failedB004 Mod error, not respondingB010 MOD Invalid ModeB011 MOD Command InvalidB020 Mod error, su underflowB021 MOD Su overflowB022 MOD Su not transmittedB024 MOD invalid frame noB025 MOD invalid slot noB028 MOD cannot Tx Su while tuningB030 MOD channel out of rangeB032 MOD cannot tune while TxB033 MOD tuning in progressB040 MOD error watchdogB100 DEMOD error, generalB101 DEMOD error, tune failedB102 DEMOD error, mode failedB110 DEMOD invalid mode Table 4–20. Fault Code DefinitionsInmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
Page 4–4618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalB130 DEMOD channel out of rangeB133 DEMOD tuning in progressB200 Generic modem errorB201 RF error RX VHFB202 RF error RX LbandB204 RF error RX VHFB208 RF error TX LbandB210 RF error RF errorB220 RF error Ref errorB27F Mod watchdog trippedB280 Generic voice codec errorsB281 TMS spurious interruptB300 Outdoor unit failure, check connections to ODUB301 ODU error cannot set cable attenuatorB310 ODU error power response missingB311 ODU error tune response missingB312 ODU error HPA control response missingB313 ODU error HPA status response missingB314 ODU error alarm response missingB315 ODU error burst timer response missingB316 ODU error HPA backoff response missingB320 ODU error alarm heatB321 ODU error alarm burstB322 ODU error alarm powerB323 ODU error alarm over voltageB324 ODU error alarm reverse powerB328 ODU failed due to tx power checkB329 ODU error alarm timeoutB330 ODU error alarm timeout no tripB400 Internal temperature of unit too high, turn off for 10 minutesB401 Internal temperature sensor failedB410 Mod error, handshake failure, power down/up and try againB500 Battery charging communication failureB501 Power supply errorB580 Battery is over temperature, charging disabledB581 Battery temperature is now ok, charging enabled Table 4–20. Fault Code DefinitionsInmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
Page 4–4718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFFFD ACSE end markerFFFE Status undefinedFFFF Status OK400000 CT SP bad400000 No call pending400001 CT SP good400002 CT SP full400003 CT SP access denied400080 CT SP find400081 CT SP enumerate400082 CT SP no entries400090 CT SP delete4000A0 CT SP any4000F0 CT Terminal ID4000F1 CT Options4000F2 CT config names400100 CT SP spot beam selection400105 CT SP MPDS400110 CT SP ocean region registration400111" CT SP ORR query400112 CT SP log off400120 CT SP cable call400200 CT SP go idle400201 CT SP go idle due to configuration400202 CT SP selective clear400208 CT SP go idle clear spot beam400209 CT SP go idle clear NSR400210 CT SP go inert400211 CT SP go inert Smartcard400212 CT SP go inert DDS poll400900 CT SP ODU status400901 CT SP ODU status no alarms400902 CT SP ODU status DDS400910 CT SP prod test400911 CT SP prod test ODU401000 CT SP clear spot beam Table 4–20. Fault Code DefinitionsInmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
Page 4–4818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalE. Operational and Diagnostic Test Procedures(1) GeneralPerform all test procedures presented in this section in their entirety to test the total operational status of the HSD or HSD-X transceiver. If the unit fails any test, refer to the troubleshooting procedures to determine the faulty circuit. Conduct operational tests for all units returned to service after repair.800103 Mobile AMBE80010F Mobile 64k speech800124 Mobile aero 64k speech800404 Mobile data800504 Mobile facsimile800606 Mobile 64k UDI800607 Mobile 56k UDI800610 Mobile 64k audio 3k1800622 Mobile aero 64k UDI800623 Mobile aero 56k UDI800625 Mobile aero 64k audio 3k18D0FFF Mobile MiniM8E0FFF Mobile HSD8F0FFF MobileC00103 Fixed AMBEC0010F Fixed 64k speechC00124 Fixed aero 64k speechC00404 Fixed dataC00504 Fixed facsimileC00606 Fixed 64k UDIC00607 Fixed 56k UDIC00610 Fixed 64k audio 3k1C00622 Fixed aero 64k UDIC00623 Fixed aero 56k UDIC00625 Fixed aero 64k audio 3k1CD0FFF Fixed miniMCE0FFF Fixed HSDCF0FFF Fixed Table 4–20. Fault Code DefinitionsInmarsat Cause Code Code Definition
Page 4–4918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalThe procedures assume that the technical personnel are familiar with the test equipment used and can operate the equipment to produce the required inputs and obtain the required results (indications). Refer to the detailed operating procedures and descriptions of the HSD Maintenance Utility Program included in this section.CAUTION: Only Authorized Technical Personnel, trained in general aviation workmanship, that have a basic understanding of SATCOM systems, should proceed with the Operational and Diagnostic test procedures presented in this manual.CAUTION: Changes to some Menu functions may seriously degrade system operation.Note: This manual describes the basic maintenance utility program functions, menus, and reports required for the testing and fault isolation procedures presented in this section. Please consult EMS SATCOM support personnel before entering any unfamiliar menu selections not described in this manual.Note: Using a terminal emulation program, open a log file and save all test results for future reference and test records. This section includes detailed user instructions on opening and saving log files using the HSD maintenance utility program.Note: The procedures presented in this section aid the technical personnel in upgrading, maintaining, or troubleshooting an HSD system. Maintenance does not imply lubrication or adjustment activities.REFERENCE INFORMATION: Refer to the Outline and Installation drawings and the Interconnection diagrams presented in "Installation" on page 3-1 for additional information.(2) Test Setup ProcedureThe test setup procedure is presented in Table 4–21. Refer to "Connection Requirements" on page 4-4 for detailed connection of test equipment and operating instructions for the HSD maintenance utility program. Table 4–21. Test Setup ProcedureSTEP ACTION0 Ensure that the HSD or HSD-X transceiver is neither powered up nor connected to a power source before proceeding.0 If a remote access has not been installed: on the front panel of the HSD or HSD-X transceiver, remove the maintenance-port-connector cover.0 Connect a cable to the HSD or HSD-X front-panel or remote maintenance port connector.0 Connect the other end of the cable to a computer’s serial port. 0 Open a log file to capture all test data.
Page 4–5018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(3) Post TestWhen testing is completed: 1. Save the log file of the test results (or data) for future reference. 2. Remove power from the unit under test and all other test equipment. 3. Disconnect test equipment from the HSD or HSD-X unit. 4. Replace the maintenance-port connector cover (if previously removed during the test setup).(4) Installation and Operational Verification TestsThe test procedures assume that an approved ARINC 741 compatible Antenna Subsystem has been completely installed and tested as per the manufacturer’s instructions. To facilitate and document the installation of the equipment, refer to "Installation Checklist" on page D-1.(a) Pre Power-up ChecksCarry out all mechanical and electrical verification tests in the systematic order presented in this document.(b) Mechanical VerificationRefer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed mechanical information. Table 4–22 itemizes recommended mechanical checks.(c) Electrical VerificationRefer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed electrical information. Table 4–23 itemizes the recommended electrical checks.Note: When conducting the following tests, do not rack the HSD or HSD-X.WARNING: To avoid personal injury and/or equipment damage, use extreme caution during the Voltage Levels measurements. Table 4–22. HSD Mechanical VerificationSTEP Item Checked Verification Description0 Mounting TrayPhysical PlacementEnsure service/maintenance accessibilityCheck environmental considerations are metCooling, air-flow, and pressure0 Fan Tray Confirm plug configuration is correctCheck chassis bondingEnsure fan rotation is unobstructed and rotates freely0 ARINC 600 Connector Check polarized pints
Page 4–5118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–23. HSD Electrical VerificationSTEP Item Checked Verification Description1.0 Power connectionsModel 1110-A-0001/1110-A-0080/1110-A-0160: 28 V dc polarityModel 1110-A-0060/1110-A-0070/1110-A-0150: 115 V ac polarityChassis Ground @ BP8 – resistance measurement2.0 Voltage levelsCAUTION: When power is applied to the rack, the fan energizes.Check voltage levels:Model 1110-A-0001/1110-A-0080/1110-A-0160 (28 V dc): between BP2 (+ve) and BP3 (return)Model 1110-A-0060/1110-A-0070/1110-A-0150 (115 V ac): between BPI (115-H) and BP7 (115-C)3.0 IRS Input IRS wiring:Inertial system wired to TP4J (A) and TP4K (B)IRS format:ARINC 429 Interface Table 4–24. HSD Electrical VerificationSTEP Item Checked Verification Description1.0 Configuration Strap PinsSDI: Strapped for HGA, Pin TP5B to TP5DSystem Configuration: Strapped for System Mode, Pins TP4A, TP4B, TP4C, and/or TP4D strapped to TP7KData I/O:User specific, default to unrestricted (ISDN only): Pins MP5H to TP7KForward Address: User specificWOW: (Optional)2.0 Ethernet Strapped to RJ45 distribution pointsNote: Optional—other service may be preferred.3.0 ISDN Strapped to RJ45 distribution pointsNote: Optional—other service may be preferred.4.0 DTE - MPDS(RS232)Strapped to DB9S distribution connectorNote: Optional—other service may be preferred.
Page 4–5218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(5) Configuration Parameters VerificationThe system configuration parameters can now be verified. Verify and document using "Installation Checklist" on page D-1.(a) Parameter Verification ProcedureFor units operating control processor software versions 5.7 or earlier: 1. From Menu 3, select item ‘L’ (list EEPROM). The EEPROM listing appears on the screen. The EEPROM listing appears as shown in Figure 4–30. 2. From Menu 4, select item ‘Q’ (channel card forward IDs). Ensure the displayed Forward ID(s), for all channel cards, are correct.For units operating control processor software versions 5.7 or later:• From Menu 3, select item ‘O’ (list ORT). The ORT listing appears on the screen, as shown in Figure 4–31. Verify that the correct system configuration parameters are listed in the ORT.5.0 Remotes(Optional—but recommended)Remote Reset switch operationMaintenance Port, remote accessPower and Fault LED indicators6.0 RF Coax Rx input cable loss from DLNA to HSD at BP12 and to the RFU at TPC1 (including splitter)Tx output cable loss from HSD at MPC1 to DLNA7.0 Antenna ConnectionAntenna manufacturer and modelMulti-Control loopbacks installed from TP3E to TP1A and TP3F to TP1B (Stand-Alone Mode)8.0 SDU HSD to SDU interconnect wiring confirmed (Non-Stand-Alone modes) Table 4–24. HSD Electrical VerificationSTEP Item Checked Verification Description
Page 4–5318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–30. Sample EEPROM Listing (Control Processor Software, Version 4.5)EEPROM LISTING:MAGIC NUMBER :OK MAGIC NUMBER :OKEEPROM VERSION NUMBER 2001FIRMWARE VERSION 1018SERIAL NUMBER: xxxIGNORED FAULTS: 0HARDWARE CONFIG: 0NUMBER OF POWERUPS (index 0) 5HOURS OF OPERATION (index 0) 11MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERSHIT 'L' for MOREHPA-ANTENNA CABLE LOSS: 2.5 dBFORWARD ID: xxxxxx AORW LES ACCESS CODE: 1TERRESTRIAL NETWORK ID: 0HPA-CHANNEL CARD CABLE LOSS: 10.0 dBMAX HPA GAIN: 66.3 dBMIN ANTENNA GAIN: 11.0 dBHPA-ANTENNA CABLE LOSS: 2.5 dBFORWARD ID: xxxxxx AORW LES ACCESS CODE: 1TERRESTRIAL NETWORK ID: 0HPA-CHANNEL CARD CABLE LOSS: 10.0 dBMAX HPAGAIN: 66.3 dBMIN ANTENNA GAIN: 11.0dBMAX EIRP: 53.5 dBMAX CHANNEL_CARD POWER: 0.0
Page 4–5418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalHSD SERIAL NUMBER S/N ???MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS HPA TO ANTENNA LOSS: 3.5 dB MANUALLY SET FORWARD ID: 000000 MANUALLY SET GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS: DISABLED MANUALLY SET REGISTRATION REQ'D BEFORE CALLS: DISABLED MANUALLY SET CHANNEL CARD TO HPA LOSS: 10.0 dB MANUALLY SET MAX HPA GAIN: 65.00 dB MANUALLY SET MIN ANTENNA GAIN: 8.0 dB MANUALLY SET MAX EIRP: 52.5 dBm MANUALLY SET MAX CHANNEL_CARD POWER: 0.0 dBm MANUALLY SET NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS : 2 MANUALLY SETHIT 'O' for MORE FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED: 1 MANUALLY SET MIN SECS BETWEEN CHAN CARD RESETS: 300 MANUALLY SET MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO: 1 MANUALLY SET MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL: 0 MANUALLY SET TERMINAL CATEGORY: HW STRAPPED VALUE MANUALLY SET VIPER ANTENNA GAIN : 12 dB MANUALLY SET VIPER HPA/ANT LOSS : 2.5 dB MANUALLY SET RECEIVER CALIBRATION: 11.0 dB MANUALLY SET MAX HPA POWER: 18.0 dBw MANUALLY SET AERO POWER ALLOCATION: 16.0 dBw MANUALLY SET CHANNEL CARD STARTUP DELAY: 30 sec MANUALLY SET RX32 ACTIVE: 1 MANUALLY SET DEFAULT LATITUDE: 45 D 26' 60.0" N MANUALLY SETHIT 'O' for MORE DEFAULT LONGITUDE: 75 D 42' 0.0" W MANUALLY SET OBEY OXCO STATUS: YES MANUALLY SET CC DEBUG PORT: NONE MANUALLY SET MAX CHANNEL CARD BACKOFF: 28.5 dB MANUALLY SET CO-OP MODE BACKOFF ADJUSTMENT: 10.0 dB MANUALLY SET ALLOW CALLS DESPITE HPA ERRORS: NO (DON'T TRANSMIT IF ERRORS) MANUALLY SET CO-OP MODE DUAL CHANNEL: DISABLED MANUALLY SET MOBILE BURST TIMEOUT: 4000 msec MANUALLY SET MPDS SPOTBEAM HANDOVER: DISABLED MANUALLY SET MAX SIMULATED HPA BACKOFF: 31 dB MANUALLY SET HCM AERO/M4 PRIORITIZATION: AERO MANUALLY SET AERO 'C-CHANNEL' ALLOCATION: 19.5 MANUALLY SET HPA GAIN DROOP SLOPE: 0.10 dB/dB MANUALLY SETHIT 'O' for MORE CATEGORY B LOWER FREQUENCY LIMIT: 1644.50 MHz MANUALLY SET CATEGORY B UPPER FREQUENCY LIMIT: 1660.50 MHz MANUALLY SETHIT 'O' for MOREORT OCEAN REGIONS: SAT LONG LES ID SECONDARY LES ID TNID W AOR WEST (region #0) 54.0W 1 1 0 E AOR EAST (region #1) 15.5W 1 1 0 P POR (region #2) 178.0E 1 1 0 I IOR (region #3) 64.0E 1 1 0ORT TOOL VERSION:
Page 4–5518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–31. HSD ORT Sample Display (software version 5.7 or later)(6) System Power-up ChecksNote: Before proceeding, ensure that all pre power-up, mechanical, and electrical verifications have been successfully performed and documented using the Installation Checklist provided in "Installation Checklist" on page D-1.(a) PreparationThe following tests serve primarily to confirm proper system power-up; therefore, they can be performed while the aircraft is still in the hanger. Ensure that a computer, configured as instructed on page 7, is available for testing.(b) Initial Visual LED VerificationThe system's Power ON and Fault LEDs provide a visual status indication on the HSD and HSD-X front panel and on the optional remote panel. 1. Verify that the LEDs (at both locations) repeatedly cycle ON/OFF when power is applied. 2. Once the cycle has completed (~5 seconds), verify that the power LED remains illuminated.(c) Initial Computer Power up DisplayWith the computer connected and configured to accept Maintenance Port data, power-up the HSD, and verify the initial power-up screen displays as shown in the example, Figure 4–32. The example provides a display using a Stand-Alone Mode installation.ORT TOOL NAME:ORT TOOL PART NUMBER:ORT TOOL OEM VERSION:ORT PART NUMBER:CHECKSUM (stored at offset 464) 12133 OKlongest write cycle took 0 MSEC
Page 4–5618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–32. HSD Power-up Display(7) System On-Air ChecksConduct system on-air checks to confirm voice and data call capabilities through the satellite and ground station (LES) network. Additional testing confirms that proper signal level parameters are obtained through the antenna subsystem.(a) PreparationBefore attempting on-air testing procedures: 1. Complete and confirm all service provider registration and activation. 2. Complete and document all pre power-up and power-up checks. 3. Position the aircraft outside, away from all obstructions in the line-of-site to the satellite used. 4. Apply the aircraft power source. 5. Power on and wait for the IRS to align. 6. Connect a computer (with a terminal emulation program) to the HSD transceiver maintenance port.Note: Several system parameters, such as IRS data, RF signal quality, and log-on messaging, appear on the maintenance port display. Capture and save this maintenance port information to a file for later review or to serve as an historical test record.(b) On-Air Power up and Logon ProcedureFor this test procedure, use the Level 2, maint password to access the HSD Maintenance Utility Program. 1. With the computer connected, powered-up, and ready to accept maintenances port data:• Power up the HSDKERNEL Vx.x -- Mon Oct 07 13:36:26 2002TESTING RAM ......RAM OK.HSD APPLICATION Vx.x -- Thu Apr 24 08:02:39 2003Type "menu" to activate the maintenance port menus.Other passwords provide different levels of authorization.HSD reset -- watchdog may have fired 77 seconds after powerupfault log sector 15 contains 114 entriesREAL TIME CLOCK PRESENT: 9:42:53 Tue Jun 10, 2003channel card forward id ABC123STAND-ALONE MODE!!ensure that arinc test data doesn't bother sat906powering up channel card #1powering up channel card #2KERNEL Vx.x -- Mon Oct 07 13:36:26 2002TESTING RAM ......RAM OK.
Page 4–5718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 2. Once the power up messages appear:• Enter the Level 2, password: maint 3. Press the equal sign on the keyboard (=) to access the “reports” menu, then activate report items 21 (call codes) and 23 (standard output). Remember to save these selected items by using the “S” (save to EEPROM) command. 4. In Menu 2, press Z to reset the HSD. • The system resets and displays the power up equivalent reset messages (as previously shown in Figure 4–32). 5. After the reset messages appear, immediately type the password maint. • The data from the previously selected report items 21 and 23 appears.This data refreshes on-screen every second. For easier reading of the data, capture this information in a log file for later review. 6. Compare the output data to the sample shown in Figure 4–33.• Several parameters need to be reviewed and documented for operational verification purposes. Refer to "Installation Checklist" on page D-1 for a detailed list of parameters. 7. Verify that the following system information, as shown on the “System Initialization Display” during the test, is accurate for the HSD unit under test. • Correct forward ID displayed• Correct installation mode displayed• Correct number of channel cards listed • All channel cards trigger ocean region registrationThe sample figure has been edited for clarity. A successful log on is confirmed when the message “ACSE Successful ORR” and valid “beam” numbers are reported, e.g. beam 4.
Page 4–5818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–33. Log-on Sample Initialization DisplayKERNEL V1.6 -- Mon Oct 07 13:36:26 2002TESTING RAM ......RAM OK.HSD APPLICATION Vx.x -- Thu Oct 10 08:36:29 2002Type "menu" to activate the maintenance port menus.Other passwords provide different levels of authorization.fault log sector 15 contains 116 entriesREAL TIME CLOCK NOT DETECTEDchannel card forward id ABC123STAND-ALONE MODEpowering up channel card #1powering up channel card #2dop 0 ppb az 0.0 deg el 45.0 deg ant gain 11 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=**** ?? C call=?? CARD #2: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=**** ?? C call=?? 45D10'30.3"N 75D6'20.9"W PT 1.8D RL 1.6D HD 25.5D TK 1.8D 23 knotsdop -28 ppb az 125.6 deg el 36.3 deg AOR WEST ant gain 11 (p/t)45D10'30.3"N 75D6'20.9"W PT 1.8D RL 1.6D HD 25.5D TK 1.8D 23 knotsdop -28 ppb az 125.6 deg el 36.3 deg AOR WEST ant gain 11 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=*** sig=**** ?? C call=?? CARD #2: C/No=*** sig=**** ?? C call=?? 45D10'30.3"N 75D6'20.9"W PT 1.8D RL 1.6D HD 25.5D TK 1.8D 23 knotsdop -28 ppb az 125.6 deg el 36.3 deg AOR WEST ant gain 11 (p/t)powering up channel card #2powering up channel card #1dop -28 ppb az 125.6 deg el 36.3 deg AOR WEST ant gain 11 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=*** sig=**** 26 C call=?? CARD #2: C/No=*** sig=**** 24 C call=?? 45D10'30.3"N 75D6'20.9"W PT 1.8D RL 1.6D HD 25.5D TK 1.8D 23 knotsdop -28 ppb az 125.6 deg el 36.3 deg AOR WEST ant gain 11 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=*** sig=**** 26 C call=?? CARD #2: C/No=*** sig=**** 24 C call=?? 45D10'30.3"N 75D6'20.9"W PT 1.8D RL 1.6D HD 25.5D TK 1.8D 23 knotsSENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMAND!!CARD #2 -- CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING OCEAN REGION REG IN AOR WEST!!SENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMAND!!CARD #1 -- CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING OCEAN REGION REG IN AOR WEST!!dop -28 ppb az 125.6 deg el 36.3 deg AOR WEST ant gain 11 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=**** 26 C call=?? beam=255 CARD #2: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 24 C call=?? beam=255 45D10'30.3"N 75D6'20.9"W PT 1.8D RL 1.6D HD 25.5D TK 1.8D 23 knotsdop -28 ppb az 125.6 deg el 36.3 deg AOR WEST ant gain 11 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 26 C call=?? beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 24 C call=?? beam=4 45D10'30.3"N 75D6'20.9"W PT 1.8D RL 1.6D HD 25.5D TK 1.8D 23 knotsdop -28 ppb az 125.6 deg el 36.3 deg AOR WEST ant gain 11 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=51.3 dB/Hz sig=-15.9 dB 26 C call=?? beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=51.1 dB/Hz sig=-8.0 dB 24 C call=?? beam=4 45D10'30.3"N 75D6'20.9"W PT 1.8D RL 1.6D HD 25.5D TK 1.8D 23 knotsdop -28 ppb az 125.6 deg el 36.3 deg AOR WEST ant gain 11 (p/t)
Page 4–5918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(c) On-Air Voice/Data Call VerificationOnce the system has logged on, place a test voice and/or data call. Refer to "System Description" on page 1-1 for detailed call procedures. Verification of all aircraft communication functions is recommended. Record the test call result on the Installation Checklist provided in "Installation Checklist" on page D-1.Note: For the purposes of providing a sample display, an ISDN voice call is documented. Reference the HSD User’s Guide for specific instructions on how to place voice and data calls.(d) On-Air Voice/Data Call Verification Procedure 1. Ensure the maintenance port report items 21 and 23 are activated. 2. Place a test call. Observe and verify the maintenance port messages are similar to the sample provided in Figure 4–34.
Page 4–6018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–34. HSD Call Sample Display(8) Antenna Tracking ChecksAs a final ground-based system check, verify the antenna tracking. This confirms proper signal reception and transmission for all aircraft headings.(a) Preparation• Perform all previous tests and document the results items before proceeding. 12:43:24 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 14.00 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 47 dB/Hz12:43:24 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=*** sig=-16.4 dB 28 C IDLE IN CALL beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-15.2 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:25 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-16.4 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-15.0 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:26 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-16.8 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-15.4 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:26 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 12:43:27 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.4 dB/Hz sig=-15.6 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:42 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=54.1 dB/Hz sig=-11.6 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.9 dB/Hz sig=-15.8 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:43 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 0 dB/Hz12:43:43 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=*** sig=-11.6 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.8 dB/Hz sig=-15.5 dB 30 C no call beam=4 12:43:55 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-10.7 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.6 dB/Hz sig=-15.3 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:55 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 18.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 12:43:56 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.1 dB/Hz sig=-15.5 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:58 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.9 dB/Hz sig=-15.8 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:58 #1 ABC123 E4 stop 1f01 call cleared by terrestrial circuit 28 C
Page 4–6118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal• As directed in previous tests, connect a computer to the maintenance port and use Level 2, maint password to access the HSD maintenance utility program.• Power up all avionics and align the IRS.• Taxi or tow the aircraft to an unobstructed, line-of-site location where a complete 360° rotation is possible.(b) Antenna Tracking Verification Procedure 1. From the “reports” menu, enable items 8, 20, and 23. Note: Reports item 8 (starboard antenna status word) is ONLY required where conformal antennae are installed. 2. Position the aircraft at a baseline, start-of-test heading (0° recommended). 3. Confirm that the baseline heading, as reported by the aircraft IRS is similar to that reported from the “HD” entry in reports item 23. 4. Record the following data in "Installation Checklist" on page D-1:• Antenna selected—port or starboard (conformal only)• Antenna gain and azimuth angle• Heading• Channel Card number “1” and “2” C/No and signal level 5. Rotate the aircraft through a full 360° circle while stopping to record data at the following heading intervals:• For conformal or phased arrays—every 15° • For mechanically steered antenna—every 30°(9) Optional System ChecksThe following procedures are recommended—but not essential; however, they serve to confirm successful completion of all previous tests.(a) PreparationActivate report items 21 and 23 for the following checks.(b) Optional Voice/Data Calls ProcedureNote: As in previous tests, open a log file to capture all maintenance port activity during aircraft taxiing, flight, and landing segments.1. Voice/data calls – ground segment:• Place any combination of voice and/or data calls while the aircraft is taxied in a full circle and/or and figure 8 pattern. Note any voice or data anomalies.2. Voice/data calls – in flight:• Place any combination of voice and/or data calls during any of the segments listed above. The flight pattern may include “standard rate of turn”, figure 8s, or circles. Note any voice or data anomalies.
Page 4–6218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalF. Operational Mode and Configuration System ChecksThis section describes system checks designed for specific HSD modes of operation. (1) Verifying Cooperative Mode System OperationThis section provides system operational verification procedures that are specific to Cooperative Mode installations. The following system verification procedures use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program to access system information. Note: Record all test results in "Installation Checklist" on page D-1.Note: Depending on the version of software and the system configuration installed, the actual menus and screen displays appearing in “live” systems may differ slightly from the illustrations provided in this document. The illustrations also use “x.x” as a substitute for the actual firmware version.(2) Verifying Honeywell Combined Mode System OperationThis section provides system operational verification procedures that are specific to Honeywell Combined Mode installations. The following system verification procedures use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program to access system information. Note: Record all test results in "Installation Checklist" on page D-1.(a) Checking HPA Status To check the HPA Status: 1. With the Maintenance Port Utility program activated (MAINT password access), press the equals sign (=) to activate the “Reports”. 2. Press Ctrl+N to scroll to report 25. 3. To toggle on the HPA ARINC I/O report, type 25. Report 25 toggles ON. 4. Press Esc. The “Reports” for HPA Status appears on screen. The screen refreshes every few seconds. 5. Confirm that the report shows SSM as “normal operation” and that SDI appears configured as HGA HPA. (See example provided above.) 6. Toggle OFF report 25. (Press = , then type 25. Report 25 appears as “OFF”).HPA maintenance word 600002: SSM: NORMAL OPERATION SDI: HGA HPAHPA status word 64137a: SSM: NORMAL OPERATION SDI: HGA HPAOUTPUT POWER: 28.0 dB LESS THAN 40WMAX. AVAILABLE RMS POWER: 2.0 dB GREATER THAN 40WHELD POWER LINEAR CARRIER OFF BACKOFF RANGE= 31 dB
Page 4–6318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(b) Checking EIRP power Check EIRP power values during system operation using the HSD Maintenance Port Utility program. Place a number of call types and combinations while using the “reports” function of the HSD Maintenance Port Utility program and record the reported values in "Installation Checklist" on page D-1. (c) Test Set-up Procedure 1. With the Maintenance Port Utility program activated (MAINT password access), press the equals sign (=) to activate the “Reports”. 2. Press Ctrl+N to scroll to report 78. 3. To toggle on the vt100 EIRP/power report, type 78. Report 78 toggles ON. 4. Press Esc. The “Reports” for vt100 EIRP/power appears on screen. The “Reports” screen refreshes every few seconds. (d) EIRP Test Procedures 1. Place an HSD ISDN voice call using channel card one (repeat procedure placing a call using the second channel card), and then place a multi-link PPP ISDN data call (128 kbps ISDN) to confirm bonding is operational. • Confirm that the EIRP/Watts value begins at approximately 20 to 22.5 W until it stabilizes to a lower power usage value of approximately 17.0 W until the end of the call.• Confirm that the HPA value is in the range of 11 W to 16 W during the call. 2. Place two simultaneous HSD Swift64 ISDN voice calls (one call from each channel card) and while both calls are connected, confirm that the EIRP/Watts value is reported similar to the values presented in Figure 4–36 and Figure 4–37. 3. Place one Aero H/H+ call. The Aero Watts value should initially increase to a value of 8 to 10 W and then stabilize to lower watt value of 1.5 to 2.5 W when the call has stabilized. Refer to Figure 4–38 and Figure 4–39. 4. Place two simultaneous Aero H/H+ calls. The Aero H/H+ Watts value should initially increase to a value of 8 to 10 W and then stabilize to lower watt value of 1.5 to 2.5 W when the call has stabilized. Refer to Figure 4–40. Keeping the two Aero H/H+ calls up, place one HSD Swift64 ISDN call. Refer to Figure 4–41. 5. Place two HSD Swift64 ISDN voice calls (one call from each channel card) and while both calls are connected, place an Aero H/H+ voice call. The Aero Watts value should initially increase to a value of 8 to 10 W and then stabilize to lower watt value of 1.5 to 2.5 W when the call has stabilized. Refer to Figure 4–42.
Page 4–6418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 6. Place two HSD Swift64 ISDN voice calls (one call from each channel card) and while both calls are connected, place two Aero H/H+ voice calls. The Aero Watts value should initially increase to a value of 8 to 10 W and then stabilize to lower watt value of 1.5 to 2.5 W when the call has stabilized. Refer to Figure 4–43 and Figure 4–44. 7. Toggle OFF report 78. (Press = , then type 78. Report 78 appears as “OFF”).(e) Verifying System Operation when “In-Call” (Report 78)The values shown in the following examples of the HSD Maintenance Port Utility, Report 78, are derived from an HCM system operating with a 12 dBW gain and 2.5 dBW HPA-to-antenna-loss and assumes good beam coverage.Figure 4–35. Stable Connection with one M4 (Swift64) callFigure 4–36. Initial Connection with two M4 (Swift64) callsFigure 4–37. Stable Connection with two M4 (Swift64) callsCHANNEL CARD #1 #2EIRP/WATTS 0.0/0 17.5/6HPA (ITS): 11.3 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 6.3 WATTS ANT GAIN: 1215:05:55 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 5.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 06 WATTSAERO WATTS: USED=00 RESERVED=13 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.0 dBCHANNEL CARD #1 #2EIRP/WATTS 18.5/8 22.5/20HPA (ITS): 35.7 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 27.9 WATTS ANT GAIN: 1212:05:31 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 0.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 20 WATTSAERO WATTS: USED=00 RESERVED=13 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.8 dBCHANNEL CARD #1 #2EIRP/WATTS 17.5/6 17.5/6HPA (ITS): 15.9 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 12.5 WATTS ANT GAIN: 1212:07:33 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 4.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 08 WATTSAERO WATTS: USED=00 RESERVED=13 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.4 dB
Page 4–6518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–38. Call Initialization (Aero H/H+ call)Figure 4–39. Stable Connection with one Aero H/H+ callFigure 4–40. Connection with two Aero H/H+ callsFigure 4–41. Connection with two Aero H/H+ calls and one M4 (Swift64) callFigure 4–42. Connection with two M4 (Swift64) calls and one Aero H callCHANNEL CARD #1 #2EIRP/WATTS 0.0/0 0.0/0HPA (ITS): 9.0 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 0.0 WATTS ANT GAIN: 1215:10:02 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 0.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 20 WATTSAERO WATTS: USED=10 RESERVED=23 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.2 dBCHANNEL CARD #1 #2EIRP/WATTS 0.0/0 0.0/0HPA (ITS): 2.2 WATTS H CHANNEL CARDS: 0.0 WATTS ANT GAIN: 1215:11:24 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 0.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 20 WATTSAERO WATTS: USED=02 RESERVED=14 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=61.2 dBCHANNEL CARD #1 #2EIRP/WATTS 0.0/0 0.0/0HPA (ITS): 4.0 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 0.0 WATTS ANT GAIN: 1215:14:09 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 0.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 20 WATTSAERO WATTS: USED=04 RESERVED=16 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=61.7 dBCHANNEL CARD #1 #2EIRP/WATTS 17.5/6 0.0/0HPA (ITS): 15.9 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 6.2 WATTS ANT GAIN: 1215:15:48 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 3.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 10 WATTSAERO WATTS: USED=04 RESERVED=17 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.3 dBCHANNEL CARD #1 #2EIRP/WATTS 18.5/8 18.5/8 HPA (ITS): 17.9 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 15.7 WATTS ANT GAIN: 12 =04 RESERVED=17 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.6 dB12:16:10 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 4.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 08 WATTSAERO WATTS: USED=02 RESERVED=15 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.6 dB
Page 4–6618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–43. Initial Connection with two Aero H/H+ calls and two M4 (Swift64) callsFigure 4–44. Stable Connection with two Aero H/H+ calls and two M4 (Swift64) callsIf the HSD Honeywell Combined Mode system does not pass the system operational verification procedure, or if the system fails, refer to the test and fault isolation checks presented in the following table.CHANNEL CARD #1 #2EIRP/WATTS 18.5/8 17.5/6HPA (ITS): 22.5 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 14.2 WATTS ANT GAIN: 1212:10:22 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 5.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 06 WATTSAERO WATTS: USED=11 RESERVED=24 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.8 dBCHANNEL CARD #1 #2EIRP/WATTS 18.5/8 17.5/6HPA (ITS): 17.9 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 14.3 WATTS ANT GAIN: 1212:12:01 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 5.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 06 WATTSAERO WATTS: USED=02 RESERVED=15 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.5 dB Table 4–25. Honeywell Combined Mode Basic Fault ChecksSYMPTOM CHECKSystem “not working” Strapping and SDI – HPA StatusNo communication with avionicsCheck multi-control wiringUnable to place an HSD Swift64 callActivate Report 38 and check for power request value. Check RF connections between the Transmit cable and the HSD DLNACheck the connection of the receive cable between the HSD and the splitterUnable to place an Aero H/H+ callCheck transmit cable between the Aero H RFU and the HSD HPAIf a low receive value is indicated on either the HSD or Honeywell SDU, check splitter connections (receive cable from DLNA to the splitter)Check the connection on the Aero H RFU receive cable connectorCalls dropping when placing multiple calls HPA to antenna, cable loss value may not be accurate. Re-measure the HPA to antenna cable loss and re-configure the HSD system to match the revised value.
Page 4–6718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(3) Verifying Multi-Channel Configuration System OperationThis section provides system operational verification procedures that are specific to Multi-Channel configuration installations. The following system verification procedures use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program to access system information. Note: Record all test results in "Installation Checklist" on page D-1.The following system verification procedures use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility’s “console-mode” functionality to access system information from all of the HSD-X units in a Multi-Channel installation. (a) Activating “Console-Mode”The HSD-Xs are monitored using the ”console-mode” function of the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program. To remotely access an HSD-X for monitoring purposes using the “console-mode” feature of the HSD-128 transceiver’s Maintenance Port Utility Program: 1. Connect to the HSD-128 Maintenance Port (using either the front panel or remote access connector). 2. Open a session of the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program using the password MAINT. 3. In Menu 18, press X. The application prompts you to enter the number of the HSD-X you want to monitor. 4. Type the number of the HSD-X you want to monitor, and then press Enter. 5. Enter the password: maint The reports screen appears for the selected HSD-X.
Page 4–6818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(b) Installation Check – Multi-ChannelConduct the following installation check to confirm proper Multi-Channel installation and configuration before performing the operational verification tests. Before beginning the system checks, connect to the HSD-128 Maintenance Port and open the HSD Maintenance Utility Program using the password MAINT. 1. Check the Forward ID in all units. •In Menu 4, press Q. 2. Check the System Config and I/O strapping is correctly installed for all units. • Activate Report 28: Press the equal sign “=”, type 28, press Enter, and then press Esc to activate the report. 3. Check the cable loss values are in the required range. 4. Check that LES Access Codes are configured correctly in all units. •In Menu 3, press O (until the LES access codes are displayed). 5. Check that the HSD-X “slaves” are recognized by the system. • Activate Report 78: Press the equal sign “=”, type 78, press Enter, and then press Esc to activate the report. All installed HSD-X units should be listed on screen as shown in the 4-channel system example below. MENU 18 FIRMWARE Vx.xX HSD-X slave console mode B HSD-X slave cable lossL list HSD-X slave cable loss V get HSD-X firmware version<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reportsTERMINAL: HSD-X NETWORK MODE which slave (1 thru 2 -- 0=none) ? 1Slave #1 console mode. Press ~ to exit. MENU 1 FIRMWARE Vx.xX override forward id L test LEDsY explain hpa error status S set hcm attenuatorR hcm RF threshold<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reportsTERMINAL: HSD-X NETWORK MODEID=XXXXXX config=11111000 DUART1=11101111 DUART2=10001111 DUART3=11111111DATA I/O CONFIG=00001010
Page 4–6918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(c) Operational Verification Tests – Multi-ChannelThe operational verification test procedures provided in this section are specific to Multi-Channel HSD systems and confirm basic system operation. All verification tests require using the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program. 1. Verify valid receive (Rx) signals:• With the system powered up, activate Report 23. Confirm that the receive C/No signal value is greater than 50 dB/Hz as shown in the example below. 2. Verify valid transmit (Tx) signals:• Activate Report 78. • Place a call on the first channel of the Multi-Channel HSD system.• Confirm that the EIRP/Watts values are similar to the examples provided in Figure 4–45 and Figure 4–46.• Repeat step b. and c. for each channel installed on the system. 3. Verify Multi-Channel Operation:• Activate Report 78. • Place calls on each channel of the Multi-Channel HSD system.• Confirm that the EIRP values are similar to the examples provided in Figure 4–47.Figure 4–45. Initial Call, Channel #1CHANNEL CARD #1 #2 S1 S2EIRP/WATTS 0.0/0 0.0/0 0.0/0 0.0/0HPA (ITS): 4.0 WATTS H CHANNEL CARDS: 0.0 WATTS ANT GAIN: 1411:33:28 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 0.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 14 WATTSAERO WATTS: USED=00 HPA=60 WATTS HPA GAIN=59.9 dB45D21'16.1"N 75D45'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 180.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots11:35:55 dop 0 ppb az 330.7 deg el 33.5 deg AOR WEST ant gain 14 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=55.5 dB/Hz sig=-15.9 dB 26.0 C no call beam=5CARD #2: C/No=55.9 dB/Hz sig=-15.9 dB 26.0 C no call beam=5CARD S1: C/No=56.1 dB/Hz sig=-17.1 dB 30.0 C no call beam=5CARD S2: C/No=55.4 dB/Hz sig=-16.6 dB 30.5 C no call beam=5CHANNEL CARD #1 #2 S1 S2EIRP/WATTS 22.5/25 0.0/0 0.0/0 0.0/0HPA (ITS): 31.8 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 25.1 WATTS ANT GAIN: 1211:38:03 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 0.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 25 WATTS
Page 4–7018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–46. Stable Call, Channel #1Figure 4–47. Confirmed Operation of Multi-Channel (4 calls up)If the Multi-Channel HSD configuration does not pass the system operational verification procedure, or if the system fails, refer to the test and fault isolation checks presented in Table 4–26.G. Software Load ProceduresEMS SATCOM may occasionally release new software. Newly released software is loaded via a laptop or computer connected by cable to the maintenance port of the HSD system using an HSD Firmware Upgrade application (PN 1110-SW-1021 – ADT_LOAD.exe).CHANNEL CARD #1 #2 S1 S2EIRP/WATTS 18.5/10 0.0/0 0.0/0 0.0/0HPA (ITS): 14.2 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 10.1 WATTS ANT GAIN: 1211:39:36 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 0.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 25 WATTSAERO WATTS: USED=00 HPA=60 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.6 dBCHANNEL CARD #1 #2 S1 S2EIRP/WATTS 17.5/8 18.5/10 19.5/10 20.5/16 HPA (ITS): 50.4 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 43.8 WATTS ANT GAIN: 14 14:43:43 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 0.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 25 WATTSAERO WATTS: USED=00 HPA=60 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.6 dB Table 4–26. Multi-Channel Basic Fault ChecksSYMPTOM CHECKOcean Region Registration Fails Make sure all HSD LRUs are configured with the same default LES Access Codes (Primary and Secondary)Unable to place calls using the HSD-XsCheck System Config and I/O Config strappingSystem “not working” (Fault LED – ON)Check HPA Status and FWD ID, SDI strappingNo communication with avionics Check multi-control wiringUnable to place an HSD Swift64 call Activate Report 38 and check for power request value. Check RF coax connections in the Transmit path to the DLNACalls dropping when placing multiple calls HPA to antenna, cable loss value may not be accurate. Re-measure the HPA to antenna and HSD-X to HSD-128 cable losses and re-configure the HSD system to match the revised value.
Page 4–7118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalWhen loading software to HSD units in installation environments that include an SDU, disable the SDU (Power off or remove the sdu from the arinc tray) before beginning the software load procedure.Note: Refer to the applicable software release note or service bulletin for a specific list of the software files that need to be loaded. If in doubt, verify with EMS SATCOM product support that the software version being loaded is the latest release. The file formats of the software presented in this manual are examples only; refer to the applicable service bulletin for the actual files required for each specific software load.Note: When loading channel card software to HSD transceivers in installation environments where the SDU has been disabled or removed, the channel card (or cards) must be manually powered up using the HSD Maintenance Utility Program. (1) Loading Channel Card Software This section describes how to load channel card software on to HSD and HSD-X transceivers. Note: Software cannot be loaded onto an HSD-X unit using the pass-through mode function via the HSD transceiver. Software must be loaded to an HSD-X via the front connector or ARINC connections of the HSD-X unit.To load channel card software 1. Connect a computer to the Maintenance Port of the HSD transceiver. 2. Turn on the computer. 3. Save the HSD Load Program file (PN 1110-SW-1021) to a folder on your PC. (Recommended: Create a folder named HSD Load in the PC’s root directory and save the load application file to this folder.) 4. Apply power to the HSD or HSD-X transceiver. 5. If loading software in installation environments where the SDU is disabled during software loading, the channel cards must be manually powered up before proceeding with the software load. Refer to "Forcing Channel Card Power Up Procedure" on page 4-76 for detailed instructions. 6. Close all other applications running on the computer (especially programs that use the serial COM port, e.g. HyperTerminal). The load program may not execute successfully if other programs are running. 7. In the HSD folder, double-click on the ADT_LOAD.exe to launch the load application.The ADT_LOAD application opens in a DOS window and displays the “Load Target” menu.
Page 4–7218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalThe ADT_LOAD application prompts the user to select a “Target”. 8. From the “Which Target” menu:• To load channel card application software (for example: appl41.hex, cfig41.hex ) to channel card #1, press 1 • To load channel card application software (for example: appl41.hex, cfig41.hex) to channel card #2, press 2 9. Press Enter.The load application prompts you to type in a filename. 10. Type the appropriate filename for the software being loaded to the HSD Channel Card (for example appl41.hex or cfig41.hex), and then press Enter. The application prompts you to select a COM port. 11. Select the COM port on your computer connected to the HSD. 12. Type the appropriate COM port (1 or 2—typically 1), and then press Enter. 13. To start the load, press Enter.Communication with the HSD transceiver is established. The following screen appears. A percentage (%) progress indicator appears on the screen showing load status. Once the load is complete, a confirmation message briefly appears on the screen indicating that the file has been successfully loaded. The DOS window then closes and the HSD resets.HSD/HST LOADER Vx.x -- Mon Mar 24 12:12:17 2003which target ? 0 = control processor 1 = channel card #1 2 = channel card #2 3 = HPA application 4 = data i/o card 5 = HPA application with manual setup 6 = HPA application plus boot with manual setup 7 = HPA application plus boot 8 = channel card #1 boot code 9 = channel card #2 boot code 11 = channel card #1 pic code 12 = channel card #2 pic code 13 = HCM application 14 = HST ORT 15 = HSD ORT?
Page 4–7318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalThis completes the first load of the Channel Card software selected in step 10. 14. For HSD transceivers with two channel cards, repeat all required software loads to both channel cards. 15. Repeat steps 7 through 13 for all other required software loads of Channel Card Software files as specified in the applicable software service bulletin. 16. When all Channel Card Software is loaded, reset or cycle the power on the HSD transceiver. 17. If no other software loads are required, proceed to "Verifying Software Loads" on page 4-78. 18. In the event that the load fails, restart the load from the beginning of the Loading Channel Card Software procedure. If after two attempts the load still does not complete successfully, assume that the software disks or files may have been corrupted or the software is incompatible with the hardware configuration. Contact EMS SATCOM product support for assistance. (2) Loading Control Processor Software CAUTION: When loading software to the units in installation environments that include an SDU, disable the SDU (Power off or remove the sdu from the arinc tray) before beginning the software load procedure.HSD/HST LOADER Vx.x -- Mon Mar 24 12:12:17 2003which target ? 0 = control processor 1 = channel card #1 2 = channel card #2 3 = HPA application 4 = data i/o card 5 = HPA application with manual setup 6 = HPA application plus boot with manual setup 7 = HPA application plus boot 8 = channel card #1 boot code 9 = channel card #2 boot code 11 = channel card #1 pic code 12 = channel card #2 pic code 13 = HCM application 14 = HST ORT 15 = HSD ORT 16 = HSD-X ORT?1 File name, which contains the firmware image? applxx.hexThis download will require one of the PC's COM ports. (1, 2, etc) [1] ?1Connect COM1 of this PC to the maintenance port of the data terminal.Hit <ESC> to abort, or <Enter> to proceedEstablishing communication to the data terminal -- DO NOT CYCLE THE POWER !!Hit ESC to abort.DATA TERMINAL APPARENTLY READY TO ACCEPT PROGRAMswitching to 57.6 kbaudloading applxx.hex1% 5% 10%
Page 4–7418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalTo load control processor software: 1. Connect a computer to the Maintenance Port of the HSD transceiver. 2. Turn on the computer. 3. Save the HSD Load Program file (PN 1110-SW-1021) to a folder on your PC. (Recommended: Create a folder named HSD Load in the PC’s root directory and save the load application file to this folder.) 4. Apply power to the HSD or HSD-X transceiver. 5. Close all other applications running on the computer (especially programs that use the serial COM port, e.g. HyperTerminal). The load program may not execute successfully if other programs are running. 6. In the HSD Load folder, double-click on the ADT_LOAD.exe file to launch the load application.The ADT_LOAD application opens in a DOS window and displays the “Load Target” menu, as displayed in the example below. The ADT_LOAD application prompts the user to select a “Target.” 7. From the “Which Target” menu:• To load control processor software (for example, adt70.bin) to the control processor, press 0 8. Press Enter.The load application prompts you to type in a filename. 9. Type the appropriate filename for the software being loaded to the HSD Control Processor (for example adt70.bin), and then press Enter.The application prompts you to select the COM port that is connected to the HSD or HSD-X.HSD/HST LOADER Vx.x -- Mon Mar 24 12:12:17 2003which target ? 0 = control processor 1 = channel card #1 2 = channel card #2 3 = HPA application 4 = data i/o card 5 = HPA application with manual setup 6 = HPA application plus boot with manual setup 7 = HPA application plus boot 8 = channel card #1 boot code 9 = channel card #2 boot code 11 = channel card #1 pic code 12 = channel card #2 pic code 13 = HCM application 14 = HST ORT 15 = HSD ORT 16 = HSD-X ORT?
Page 4–7518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 10. Type the appropriate COM port (1 or 2—typically 1), and then press Enter. 11. To proceed with the load, press Enter.Note: If you press Esc, the application aborts the software load. Only press Esc if you want to discontinue the software load procedure.Communication with the HSD or HSD-X transceiver is established. The following screen appears. As shown in the example screen, a percentage (%) progress indicator appears on the screen showing load status. Once the load is complete, a confirmation message briefly appears on the screen indicating that the file has been successfully loaded. The DOS window then closes and the HSD resets.This completes the load of the Control Processor software selected in step 9. 12. When software load is finished, reset or cycle the power on the HSD of HSD-X transceiver. 13. If no other software loads are required, proceed to Verifying the Software Load. 14. In the event that the load fails, restart the load from the beginning of the Loading Control Processor Software Procedure. If after two attempts the load still does not complete successfully, assume that the software disks may have been corrupted or the software is incompatible with the hardware configuration. Contact EMS SATCOM product support for assistance.HSD/HST LOADER V3.0 -- Mon Mar 24 12:12:17 2003which target ? 0 = control processor 1 = channel card #1 2 = channel card #2 3 = HPA application 4 = data i/o card 5 = HPA application with manual setup 6 = HPA application plus boot with manual setup 7 = HPA application plus boot 8 = channel card #1 boot code 9 = channel card #2 boot code 11 = channel card #1 pic code 12 = channel card #2 pic code 13 = HCM application 14 = HST ORT 15 = HSD ORT 16 = HSD-X ORT?) 0File name, which contains the firmware image? Adt70.binThis download will require one of the PC's COM ports. (1, 2, etc) [1] ?1Connect COM1 of this PC to the maintenance port of the data terminal.Hit <ESC> to abort, or <ENTER> to proceedEstablishing communication to the data terminal -- DO NOT CYCLE THE POWER !!Hit ESC to abort.DATA TERMINAL APPARENTLY READY TO ACCEPT PROGRAMswitching to 57.6 kbaudloading adt70.bin1% 5% 10%
Page 4–7618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(3) Forcing Channel Card Power Up ProcedureIn installation environments that include an SDU, the SDU must be disabled before loading software to the HSD transceiver. With the SDU disabled (removed from the ARINC tray or powered off), the channel card(s) must be manually powered on using the HSD Maintenance Utility Program. Note: If the channel card is already powered up, the “force channel card power up” item “U” in Menu 4 is not available and will not appear as a selection option.To force channel card power up: 1. Click Start, then point to: ProgramsBAccessoriesBCommunicationsBHyperTerminal, and then click on the connection to the HSD Maintenance Utility Program. 2. At the password prompt, type MAINT and then press Enter.The Maintenance Utility Program Menu 1 appears. 3. Press Ctrl+N to scroll to Menu 4. 4. To force channel card power up, press U. 5. Wait 30 seconds for the channel card to power up before continuing with the load procedure. 6. Close HyperTerminal and all other applications running on the PC (especially programs that use the serial COM port) before continuing with the software load. The load program may not execute successfully if other programs are running.(4) Loading HPA Software Load HPA software as required according to the applicable software service bulletin as released by EMS Technologies.WARNING: BEFORE loading NEW hpa software, Contact EMS SATCOM product suppport to verify the unit's hpa version is compatible with field-loading of hpa software. if the HPA version is not compatible with field-loading, you must send it back to EMS Technologies for upgrading. There are four different versions of HPA—two variants for 28 V dc units and Two variants for 115 V ac units. hpa software is variant-specific—loading the wrong software version may lock the unit; therefore, Contact EMS SATCOM for assistance when loading any Hpa software to ensure that the correct hpa software and revision is loaded. To load HPA software 1. Remove power from the HSD transceiver. 2. Connect a computer to the Maintenance Port of the HSD transceiver. 3. Turn on the computer. 4. Apply power to the HSD transceiver.
Page 4–7718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 5. Close all other applications running on the computer (especially programs that use the serial COM port, e.g. HyperTerminal). The load program may not execute successfully if other programs are running.In the HSD folder, double-click on the ADT_LOAD.exe to launch the load program.The ADT_LOAD application opens in a DOS window and displays the “Load Target” menu. 6. Select Menu item 7, HPA application plus boot, and then press Enter. 7. The system prompts you for a filename. (i.e. “Filename which contains the firmware image?”) Note: Use care to ensure that the correct file name is entered for the HSD transceiver’s power type. 8. Enter A1703006-V9A6.SX for a 28 V dc unit 9. Enter C0300106-V4A2.SX for a 115 V ac unit 10. Press Enter. The program prompts you to select a COM port. 11. Select the COM port on your computer connected to the HSD. 12. Type the appropriate COM port (1 or 2—typically 1), and then press Enter. 13. To start the load, press Enter.A percentage (%) progress indicator appears on the screen. A confirmation message briefly appears on the screen indicating that the file has been HSD/HST LOADER Vx.x -- Mon Mar 24 12:12:17 2003which target ? 0 = control processor 1 = channel card #1 2 = channel card #2 3 = HPA application 4 = data i/o card 5 = HPA application with manual setup 6 = HPA application plus boot with manual setup 7 = HPA application plus boot 8 = channel card #1 boot code 9 = channel card #2 boot code 11 = channel card #1 pic code 12 = channel card #2 pic code 13 = HCM application 14 = HST ORT 15 = HSD ORT 16 = HSD-X ORT ?
Page 4–7818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminalsuccessfully loaded, and then the DOS window closes. This completes HPA software load. If all software loads are finished, verify the success of the software load by following the instructions provided in "Verifying Software Loads" on page 4-78. 14. In the event that the load fails, restart the load from the beginning of "Loading HPA Software" on page 4-76. If after two attempts, the load still does not complete successfully, assume that the software disks may have been corrupted or the software is incompatible with the hardware configuration. Contact EMS SATCOM product support for assistance.(5) Verifying Software LoadsAfter loading all software as specified in the applicable software service bulletin, released by EMS Technologies, verify that all software loaded successfully. WARNING: In systems with disabled or removed SDU, the channel card or cards must be manually powered on to enable the verification of the software load.To verify that software loaded successfully 1. Apply power to the HSD. 2. On the computer, open HyperTerminal and start the HSD Maintenance Utility Program. 3. Connect a computer to the Maintenance Port of the HSD transceiver. 4. Enter the Maintenance Utility Program password: Type maint and then press Enter.The Maintenance Utility Program, Menu 1 appears. 5. Press Ctrl+N to scroll to MENU 2.Menu 2 appears. MENU1 FIRMWARE Vx.xX override forward id L test LEDsY explain hpa error status S set hcm attenuatorR hcm RF threshold<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports
Page 4–7918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 6. To display the versions of software loaded onto the HSD, press V.A list of Firmware Versions appears similar to the example provided below (actual versions will differ depending on the versions of software installed on the transceiver).Note: HSD units with two channel cards also list the firmware versions for Channel Card #2. 7. Verify that all software has successfully loaded. In two-channel card units verify that the software has loaded successfully to both channel cards. Verify that the software versions (Firmware Versions) shown, match the versions listed on the load disk (or files) and in the software service bulletin. 8. Close the HyperTerminal session. 9. Remove power from the HSD. 10. Turn off the computer.This completes the software load verification. The next section explains how to disconnect the software load equipment.(6) Disconnecting Load EquipmentAfter completing all required software loads and load verification: 1. Remove power from the HSD (if applicable). 2. Turn off the computer (if applicable). 3. Disconnect the serial cable connector from the computer COM port. 4. Disconnect the serial cable connector from the HSD Maintenance Port. MENU2 FIRMWARE Vx.xA set veh-relative azimuth E set veh-relative elevationK desired az veh-rel velocity R resume automatic steeringT enter time of day N annotate log fileL re-enter logon password V get firmware versionsZ reset HSD-128<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reportsFIRMWARE VERSIONS: KERNEL: V1.6 -- Mon Oct 07 13:36:26 2002 APPLICATION: V4.1 -- Thu Oct 10 08:36:29 2002 CHANNEL CARD #1: 0.5.4.0 9040 -- 0.0.0.30 -- 1.8.0.A CHANNEL CARD #2: 0.5.4.0 9040 -- 0.0.0.30 -- 1.8.0.A HPA: S/W P/N: A1703706 Ver: V1B1-Unit #00043 F/W Ver: V5 DATA I/O CARD: -- MAY BE TYPE 1
Page 4–8018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(7) Completing Record of AccomplishmentAfter completing all required software loads and the load verification, fill out the Record of Accomplishment form provided in "Record of Accomplishment" on page E-1. (Retain a copy for future reference.)
Page 4–8118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal3. Troubleshooting and Fault IsolationThis section provides troubleshooting procedures for HSD units experiencing faults during the commissioning process or previously operational units now considered as “not working”.Troubleshooting procedures require data obtained using the Maintenance Utility Program feature of the HSD units. Refer to "HSD Maintenance Utility Program" on page 4-3 for specific instructions on how to access and use the Maintenance Port and Maintenance Utility Program of the unit.A. Troubleshooting Principles(1) Non-specific ComplaintsWhen troubleshooting units with non-specific complaints, complete all system verification and functional tests in "Operational and Diagnostic Test Procedures" on page 4-48. Document whether the unit passes or fails each test.If the unit passes all tests and no fault is discovered, all associated equipment and aircraft wiring should be tested. If the unit fails a specific test, isolate the actual fault or faults by performing troubleshooting procedures provided in this section.(2) Specific ComplaintsWhen troubleshooting units with specific complaints, service personnel may choose not to complete some or all of the diagnostic tests and proceed directly to the applicable troubleshooting and fault isolation procedure provided in this section.B. Equipment RequiredEquipment required for troubleshooting and fault isolation is the same as the equipment required for test purposes as listed in page 2. C. Troubleshooting AidsThis section presents examples of maintenance screens and troubleshooting tables to assist in troubleshooting and fault isolation activities. The exact screen display may vary depending on the version of the unit’s operational software and installation configuration mode. Note: The screens used in the figures presented in this section may have been edited for clarity and for illustrative purposes.(1) Fault Isolation Screen DisplaysFigure 4–48 to Figure 4–54 provide example maintenance screens for reference and illustration purposes.
Page 4–8218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–48. Successful Ocean Region Registration: Report 21 activatedFigure 4–49. No call: Report 23 activatedFigure 4–50. In Call: Reports 21 and 23 activatedKERNEL Vx.x -- Mon Oct 07 13:36:26 2002TESTING RAM ......RAM OK.HSD APPLICATION Vx.x -- Thu Apr 24 13:28:58 2003Type "menu" to activate the maintenance port menus.Other passwords provide different levels of authorization.fault log sector 15 contains 1372 entriesREAL TIME CLOCK PRESENT: 9:52:57 Tue Jun 3, 2003channel card forward id ABC123EEPROM forces STAND-ALONE MODE!!ensure that arinc test data doesn't bother sat906powering up channel card #1powering up channel card #2SENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMAND!!CARD #2 -- CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING OCEAN REGION REG IN AOR EAST!!SENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMAND!!CARD #1 -- CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING OCEAN REGION REG IN AOR EAST!!9:53:20 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 28 C 54 dB/Hz9:53:20 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 30 C 54 dB/Hz9:53:24 #2 ABC456 E5 stop 8301 ACSE successful ORR 30 C 53 dB/Hz9:53:24 #1 ABC123 E5 stop 8306 ACSE failed retry ORR 28 C 53 dB/Hz9:53:28 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 28 C 54 dB/Hz9:53:33 #1 ABC123 E5 stop 8301 ACSE successful ORR 28 C 53 dB/HzCARD #1: C/No=52.9 dB/Hz sig=-16.9 dB 27 C no call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=52.9 dB/Hz sig=-18.2 dB 27 C no call beam=4 45D21'29.1"N 75D1'54.6"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knotsCARD #1: C/No=52.4.0 dB/Hz sig=-17.6 dB 27 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=52.4 dB/Hz sig=-18.5 dB 27 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knotsCARD #1: C/No=52.5 dB/Hz sig=-17.2 dB 28 C no call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 28 C in call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:55 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 11 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.1 dB/Hz sig=-15.5 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:55 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 18.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C
Page 4–8318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–51. No IRS Data: Report 23 activatedFigure 4–52. No Signal: Report 23 activatedFigure 4–53. Failed Ocean Region Registration: Report 21 activated12:43:55 dop**** az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 11 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=52.9 dB/Hz sig=-16.9 dB 27 C no call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=52.9 dB/Hz sig=-18.2 dB 27 C no call beam=4 ************ *********** ********* ******** ********* ******* *******CARD #1: C/No=52.4.0 dB/Hz sig=-17.6 dB 27 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=52.4 dB/Hz sig=-18.5 dB 27 C no call beam=4 ************ *********** ********* ******** ********* ******* *******15:01:27 #2 ABC123 W5 call term 8306 26.0 C15:01:29 #1 DEF456 W5 call init 4000110 14.00 dbw SP Ocean Region Registration 2 7.0 C15:01:30 #2 ABC123 W5 call init 4000110 14.00 dbw SP Ocean Region Registration 2 6.0 C15:01:35 #1 DEF456 W5 call term 8306 27.0 C15:01:36 #2 ABC123 W5 call term 8306 26.5 C15:01:37 #1 DEF456 W5 call init 4000110 14.00 dbw SP Ocean Region Registration 2 7.0 C15:01:39 #2 ABC123 W5 call init 4000110 14.00 dbw SP Ocean Region Registration 2 6.5 C15:01:43 #1 DEF456 W5 call term 8302 ACSE Failed ORR 27.0 C15:01:45 #2 ABC123 W5 call term 8302 ACSE Failed ORR 26.5 C
Page 4–8418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–54. Forward ID Not Strapped: No reports activated10:00:35 Tue Jun 3, 2003KERNEL Vx.x -- Mon Oct 07 13:36:26 2002TESTING RAM ......RAM OK.HSD APPLICATION Vx.x -- Thu Apr 24 13:28:58 2003Type "menu" to activate the maintenance port menus.Other passwords provide different levels of authorization.fault log sector 15 contains 1384 entriesREAL TIME CLOCK PRESENT: 10:00:55 Tue Jun 3, 2003**** strapping identifies forward id ffffff -- not in table ********* eeprom forward id 0 not in table *****EEPROM forces STAND-ALONE MODE!!ensure that arinc test data doesn't bother sat906powering up channel card #1powering up channel card #2SENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMAND!!CARD #2 -- CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING OCEAN REGION REG IN AOR EAST!!SENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMAND!!CARD #1 -- CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING OCEAN REGION REG IN AOR EAST!!
Page 4–8518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalKERNEL Vx.x -- Mon Oct 07 13:36:26 2002TESTING RAM ......RAM OK.HSD APPLICATION V4.6 -- Thu Apr 24 13:28:58 2003Type "menu" to activate the maintenance port menus.Other passwords provide different levels of authorization.fault log sector 15 contains 1396 entriesREAL TIME CLOCK PRESENT: 10:09:51 Tue Jun 3, 2003channel card forward id ABC123EEPROM forces STAND-ALONE MODE!!ensure that arinc test data doesn't bother sat906powering up channel card #1powering up channel card #2SENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMAND!!CARD #2 -- CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING OCEAN REGION REG IN AOR EAST!!SENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMAND!!CARD #1 -- CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING OCEAN REGION REG IN AOR EAST!! Log-on password entered: "Maint" MENU1 FIRMWARE Vx.xX override forward id L test LEDsY explain hpa error status<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reportsHPA ERROR CODE 1800Y command entered:HPA MAINTENANCE WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNAHPA STATUS WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA Event log messages: MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.xL list EEPROM S list event logE reset EEPROM C clear event logM misc. EEPROM parameter J ignored faultsN system serial number F list call logG clear call log<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reportsHPA ERROR CODE 1800hit '0' for complete log '1' for 'special' events '-' for specific entryFAULT (ENTRY #1428): address ABC123: 30 seconds after poweruppowerup #204 389 hours operation Jun 03 11:19:39 2003ERROR CODE 40HPA FAULT -- 0x1800HPA MAINTENANCE WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNAHPA STATUS WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNAContinuous Power Requests From LES, Report 21 activated:
Page 4–8618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–55. No Strap on SDI Lines (open): No reports activated10:51:26 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 30 C 54 dB/Hz10:51:26 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 29 C 54 dB/Hz10:51:27 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 30 C10:51:27 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 29 C10:51:27 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 29 C 0 dB/Hz10:51:27 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 30 C 0 dB/Hz10:51:29 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 29 C 54 dB/Hz10:51:29 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 30 C 54 dB/Hz10:51:29 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 30 C
Page 4–8718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–56. Wrong Strap on SDI Lines (TP5A to GND)Log-on password entered: "Maint" MENU1 FIRMWARE Vx.xX override forward id L test LEDsY explain hpa error status<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reportsHPA UNCONTROLLEDY command entered:HPA MAINTENANCE WORD REPORTING ARINC ERRORHPA MAINTENANCE WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNAHPA STATUS WORD REPORTING INVALID SSM 1 (NO COMPUTED DATA)HPA STATUS WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNAEvent log messages: MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.xL list EEPROM S list event logE reset EEPROM C clear event logM misc. EEPROM parameter J ignored faultsN system serial number F list call logG clear call log<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reportsFAULT (ENTRY #1422): address ABC123: 30 seconds after powerup powerup #203 389 hours operation Jun 03 11:15:07 2003 ERROR CODE 40 HPA FAULT -- 0x1c80 HPA MAINTENANCE WORD REPORTING ARINC ERROR HPA MAINTENANCE WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA HPA STATUS WORD REPORTING INVALID SSM 1 (NO COMPUTED DATA) HPA STATUS WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA
Page 4–8818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–57. Stand-Alone Mode Multi-Control Loopback (TP1A-3E & TP1B-3F) Not Wired: HSD Fault LED “ON”Figure 4–58. Incorrect Dialing Format: Reports 21 and 52 EnabledMENU1 FIRMWARE Vx.xX override forward id L test LEDsY explain hpa error status<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reportsHPA UNCONTROLLEDY command entered:HPA MAINTENANCE WORD REPORTING ARINC ERRORHPA STATUS WORD REPORTING INVALID SSM 1 (NO COMPUTED DATA)Event log messages: MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.xL list EEPROM S list event logE reset EEPROM C clear event logM misc. EEPROM parameter J ignored faultsN system serial number F list call logG clear call log<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reportsFAULT (ENTRY #1442): address 4ff7d4: 30 seconds after powerup powerup #207 389 hours operation Jun 03 11:33:02 2003 ERROR CODE 40HPA FAULT -- 0x480 HPA MAINTENANCE WORD REPORTING ARINC ERROR HPA STATUS WORD REPORTING INVALID SSM 1 (NO COMPUTE11:47:43 #2 ABC456 E4 stop 8301 ACSE successful ORR 30 C 50 dB/Hz11:47:46 #1 ABC123 E5 stop 8301 ACSE successful ORR 28 C 50 dB/Hz11:47:55 #1 ABC123 E5 start 800124 14.00 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 29 C 47 dB/Hz11:47:57 #1 ABC123 E5 start 800124 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 47 dB/Hzcalling 0116135919064#11:48:10 #1 ABC123 E5 stop 11d2 call failed, insufficient digits in service address 28 C 0 calling 0116135919064#
Page 4–8918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–59. Top/Port Antenna Status: Reports 18,19, and 20 activatedFigure 4–60. AMBE Call (Mobile-to-Fixed) MES Terminated: Report 21 activatedFigure 4–61. AMBE Call (Mobile-to-Fixed) Terrestrial Terminated: Report 21 activatedEnter 1 thru 67 to toggle report on/offX turn off all reports <CTRL> N show next page S save to EEPROMESC return to PREVIOUS MENU 1 OFF messages to channel card #1 13 OFF messages to channel card #2 2 OFF hex output to channel card #1 14 OFF hex output to channel card #2 3 OFF responses from channel card #1 15 OFF responses from channel card #2 4 OFF hex input from channel card #1 16 OFF hex input from channel card #2 5 OFF channel #1 misc info 17 OFF channel #2 misc info 6 OFF sb antenna arinc input 18 ON port antenna arinc input 7 OFF sb antenna maintenance word 19 ON port antenna maintenance word 8 OFF sb antenna status word 20 ON port antenna status word 9 OFF channel card call status 21 OFF call codes10 OFF channel card THA codes 22 OFF spot beam selection11 OFF channel card errors 23 OFFOMNIDIRECTIONAL MODE open loop tracking port/top active HGA LNA onport maintenance 0x00600003port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACUport ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACUport ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACUport ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACUport ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACUport status: 0x608033 SDI: ACU SSM: NORMAL OPERATION gain: 12OMNIDIRECTIONAL MODE open loop tracking port/top active HGA LNA onport maintenance 0x00600003port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACUport ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACUport ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACUport ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU12:31:25 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800103 14.00 dBW mobile AMBE 28 C 47 dB/Hz12:31:27 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800103 14.00 dBW mobile AMBE 28 C 47 dB/Hz12:31:38 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800103 14.00 dBW mobile AMBE 28 C 44 dB/Hz12:31:55 #1 ABC123 E4 stop 1001 call cleared by MES terminal 28 C 44 dB/Hz12:34:27 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800103 14.00 dBW mobile AMBE 28 C 48 dB/Hz12:34:29 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800103 14.00 dBW mobile AMBE 28 C 48 dB/Hz12:34:39 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800103 14.00 dBW mobile AMBE 28 C 0 dB/Hz12:35:31 #1 ABC123 E4 stop 1f01 call cleared by terrestrial circuit 28 C 43 dB/Hz
Page 4–9018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–62. 64 K Speech call (Mobile to Fixed) Terrestrial Termination: Reports 21 and 23 activated12:43:24 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 14.00 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 47 dB/Hz12:43:24 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=*** sig=-16.4 dB 28 C IDLE IN CALL beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-15.2 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:25 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-16.4 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-15.0 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:26 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-16.8 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-15.4 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:26 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 12:43:27 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.4 dB/Hz sig=-15.6 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:42 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=54.1 dB/Hz sig=-11.6 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.9 dB/Hz sig=-15.8 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:43 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 0 dB/Hz12:43:43 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=*** sig=-11.6 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.8 dB/Hz sig=-15.5 dB 30 C no call beam=4 12:43:55 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-10.7 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.6 dB/Hz sig=-15.3 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:55 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 12:43:56 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.1 dB/Hz sig=-15.5 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:58 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.9 dB/Hz sig=-15.8 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:58 #1 ABC123 E4 stop 1f01 call cleared by terrestrial circuit 28 C
Page 4–9118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal.)Figure 4–63. 64 K Speech Call (Mobile-to-Fixed) Terrestrial Termination: Reports 21 and 23 activated12:43:24 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 14.00 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 47 dB/Hz12:43:24 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=*** sig=-16.4 dB 28 C IDLE IN CALL beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-15.2 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:25 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-16.4 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-15.0 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:26 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-16.8 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-15.4 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:26 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 12:43:27 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.4 dB/Hz sig=-15.6 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:42 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=54.1 dB/Hz sig=-11.6 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.9 dB/Hz sig=-15.8 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:43 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 0 dB/Hz12:43:43 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=*** sig=-11.6 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.8 dB/Hz sig=-15.5 dB 30 C no call beam=4 12:43:55 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-10.7 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.6 dB/Hz sig=-15.3 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:55 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 18.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 12:43:56 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.1 dB/Hz sig=-15.5 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:58 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.9 dB/Hz sig=-15.8 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots12:43:58 #1 ABC123 E4 stop 1f01 call cleared by terrestrial circuit 28 C
Page 4–9218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–64. Speech Call (Fixed-to-Mobile) Terrestrial Terminated: Report 21 activatedFigure 4–65. FAX Call (Mobile-to-Fixed) Terrestrial Terminated: Report 21 activated13:40:53 Tue Jun 3, 200313:41:22 #1 ABC123 E4 start c00124 14.00 dBW fixed aero 64k speech 28 C 47 dB/Hz13:41:25 #1 ABC123 E4 start c00124 22.50 dBW fixed aero 64k speech 28 C 48 dB/Hz13:41:35 #1 ABC123 E4 start c00124 18.50 dBW fixed aero 64k speech 28 C 53 dB/Hz13:41:41 #1 ABC123 E4 start c00124 19.50 dBW fixed aero 64k speech 28 C 52 dB/Hz13:41:45 #1 ABC123 E4 stop 1f01 call cleared by terrestrial circuit 28 C 52 dB/Hz13:31:06 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800625 14.00 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 30 C 48 dB/Hz13:31:17 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800625 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 30 C 48 dB/Hz13:31:28 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800625 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 30 C 55 dB/Hz13:31:40 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800625 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 30 C 0 dB/Hz13:31:46 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800625 20.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 30 C 55 dB/Hz13:31:52 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800625 19.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 30 C 0 dB/Hz13:31:58 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800625 20.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 30 C 0 dB/Hz13:32:04 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800625 20.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 30 C 0 dB/Hz13:32:10 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800625 20.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 30 C 0 dB/Hz13:32:17 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800625 19.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 30 C 0 dB/Hz13:32:23 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800625 20.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 30 C 0 dB/Hz13:32:29 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800625 19.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 30 C 0 dB/Hz13:32:32 #2 ABC456 E4 stop 1f01 call cleared by terrestrial circuit 30 C 0 dB/Hz
Page 4–9318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 4–66. 64 K Speech and Data Call (Mobile-to-Fixed) MES Terminated: Report 21 activated(2) Troubleshooting TableTable 4–27 provides fixes for basic HSD system faults. Before completing any fix, activate the HSD Maintenance Utility Program using the “maint” password. For detailed connection and user instructions, refer to "HSD Maintenance Utility Program" on page 4-3.13:33:27 Tue Jun 3, 200313:38:22 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 14.00 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 47 dB/Hz13:38:25 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 47 dB/Hz13:38:35 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 14.00 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 47 dB/Hz13:38:36 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 55 dB/Hz13:38:37 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 47 dB/Hz13:38:42 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 0 dB/Hz13:38:48 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 54 dB/Hz13:38:48 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 20.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 0 dB/Hz13:38:54 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 0 dB/Hz13:38:54 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 19.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 0 dB/Hz13:38:53 Tue Jun 3, 200313:39:00 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 54 dB/Hz13:39:00 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 19.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 0 dB/Hz13:39:06 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 0 dB/Hz13:39:06 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 19.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 0 dB/Hz13:39:12 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 55 dB/Hz13:39:12 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 19.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 0 dB/Hz13:39:18 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 0 dB/Hz13:39:19 #2 ABC456 E4 stop 1001 call cleared by MES terminal 30 C 0 dB/Hz13:39:20 #1 ABC123 E4 stop 1001 call cleared by MES terminal 28 C 0 dB/Hz
Page 4–9418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–27. Troubleshooting and Fault IsolationFault Description Maintenance Report CheckRED LED remains on after powering up sequence• HPA Uncontrolled•HPA Fault View initial power-up display of the HSD Maintenance Utility Program• In Stand-Alone installations, verify that the multicontrol, looped back is wired (out to in)• In Stand-Alone installations, check transmit path between RFU and HSDHPA Error Status• reporting invalid SSM • HPA not reporting status word 143• HPA not reporting maintenance word 350• HPA maintenance word reporting ARINC error• HPA maintenance word not reporting HGA antenna• HPA maintenance word reporting VSWR error• HPA maintenance word reporting RAM error•HPA reporting ROM error• HPA maintenance word reporting power supply error• HPA maintenance word reporting temperature errorIn menu 1, press Y to obtain an explanation of the HPA error status• Check continuity on ARINC buses between HSD and antenna subsystem• Check continuity on ARINC buses between HSD and SDU• Verify SDI is strapped correctly (TP5B to TP5D)• Check the external power source is properly connected and meets installation requirements • Check transmit path from HSD output (MPC1) to the antenna subsystem (coax cables, splitters, relays, etc…)• Check the RFU TX output (MPC1) connection to the HSD input (TPC1)• Check installation location meets the RTCA/DO-160D environmental specifications• Check for proper fan-tray operation and air-cooling. • Verify the fan-tray plug distribution is as per the installation requirements
Page 4–9518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalCall failure IRS information not availableActivate maintenance reports 21 and 23(See Figure 4–51)• Check that the IRS systems are powered on and aligned.• Check that connections to the IRS systems are secured.• Check the polarity of IRS input lines.• If no IRS data is available, use Menu 10 to manually input navigational data to point the antenna to a preferred satellite location and try the call again.Call failure System does not log onto the broadbeamActivate maintenance reports 21 and 23 (See Figure 4–53)• Check that the IRS data is received and valid.• Ensure that a valid FWD ID is read• Verify correct antenna pointing.• Ensure LES Access codes are configured correctly.• Verify all coax connections.Call failure System does not log onto the correct Ocean RegionActivate maintenance report 21 and 23(See Figure 4–53)• Check that the IRS data is received and valid.• Check for antenna line-of-sight interference.Call failure Unit is not transmitting Activate maintenance reports 21 and 23Figure 4–52 – No Signal• Check for a defective or loose RF cable.• Verify the Rx RF level is acceptable.• Check RF power level displayed in Maintenance Port Menu Report Item 21; signal strength should be requested at 14.00 dBW but in call should increase to 22.5 dBW.• Ensure the HSD is secured properly to the ARINC connector in the tray. Table 4–27. Troubleshooting and Fault IsolationFault Description Maintenance Report Check
Page 4–9618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalCall failure Forward ID is invalid or strapped incorrectlyActivate maintenance report 21(See Figure 4–54)To check FWD ID, in Menu 4, press Q• The account registration process has not been completed. Check your account status with your service provider to ensure that the account registration has been processed into the LES databases and that your account is valid.• If in the event log, the message, “Channel card stuck in boot state” appears, check that the assigned FWD IDs are strapped correctly.• If fault code 12B1 appears in the even log, ensure FWD ID is valid for the Inmarsat Terminal Category (If you replace a Stand-Alone unit (CAT. A) with a Non-Stand-Alone unit (CAT. B), you need to get new FWD IDs assigned). Table 4–27. Troubleshooting and Fault IsolationFault Description Maintenance Report Check
Page 4–9718 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalCall failure Unit is strapped to an incorrect system mode of installationIn menu 3, select Item L (List EEPROM) • Verify the system mode strapping is correct. • Reset the system and observe the initialization display; it shows the HSD unit’s powering up, self-test results. The Initialization display lists the installation mode configuration for the unit.• If the mode displayed is not strapped or is incorrectly strapped, a temporary setting may be used—in Menu 3, select M (misc. EEPROM parameters), then select parameter 16 (Channel Card Category) and configure the HSD to the correct mode (e.g. ‘0’ for SAT-906 ,‘1’ for Stand-Alone…). Reset the unit and try the call again.Call failure Dialing sequence was incomplete or incorrectActivate report 21 and 23Figure 4–48 – No call• Verify the number you are calling and try the number again.• Refer to the HSD User’s Guide for detailed operating instructions.• Ensure that you end the dialing sequence by pressing # (pound key)—pressing # at the end of the dialing string signals the system to “send” the call.Log-on request failsUnit is not transmitting Activate maintenance reports 21 and 23(See Figure 4–53)• Check for a defective or loose cable.• Check for HPA fault.• Ensure the HSD is secured properly to the ARINC connector in the tray. Table 4–27. Troubleshooting and Fault IsolationFault Description Maintenance Report Check
Page 4–9818 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalLog-on request failsUnit is not receiving Activate maintenance reports 21 and 23(See Figure 4–52)• Check for a defective or loose cable.• Verify that the Forward ID is valid, activated, and strapped correctly.• Ensure your account is current and active.• Check for antenna line-of-sight interference.• Ensure the HSD is secured properly to the ARINC connector in the tray.Incoming call failureIncoming call shows as a successful connection in report 23, but call does not ring through to the external device (telephone, computer, fax).Activate report 21and 23• Check the connection between the HSD and the external device.• Check configuration of external devices is correct. MSN must be configured correctly for each device connected to the system.• If MSNs are not programmed in the user devices, incoming calls will ring all devices. NOTE: Zero “0” is an invalid MSN entry. Table 4–27. Troubleshooting and Fault IsolationFault Description Maintenance Report Check
Page 4–9918 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalLog-on successful, but fails to complete callAuthorization error (fault code 12C4)Activate maintenance reports 21 and 23(See Figure 4–53 and Figure 4–51)• Contact your service provider to verify that the forward ID is activated. • Check that the Forward ID is strapped correctly.• Check that IRS data is available and correct.• Check that the Veh Rel Az/EL to Satellite is correct. • Check that all coax cable connections are secure.• Check that the Rx C/No value is ≥50dB.• Check antenna status is okay.• Check that the primary and secondary LES access codes are valid. • Contact your service provider and verify that they can “see” your Tx signal. To contact the LES operator dial 33 #.• Contact service provider and request that they place an incoming call to the unit.• Check the reported HPA back-off in report 21; Signal should initialize at 14 dBW and increase after handshake to approximately 22.5 dBW – then slowly decrease (Range typically between 18.5 dBW to 21.5 dBW with a lower limit of 14.5 dBW). Table 4–27. Troubleshooting and Fault IsolationFault Description Maintenance Report Check
Page 4–10018 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalHSD is operating outside the normal environmental specificationsChannel card temperature fault Activate report 21 or 23 • Check channel card temperature; temperatures of over 50° C to 60° C may cause the HSD or HSD-X to shut down.• Check that the fan tray is operational.• Verify that the tray plug distribution is the same as presented in the installation requirements.Calls do not complete and connection is not establishedChannel Congestion (fault code 2024) Activate report 21 and 23• Wait five minutes and try the call again.• Contact the LES to verify congestion. To contact the LES operator, dial 33 #.No call request sent Activate report 21 and 23• Verify that the call dial string is correct; Pressing # at the end of the dialing string signals the system to “send” the call.• Check that the HSD or HSD-X power LED flashes on and off (1 Hz) during a call request.• Check that the ISDN cable is connected correctly and securely. Table 4–27. Troubleshooting and Fault IsolationFault Description Maintenance Report Check
Page 4–10118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalD. Fault Isolation and Diagnostic ProceduresThis section provides basic information required for technical personnel to isolate faults in HSD and HSD-X transceivers. Where needed, refer to other sections of this manual (which contain important information to aid in understanding the functionality of the unit) for additional information. Fault isolation procedures are usually conducted on equipment that falls within one of the following categories:• Units that have failed to pass operational and installation verification procedures• Units that have failed during service• Units repaired and returned to serviceMaintenance reports are helpful in troubleshooting the HSD system. Capturing maintenance port information from the HSD or HSD-X transceiver and forwarding the file to EMS SATCOM technical support staff will assist in troubleshooting suspected HSD system problems. Instructions on how to activate and save “reports” information is provided in the next section.No dial tone heard in handset– – • Confirm ISDN lines are wired correctly.• Verify handset connection is secure.• Wait a few minutes for the system to warm-up, then log-on and try your call again.• Check that IRS data is available.• Verify that the unit has completed beam registration.Call drops after successful connectionIf the RF signal fades significantly (during a call) the connection may dropNote: A sudden, severe aircraft banking angle may obstruct the signalActivate report 21 and 23• Check signal strength (C/No ≥ 50 dB). • Ensure there is a clear, un-obstructed, line-of-sight to the satellite.• Select an alternate satellite or beam and try your call again (Note: works if you are located where more than one beam overlaps or satellite is in-view). Table 4–27. Troubleshooting and Fault IsolationFault Description Maintenance Report Check
Page 4–10218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalPerform all fault isolation procedures provided in this section. Record and document all test results including: LEDs function and maintenance port data outputs (report items 21 and 23). Enable report items 18, 19, and 20 (Port) or items 6, 7, and 8 (Starboard) to record antenna, ACU, and DLNA related faults. Enable other report items as required. Conduct the fault isolation procedures provided in this section and record the resulting system information. Then send the system information collected to EMS SATCOM HSD product support for analysis.CAUTION: Before proceeding with fault isolation procedures, refer to the advisories paragraphs in the introduction section of this manual.(1) Activating and Saving a Diagnostic ‘Reports’ FileUse the following procedure to save or “capture” a troubleshooting report for the HSD transceiver. Remember to date and save the file. Annotate the file with any system anomalies or unique operating environments that may in anyway affect system functionality (e.g., physical location of aircraft or transceiver, Land Earth Station being used, list of connected devices).In Multi-Channel systems, activate console mode and select the applicable HSD-X unit you want to monitor before proceeding with this procedure. (To activate console mode, in Menu 18, press X.) 1. Open a log file on the maintenance port, terminal program. (If you are using HyperTerminal, use the “Transfer, capture text” function.) 2. Power the system on or if applicable reset the system. 3. Enter maintenance mode on the maintenance port using maint as the password. (Access level can be changed using menu 1, L command if the system is running and the password level is menu.) 4. Press the equals sign (=) key to activate reports 21 and 23 (toggle off all other report items). 5. Press S to “SAVE” these reports as default. This enables the user to view these reports on subsequent HSD power-ups or “Reset” entries. 6. Reset the system by: cycling the power to the unit; pressing the reset button on the HSD front panel; or in menu 2, press Z to reset the system. 7. Log on to the maintenance port using the password: maintThe system should restart and ocean registration will take place (approximately two minutes). 8. After the Beam Registration process completes, press Ctrl+N to display menu 2. 9. Press V to display the software versions of the system. 10. Make a call from the system or execute the procedure or sequence that causes the call failure. Make a note of the call progress. For example: Did you get dial tone? Was the call successful? 11. If applicable, attempt a call from the second channel. 12. Press = to display the current “reports” profile of the system (as noted in step 4).
Page 4–10318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 13. To save an alternate “reports” configuration, activate the required items and then press S (in the “reports” menu) to save to EEPROM. 14. Using Ctrl+N, go to menu 3, and then do one of the following: • For units operating control processor software earlier than version 5.7, press L to display EEPROM parameters. (The EEPROM list displays one terminal screen of information at a time. Press L to display subsequent screens.)• For units operating control processor software later than version 5.7, press O to display the ORT List. (The ORT list displays one terminal screen of information at a time. Press O to display the next screen.) 15. In menu 3, press S (list event log) and then press zero “0” and then press the period key “.” to list the complete event log. 16. In menu 3, press F (list call log), then press F again (complete log) and then press the period key “.” to the complete event log.” For extended information, press X. 17. Close the log file on the terminal program. 18. The log file is in text format (.txt file). Open the file and add notes to the beginning of the file indicating:• System serial number (from the label on the front of the unit) • Aircraft and customer name• Any notes about the problems encountered• Contact name, telephone number, and e-mail address• E-mail the log file to EMS Technologies technical support at: hsd.help@emstechnologies.ca
Page 4–10418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal4. Adjustment/Alignment ProceduresA. GeneralThere are no adjustment/alignment procedures required for HSD or HSD-X transceivers.
Page 4–10518 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal5. Modification HistoryTable 4–28 lists the modification history for the HSD transceiver. This history is provided to aid the technician in understanding the reason for issuing a service bulletin and to describe the changes to the equipment. Table 4–28. Modification HistoryService Bulletin Description of Modification1110-SB-0001/A Upgrades channel card software to version 3.0. Upgrades the control processor software to version 4.4. Upgrades accommodate Inmarsat system change and fix software bugs.1110-SB-0002/A HPA Mute and ARINC 429 driver repair hardware modification. Backplane modification to the HPA wiring harness corrected the reverse biasing of the Mute lines affecting all units installed with a Ball dual-conformal-array antenna.1110-SB-0003/A Resolves problems with Cooperative Mode operation1110-SB-0004/A Hardware upgrade to install Data I/O Type 2 card1110-SB-0005/B Upgrades the hardware for Honeywell Combined Mode (HCM) to include a RF detector and a variable attenuator on the Aero H path of the pre-HPA combiner and allows the reading and control of this attenuator through a serial connection to the combiner. The control processor code is upgraded to include processing of the attenuator settings in the power control algorithm and to allow setting of the attenuator as part of the combined operation. This version does not support Cooperative Mode (with SAT-906).1110-SB-0006/A Channel card software upgrade to support MPDS 1110-SB-0007/A Upgrades the HSD-128 Control Processor software to version 6.5. This version adds the Multi-Channel capability to the HSD-128 software to support HSD-128 units integration with external HSD-X channels (PN 1110-A-0401).1110-SB-0010/A Hardware upgrade to dual-channel for single channel card transceivers1110-SB-0011/B Upgrades the Channel Card software to version C35 to fix Cooperative Mode bug in Channel Card software version C30. Upgrades software to recognize Cooperative Mode System Config hardware strapping. 1110-SB-0012/A Upgrades the channel card software to version C41 (6.0) which supports enhanced HSD functionality in all modes of operation, (including multi-channel configurations) and the use of Inmarsat services—including AMBE STU capability. In Cooperative Mode systems, MPDS is not supported with this version of software.Upgrades the control processor software to version 7.0, which enhances all modes of operation. Selective Mode units operating Category A Inmarsat terminals may experience GPS faults when operating this version of software (workaround: deactivate GPS protection).1110-SB-0013/A Adds software identification label to HSD units
Page 4–10618 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal1110-SB-0014/A Data I/O Type 2 Software Upgrade for units with a Data I/O Type 2 card installed1110-SB-0015/B HSD Control Process Software Enhancement1110-SB-0401/A Upgrades software to support AMBE STU and improve system and MPDS operation1110-SB-0402/A Adds software identification label to HSD units Table 4–28. Modification HistoryService Bulletin Description of Modification
Page 5–118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalMAINTENANCE AND REPAIR1. GeneralThis section provides the maintenance and repair information applicable for all HSD transceiver models.2. MaintenanceThe HSD Transceiver does not require routine maintenance.3. RepairAll repair procedures must be completed by EMS SATCOM approved repair facilities. A. Repair Tools and SuppliesNo special supplies are required to repair this equipment. HSD units that require servicing must be returned to EMS Technologies, Canada or to an EMS SATCOM approved service center. Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for unit testing requirements and procedures.B. Repair ProceduresThis equipment does not require any special repair procedures. C. Removal ProceduresIf an HSD or HSD-X unit must be removed from service for repair, with power removed, disconnect all equipment from the unit and then remove it from the ARINC tray. If an HSD-X unit is removed for servicing, the Multi-Channel HSD system will still operate (with reduced channel capacity) as long as the HSD-X trays are populated as shown in Figure 5–1.With an HSD-X unit removed from the series, the remaining HSD-X units must be moved so that the empty tray is always the last tray in the installation series. If the RF path is not equipped with isolators (either separate or built into the combiner), cap all unused splitter outputs and combiner inputs with 50-ohm terminations.
Page 5–218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalFigure 5–1. HSD-X Order of RemovalD. Repair Facility ApprovalsThe EMS Technologies SATCOM Division, located at 400 Maple Grove Road in Ottawa, Ontario, Canada, is a Transport Canada Approved Maintenance Organization (AMO). In accordance with the Technical Arrangement on Maintenance between Canada and the European aviation authority JAA, and due to the Bilateral Agreement between Canada and the United States aviation authority FAA, EMS SATCOM conforms to the maintenance requirements of JAR 145 and FAR 145 respectively. E. Return for Repair InformationTo return equipment to EMS Technologies for repair, follow the Return Materials Authorization procedure. Failure to comply with this procedure may cause shipping delays and additional charges.(1) Warranty ReturnsEquipment that qualifies for warranty repair can be returned to EMS SATCOM for repair or replacement at our discretion. The customer shall pay the shipping costs to EMS SATCOM and EMS SATCOM will pay for the shipping costs to return the repaired/replaced unit to the customer.(2) Non-Warranty ReturnsEquipment that fails to work properly because of improper or negligent use, abuse, shipping damage or any other condition can still be returned to EMS SATCOM for repair or replacement at our discretion. The customer will be notified of the cost to repair or replace the unit prior to invoicing for the repair or replacement. The customer shall pay for the shipping costs to and from EMS Technologies.(3) Repackaging RequirementsAn HSD returned to EMS Technologies must be returned in its original shipping container. Failure to do so may invalidate the warranty. If an HSD shipping container is unavailable, the customer must request a replacement container from EMS SATCOM or assume responsibility for the packaging and shipping.
Page 5–318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal(4) Return Materials Authorization (RMA) ProcedureIf it is determined that a unit must be returned to EMS SATCOM for repair or overhaul, please follow the Return Materials Authorization procedure as follows: 1. Have the following information ready before calling the SATCOM Product’s Customer Service Center:• Model number (e.g. HSD);• Unit part number (e.g. 1110-A-0001);• Serial number;• Description of failure;• Federal ID no. (if applicable); and,• Purchase Order number (if available). 2. Call EMS Technologies Customer Service at (1-888) 300-7415 or (613) 591-3086. 3. Request an RMA number. 4. Pack the HSD in an EMS SATCOM-approved shipping-container. 5. Write the RMA number on the outside of the shipping container and ship to:<RMA Number>EMS Technologies400 Maple Grove RoadOttawa, Ontario, CANADAK2V 1B8 6. Fax shipping details with Way Bill # to the attention of the EMS SATCOM R&O Coordinator at (613) 591-8951.Note: The processing of LRU returns is limited to standard business hours from 8:00 am to 4:00 pm EST.
Page 5–418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal4. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness, FAR 25.1529This section presents the special instructions and maintenance requirements for continued airworthiness of the HSD High-Speed Data Transceiver. Installation of the HSD on an aircraft by supplemental type certificate (STC) or Form 337 obligates the aircraft operator to include the maintenance information supplied by this manual in the operator’s Aircraft Maintenance manual and the operator’s Aircraft Scheduled Maintenance Program. A. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness ProceduresThe following paragraphs describe all maintenance requirements and instructions for continued airworthiness of the HSD or HSD-X transceiver. a. This manual contains maintenance information for the HSD and HSD-X units (including system description, system operation, removal, installation, test and fault isolation, and maintenance and repair). b. Add the LRU part numbers and other necessary part numbers contained in this manual to the aircraft operator’s appropriate, aircraft illustrated parts catalog (IPC). c. Add all wiring diagram information contained in this manual to the aircraft operator’s appropriate aircraft Wiring Diagram Manuals. d. HSD and HSD-X transceivers are considered on-condition units. No additional or routine maintenance is required. e. If an HSD or HSD-X transceiver is inoperative, remove the unit, secure cables and wiring, collar applicable switches and circuit breakers, and placard them as “inoperative.” Before flight, revise the equipment list and weight and balance data as applicable and record the removal of the unit in the log book [refer to section 91.213 of the FAR or the aircraft’s minimum equipment list (MEL)]. f. HSD and HSD-X transceivers are not field-repairable. All units must be returned to the EMS SATCOM factory or authorized repair centers for repair. Instructions for the removal of the unit for repair are provided in this section. g. Repaired units must be re-installed on the aircraft in accordance with the instructions provided in this manual. The operation of all repaired units must be verified using the operational verification tests and procedures provided in this manual before being approved for return to service. All special tools required to test the unit for approval for return to service are listed and described in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1. Approval for return to service must be entered in the logbook as required by section 43.9 of the FAR. h. The following scheduled maintenance tasks must be added to the aircraft operator’s appropriate aircraft maintenance program:• Recommended periodic scheduled servicing tasks: None required.• Recommended periodic inspections: None required.• Recommended periodic scheduled preventative maintenance tests (tests to determine system condition and/or latent failures): None required.
Page A–118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalAPPENDIX A: INMARSAT SATELLITE BEAM COVERAGEInmarsat operates four, strategically placed geostationary satellites. Each satellite is located over and named after an oceanic region. The four satellite ocean regions are: • Atlantic Ocean Region-East (AOR-E)• Atlantic Ocean Region-West (AOR-W)• Indian Ocean Region (IOR)• Pacific Ocean Region (POR)The diagram below represents the satellite ocean regions with approximate transfer coordinates for satellite transitions.The four satellite ocean regions are made up of smaller, spot-beam coverage areas. The following maps show the Inmarsat satellite spot-beam coverage for the four ocean regions—as well as a composite map of the four regions combined.
Page A–218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal
Page A–318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal
Page A–418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalBlank Page
Page B–118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalAPPENDIX B: TROUBLESHOOTING CHECKLISTBefore proceeding to the detailed testing and troubleshooting procedures provided in this manual, read the following QuickStart Troubleshooting Checklist. The QuickStart Troubleshooting Checklist provides answers to common HSD system activation questions.1. Have you registered with a service provider to activate service?You must register with an Inmarsat-authorized service provider to activate an account to access the Satellite Communications network using an HSD Aeronautical Transceiver. Contact Inmarsat for a list of available service providers at:Inmarsat Customer Care 99 City Road, London, EC1Y 1AX Tel: +44 20 7728 1777 Fax: +44 20 7728 1142 E-mail: customer_care@inmarsat.com2 Has your account been activated? Once registered, your HSD Transceiver is assigned terminal identification numbers called Forward IDs (FWD ID). The HSD transceiver must be strapped accordingly. Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed strapping and installation instructions. Note: The service registration information may take a few days to be incorporated into the system databases at the Land Earth Station (LES) level. New units being commissioned are not validated by the LES until their customer database has been updated by Inmarsat to reflect the registration and activation of your unit.To verify that the service registration information has been validated at the LES, call 33 # for assistance. Confirm with the LES operator that the forward IDs assigned to your unit are valid and active.3 Is the HSD/HSD-X transceiver seated properly?In cases where the HSD or HSD-X is not fully seated into the ARINC 600 connector (to the rear of the Fan Tray), the user may experience intermittent system operation. If intermittent system operation occurs:Check that the polarization pins are installed correctly as indicated on the applicable Outline and Installation drawing. Ensure the HSD/HSD-X is fully inserted into the tray and that the front, hold-down screws are properly tightened to secure the unit.4 Is all cabling attached correctly and securely? Broken connections and improper cabling are the most common causes of HSD units “not working.” Before proceeding with testing and troubleshooting, complete the following checks:• Check that all cables and wiring are routed and connected correctly and securely.• Ensure the unit is installed with correct power source. • Verify that all external user and networking devices (for example: terminal adapters, routers, fax, telephones, computers) are connected and configured properly.
Page B–218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal5 Have any changes to the system been made? For previously installed and functional units, make note of any changes made to the system since the last time the unit functioned without problems. • Were any new devices or systems connected to the unit?• Have any connecting devices or equipment been removed or replaced? If so, check that all new or replaced connections are attached and configured correctly.• Have you changed service providers or re-configured the system in any way? 6 Are your Primary and Secondary LES Access Codes programmed for all Ocean Regions? In Control Card software versions later than 5.7, the system default for LES access codes is set to “0” (zero), which must be configured to a valid LES access codes before operation. Refer to "System Operation" on page 2-1 for details.7 Was the operational mode of the system strapped or configured correctly?Verify that the System Mode wiring straps match the installation configuration mode, for example Stand-Alone Mode, Honeywell Combined Mode (HCM), Cooperative Mode, Multi-Channel or Selective Mode.
Page C–118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalAPPENDIX C: RJ-45 CABLE TERMINATION DETAILS
Page C–218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal
Page D–118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalAPPENDIX D: INSTALLATION CHECKLISTAircraft Identification: HSD Model Number:HSD Installation Mode: HSD Serial Number:Name: Signature: Date:Checks completed by:Approved/witnessed by:Section Parameter Item N/A RValueInstallation/ MechanicalPhysical Service/maintenance accessEnvironmental considerationsFan Tray Plug configurationChassis bondingFan rotationARINC 600 Connector Polarized pins
Page D–218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalInstallation/ElectricalPower Connections + 28 V dc polarity115 V ac polarityChassis groundingVoltage Measurements + 28 V dc level115 V ac levelIRS Input IRS wiringIRS formatConfiguration Strap Pins SDISystem configurationData I/OForward AddressWOW (optional)Ethernet Strapped to RJ45 distribution pointsISDN Strapped to RJ45 distribution pointsMPDS Strapped to DB9S distribution connectorsRemotes Manual Reset switch operationRemotes Maintenance port (DB9S access)Power and Fault LED indicatorsRF Coax Rx i/p cable lossTx o/p cable lossAntenna Connection Antenna manufacturer and typeWired as per manufacturerMulti-control loopbacks installedConfiguration Access codesChannel cardsStand-Alone modeValid beamsForward ID RF i/p attenuationTESTSystem Power-up Visual LED indicationsPower-up computer displayTESTOn-air System Log-on Reset messages observedLog-on verifiedVoice/Data Call Voice/data aircraft all placedSection Parameter Item N/A RValue
Page D–318 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalOperational TestTracking results checklist completedAntenna Tracking ResultsHeading(Deg)Antenna selectedAntenna AzimuthHSD HSDXCh 1 Ch 2 #1 #2C/NO sig C/NO sig C/NO sig C/NO sig153045607590105120135150165180195210225240255270285300315330345360TESTOptional Checks Ground segmentFlight segmentSection Parameter Item N/A RValue
Page D–418 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalOperational TestTracking results checklist completedAntenna Tracking ResultsHeading(Degrees)Antenna selectedAntenna AzimuthCard # 1 Card # 2C/No Signal C/No Signal153045607590105120135150165180195210225240255270285300315330345360TESTOptional Checks Ground segmentFlight segmentSection Parameter Item N/A RValue
Page E–118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalAPPENDIX E: RECORD OF ACCOMPLISHMENTTo record the accomplishment of a software service bulletin, complete a copy of this form for each unit (serial number) that has been upgraded.Fax or e-mail all Record of Accomplishments (one for each unit) to EMS Technologies. If you require assistance, contact EMS SATCOM Product Support.EMS SATCOM Product Support: 1.888.300.7415 (routed to a mobile after regular business hours) E-mail: hsd.help@emstechnologies.ca FAX:1.613.591.0797SOFTWARE STATUS AFTER ACCOMPLISHMENT OF SERVICE BULLETIN:HSD IDENTIFICATIONPart No Serial NoHardware Revision Software Revision No. (LI revision)AIRCRAFT IDENTIFICATIONType Serial NoRegistration (Tail) NoCUSTOMER INFORMATIONCompany Phone NoContact Name SignatureDEALERCompany Phone NoContact Name SignatureApplication Channel Cards HPA Data I/O HSD HSD-X HSD HSD-X HSD HSD-X HSD HSD-XExample 4.3 C30 V9A4 DIOMain 1.17.elfOriginal SoftwareNew Software Installed
Page E–218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalBlank Page
Page F–118 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalAPPENDIX F: RF SPLITTER
Page F–218 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalBlank Page
18 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalNotes
18 September 2007SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALeNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data TerminalNotes

Navigation menu